Owner's Manual E-Class Saloon - Mercedes-Benz · PDF File Owner's Manual E-Class Saloon E 320 E 320 4MATIC E 500 E 500 4MATIC E55AMG. Our company and employees congratulate

E-Class Saloon Owner's Manual

E 320E 320 4MATICE 500E 500 4MATICE 55 AMG

Our company and our employees congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes.

Choosing our product is an expression of trust in the name of our company. In addition, it is an example of wanting a car that is as easy to operate as possible and provides many years of service.

Your Mercedes-Benz represents the effort of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To ensure your driving pleasure and your and your passengers' safety, we ask for a small investment of your time:

� Please read this manual carefully and then return it to your vehicle for reference.

� Follow the instructions in this manual. They are designed to help you operate your Mercedes-Benz.

� Pay attention to the warnings and precautions in this manual. They are designed to improve the safety of the vehicle operator and its passengers.

We wish you many kilometers of safe and pleasant driving.

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC DaimlerChrysler company

Contents

Entry ................................................. 9Product information................................. 9User's manual...................... ......... ......... 10

Service and warranty information ..... 10 Important information for retail customers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz Automobiles, California ..... 11 Maintenance ................................... ..... ....... 12 Roadside Assistance ..................... 12 Change address or owner ..... 12 Operating the vehicle outside the United States or Canada ..................... .. 13

Where to find it........................................... 14Symbols... ....... . ..................................................... 15Safety of use ..................................................................... . sixteen

Proper use of the vehicle ................... 16 Problems with the vehicle ................... ..................... 17 Reporting Security Defects ............... 18

Notification of Security Defects ................ 18

In short ................................................ 19 Cab ................... ... ..................................... ........ 20 Instrument panel ................................... 22 Multifunction steering wheel ..... .................... ... 24 Console Center ..................... ......................... 25

Upper part ..................................... 25 Lower part ..................... ..................................................... .......... 26

Roof control panel ..................... 27 Door control panel ............... . ........... 28

Getting started ................................... 29 Unlocking .............. . ............................. thirty

Unlocking with SmartKey ......... 30 Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* ...... 32

Regulation ..................................................... 34 Seats ................................... 34 Steering wheel ..... ............. 36Mirrors ................... .......... ........ .... 37

Driving................................................. 40 Fastening the seat belts ................... 40 Starting the engine ................... ... 43 Switching on the headlights ..................... 46 Turn signals and main beam ..... 47 Windshield wipers ................... ................... 47 Problems while driving ................... 49

Parking and locking .................................... 51 Parking brake ................... ....................................................................... ..... 51 Turning off the headlights ................... 52 Turning off the engine ................... ................... 52

Contents

Safety and security ..................................... 55 User safety ..................... ......... ......... ......... 56

Airbags ..................................... 57 Seat belts ...................... . ................................... 63Children in the vehicle.................. ..................................... 66 Locking the rear door windows ................... ................... 78

Panic Alarm ..................................................... ......... .... 79 Activation ..................................... 79 Disable ...................................................... 79

Ride safety systems ................... 80ABS ................... ............. .... ...... ...........80BAS ......................... ...................... ...................... 82ENG ............. .................... .................... 82 SBC brake system ........ .......... 85 Electronic All-Wheel Drive (4MATIC) with ESP .... ... 88

Anti-theft systems .................... 89 Immobilizer....... .................... ................................ 89 Anti-theft alarm ................................... .... 89 Trailer alarm ................... 90

Controls in detail ..................................... 93 Locking and unlocking .................................... ....................... 94

SmartKey ................................... 94SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ......... .................. 97Opening the doors from the inside 103Opening the tailgate ................... 103Close the tailgate ..... ............... ......... 105 Tailgate opening/closing system* ..... 105 Tailgate emergency release ..... 110 Automatic central locking .. .. ... .... 111 Locking and unlocking from the inside ................................... 111

Seats ................................................. 113Easy in/out function* ..................... 113Removing and installing the front seat head restraints ...................114 Rear seat head restraints ..................... .....115 Multicontour seat* ..................................... 116 Drive-Dynamic seat* ..... .................................. 117 Seat heating* ...................... ..... 118 Seat ventilation* ................... 119

Memory function ..................................................... 121 Memorizing items ..................................................... 122 Recalling a preset item. 122 Memorizing the park position of the exterior mirror ................... 123

Lightning ................................................. 124 Exterior lights switch . ............... 124 Combination switch ............................ 127 Flashing beacon Hazards ................. 128 Interior lighting ................................ 128 Door entrance lights . .................... 130 Luggage compartment lamp....... ..... ...................130

Instrument panel ..................................... 131 Instrument panel lighting ............... ........ 131 Coolant temperature gauge ................... 132 Odometer ............... ................... 132 Tachometer ................... 133 Outside temperature gauge . .... 133

Contents

Control system ..................................... 134 Multifunction display ..................... .................. 134 Multifunction steering wheel ................... 135 Menus ..................... ...... ...... 137 Standard Display Menu ................... 139 AUDIO Menu ............... ......... .... 139 NAV Menu* ..................... 141 Distronic Menu* .................................. 141 Troubleshooting menu ............... 142 Settings menu ..................................... 143 Trip computer menu ................... .................. 158 PHONE menu* ..................................... 159

Automatic Transmission ............... 162 One-Touch Shifting ..................... 163 Gear Ranges ..... . .................... 164 Position of the gear lever ............... 165 Gear lever on the steering wheel (Speedshift) E 55 AMG.. .................. 166 Programming Mode Select Switch ................... 168 Throttle Position ................... .. ............... 168 E 55 AMG manual transmission program .. 169 Emergency operation (Emergency mode) ................... 171

Good visibility ..................................................... 172 Rear view mirror ..... .. ................... 172 Windshield wipers ................... 173 Headlight washer system* ...... .. 174 Sun visors ..................................... 174 Rear window sun visor * ........ ... .... 176Roller* in the rear doors. 176 Rear window defroster ................... 177

Air conditioning................................. 178 Adjusting the temperature.. .. .....182Adjusting the air distribution ...................182Adjusting the air flow ...................183 Defrosting. ................................... 183 Air recirculation mode ..... ........... . . . ..... 184 Switching off the air conditioning system ................................... ... 185 Air Conditioning........................... 186 Residual Heat and Ventilation*................... 186

Automatic air conditioning* .................. 188 Adjusting the temperature ..... 192 Adjusting the air distribution .................. . ... ... 193Adjusting the amount of air ....... 194Maximum cooling MAX COOL ...... 194Defrosting .. .. .... ... .......................... 194

Air recirculation mode ............... 194 Charcoal filter .............................. .. .. .... 196 Deactivating the air conditioning system ..................................... ..... ...... 197 Air conditioning ..... 198 Residual heat and ventilation ...... 198 Rear air conditioning .. . .........199

Power windows .................. 201Opening and closing the windows 201Synchronizing the power windows . ....204

Sliding/tilting roof* ................................... 205 Opening and closing the sliding/tilting roof .... ... .... ....................................205Adjusting the sliding/tilting roof...................... ......208

Panoramic sliding/tilting roof* ..................................... 209 Opening and closing the blinds ................... ..................................... 209Opening and closing the panoramic sliding/tilting roof ............... 210Synchronizing the panoramic sliding/tilting roof -tilting .... ....... 213Solar panel* .................................... 214

Contents

Driving systems ................................... 215 Cruise control .............. .. ................................... 215 Dystronic*................ ................... 218Airmatic DC (Dual Control)* .......... 230Parktronic System* (Parking assistant) .... . ......... 233

Luggage compartment ................................... 237 Luggage compartment * ..... .. ................................. 237 Ski bag*.. .. .. . ...................... 237 Split rear seat* ................... 240 Loadspace extension* . ........... 242 Load instructions ................... 243 Load lashing rings* .. ... ...... ........ 244

Useful features ..................................... 245Storage ................... ........ ..... 245 Ashtrays ................................... ........... 249 Cigarette lighter ................................... 250 12V socket*.. ........ ......... 251 Heated steering wheel* ............... 251 Telephone*.............. ................... 252 TeleAssist* ..................... .....253 Garage door opener ... ....261

Operation ................................................... 267First 1,000 miles (1,500 km) ... ......... 268 Driving instructions ................... 269

Drive Responsively: Save Fuel ......................... 269 Drinking and Driving .............................. 269 Pedals . .................................................... 269Electric assist . ......... .................... 270 Brakes................ ...... ..... ..... 270 Driving ..................................... . .................. 272Parking ..................................... .................... 272 Tires ..................................... ................................... 272 Hydroplaning ................... ....... ........ 273 Tire Grip ........................................ 274 Speed Index tires ..................................... 274 Instructions Driving conditions in winter ..... ................. 275 Standing Water ............................ 276 Passenger Compartment . ............... 277 Driving abroad ................... ..... ........... 277 Control and operation of the radio transmitter ................... 277 Catalyst .. ................. 278 Emissions Control ..... 278 Coolant Temperature .. 278 ............... 279

At a gas station ..................... 280Refueling ............... . ................................ 280 Regularly and before a long journey, check ............ ... . ......... 281

Engine Compartment ............... 283 Bonnet ............... . ................... ............... 283 Engine oil ......................... ................................... 284 Transmission Fluid Level ............... 287 Coolant Level ................... .......... . ..................... 287Battery ..................... ..................... 288 Windshield washer system and headlight cleaning system* ................... 289

Tires and wheels ..................................................... 291Important Notes ..... .. ...... 291 Tire Life .......................... ..... 292 Direction of rotation. ................... 292 Checking the tire pressure .. 292 Spinning the wheels ..... ... .. ...... 295

Driving in winter ................................... 297 Winter tires ..................... ..................... 297 Block heater* (Canada only) ................... 298 Snow chains ..... ... . .............................. 298

Contents

Maintenance................................................. ............... 299 Flexible Service System PLUS (FSS PLUS).............. 299 Resetting the service indicator....... 300 Service interval exceeded... .. 300Accessing the Service Indicator... ... 300Resetting the Service Indicator..... 300Setting the Date for Special Tasks 302Accessing Service Data Information... ................... ........ ........... 303

Car care........................................... 304Cleaning and caring for your car....... . ...304

Practical Advice ............................ 311 What to do if... ......... ... ................... 312

Indicators in the instrument cluster ..... 312 Indicators in the center console ................... 319 Messages on the screen .... . .... .... 321

Where can I find...? ............................... 356First Aid Kit ..................... ............... 356 Spare wheel ..................................... ..... 356 Trunk ..................................... 357 Car tool kit ..... ........ ............................... 358

Unlocking/locking in an emergency .................. 359 Unlocking the vehicle ................................... 359 Locking the vehicle ...... .................................... 360Replacing the SmartKey/SmartKey battery with the KEYLESS-GO* . ................... ........ 361 Emergency opening of the fuel filler flap . 363 Manual Gear Lever Release ................................... 363

Emergency opening/closing ..... 364 Sliding/tilting roof* or panoramic sliding/tilting roof* ..... 364

Replacing bulbs................................ 365 Bulbs........................... ..................................................... ...... 365 Replacing the headlight bulbs ..... 367 Replacing the rear headlight bulbs ..... 369

Replacing the wiper blades ................... 370 Removing the wiper blades ................... 370 Installing the wiper blades ................... 371

Flat tire ..................................... 372 Vehicle preparation ............... ...... 372 Wheel installation spare ................... 372

Batteries................................................. ................. 379 Disconnecting the Battery . ...............380 Removing the battery ...............................381 Charging and Reinstalling the Battery .................................................................. .................. 381 Reconnecting the battery ............... 381

Jump-starting ............................ 382 Towing the vehicle ................................... ...... ..... 385

Installing the trailer eyebolt ................... 388 Fuses ................................... . ................................... 389

Passenger Compartment Fuse Box ......................... 389

Contents

Technical data............................................ 391 Spare parts service....... ...................................... 392 Scope of warranty................................ ..... 393

Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet 393

Identification Labels ................... 394 V-Belt Drive System ................... 395

E 320/E 500 .............................................. 395E 55 AMG ... .......................................... 395

Engine................................................. .. 396 Wheels and tires............................................ 398

Tires of the same size ................................... 399 Tires of different sizes ..................... ..... ... 401 Spare wheel ............................ 402

Electrical installation.................................. 403Main dimensions....... ... ..................................... 404Weights......... ................... ...................................... .... 405

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ................... 406Capacities ................................... .......... 406 Engine oils ................................................... ............... 409 Engine oil additives ......................... 409 Air conditioning refrigerant ..... ............... 409 Brake fluid ..................................... .................. 409 Premium Unleaded Gasoline ............... 410 Fuel Requirements . ..................... 410 Additives for gasoline ..................... ..... 410 Coolants ................................... 411 Windscreen and headlight washer system . ................... .. ...... 413

Consumer information ............... 414 Uniform tire quality classification ............... 414

Technical conditions........................................... 417

Index................................................... 423

Product information

�

Entry

Product information In your own interest, please consider the following information:

We recommend the use of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as spare parts and accessories that we have expressly approved for your vehicle model.

We have tested these parts for reliability, safety and particular suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

We cannot evaluate other products and therefore cannot be held responsible for them, even if there is official approval or authorization by government or other agencies in individual cases. The use of such parts and accessories may adversely affect vehicle safety, performance or reliability. Please don't use them.

Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts and spare parts and accessories approved by us are available at your Mercedes-Benz Authorized Centre, where you will receive full information, including permitted technical modifications, and where the correct installation will take place. .

Entry

user manual

� User Manual This User Manual contains a lot of useful information. We encourage you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving.

For your own safety and longer vehicle life, we recommend that you follow the instructions and warnings in this manual. Failure to do so may result in damage to the vehicle or injury to yourself or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Your vehicle may be equipped with some or all of the equipment described in this manual. Accordingly, you can find explanations for optional equipment that is not installed on the vehicle. If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be happy to demonstrate the correct procedures.

We are constantly striving to improve our products and please understand that we reserve the right to make changes to the design and equipment. For this reason, the information, illustrations and descriptions in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.

Optional equipment is also described in this manual, including instruction manuals if required. As these are special order items, the descriptions and illustrations contained herein may differ slightly from the actual equipment of the vehicle.

If there are equipment details in this Owner's Manual that are not shown or described, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be happy to advise you on proper care and maintenance procedures.

The owner's manual and service booklet are important documents that should be kept with the vehicle.

Service and warranty information

The Warranty and Service Booklet provides details on the warranties that cover your Mercedes-Benz, including:

� New Vehicle Limited Warranty

� Guarantee of emission system

� Emission Performance Guarantee

� California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont only)

� State Guarantee Application Laws (Lemon Laws)

Entry

user manual

Important information for retail customers and lessors of Mercedes-Benz Automobiles in California

Under California law, you may be entitled to a replacement vehicle or a refund of the purchase or lease price if Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized service or repair facilities fail to correct one or more significant defects. or vehicle defects that are expressly warranted after a reasonable number of repair attempts. Within 18 months of original vehicle delivery or 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer, whichever comes first, a reasonable number of repair attempts are assumed for the retail purchaser or lessee if one or more of these the following situations:

(1) the same significant defect or failure causes a condition that could result in death or serious injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or failure has been repaired two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need repairs,

the

(3) the vehicle is out of service due to the repair of the same or different significant defects or failures for a total of more than 30 calendar days. Written notice must be sent to us, not the dealer, at Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer Assistance Center, One Mercedes Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.

Entry

user manual

Maintenance

The service manual describes all necessary maintenance work that must be performed at regular intervals.

Always have the service booklet handy when you take your vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop. The Service Advisor will record each service in the booklet for you.

Roadside assistance

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance program provides technical assistance from the factory in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the free Roadside Assistance number

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the US) 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)

will be collected by Mercedes-Benz customer service representatives 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

Additional information can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance brochure in the glove box.

Change of residence or ownership

If you change your address, be sure to submit the "Notice of Change of Address" in the Warranty and Service Information Book, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Care Center (USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes or Service (USA) Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in your own interest that we can contact you should the need arise.

If you are selling your Mercedes, leave all documents with the vehicle so that it is available to the next dealer.

If you purchased this vehicle used, be sure to submit the "Notice of Purchase of a Used Vehicle" located in the Warranty and Service Information Book or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Care Center (in the US). ) at 1-800-FORMERCedes or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Entry

user manual

Vehicle operation outside the United States or Canada

If you plan to operate your vehicle outside the country, please note that:

� service points or spare parts may not be readily available,

� Unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts,

Gasoline can have a much lower octane number and the wrong fuel can damage your engine.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe as part of our European delivery programme. For more information, please contact your Mercedes-Benz Authorized Center or write to:

IN USA:

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCEurope Supply DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

In Canada:

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.Europe Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Entry

where to find it

� Where to find it This owner's manual is intended to provide comprehensive support information for the vehicle user. For ease of access, each section has its own reference color:

look

Here you will find an overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver's seat.

Starting

Here you will find all the information you need for your first trip. You should read this section first if this is your first Mercedes-Benz or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle.

Protection and security

Here you will find descriptions of your vehicle's safety features.

checks in detail

Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed in your vehicle. This section is an extension of the "Getting Started" section and also describes technical innovations. If you already know the basic functions of your vehicle, this section will be of particular interest to you.

Operation

Here you will find all the information necessary for the proper operation of your vehicle.

Practical tips

This section provides quick help in solving possible problems.

Technical data

In this section you will find all the important technical data of your vehicle.

indices

The glossary provides explanations of the most important technical terms.

The table of contents and index are designed to help you find information quickly and easily.

The following publications are part of the vehicle documentation:

� this manual

� service booklet

Separate Owner's Manuals will be provided as needed based on the options installed in the vehicle.

Entry

symbolism

� Symbols The following symbols are used in this manual:

* Optional equipment is marked with an asterisk. As standard equipment varies from model to model, the descriptions and illustrations in this manual may differ slightly from the actual vehicle equipment.

� This symbol indicates instructions that must be followed.

� Several of these symbols appearing in succession indicate a multi-step procedure.

� Page This symbol tells you where to find more information on a topic.

�� This continuation symbol indicates an aborted procedure that will continue on the next page.

-> In the glossary of technical terms, this symbol is used to indicate links to definitions of terms.

DISPLAY Words that appear on the multifunction display are printed in the font shown here.

Warning! GRAM

Warnings draw attention to hazards that may pose a threat to the health or life of the user or the health or life of other people.

!Highlights hazards that can damage your vehicle.

iHelpful tips or additional information that you may find useful.

sixteen

Entry

operational security

� Operational safety Proper use of the vehicle

Proper use of the vehicle requires familiarization with the following information and rules:

� precautions contained in this manual

� chapter "Technical data" of this manual

� traffic regulations

� motor vehicle regulations and safety regulations

Warning! GRAM

Improper handling of electronic components and related software may cause them to stop working. As the vehicle's electronic components are interconnected, any modifications made may have an undesirable effect on other systems. Electronic failures can seriously affect the operational safety of the vehicle.

Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have electronic components repaired or modified.

Other incorrect work or modifications to the vehicle may also adversely affect the operational safety of the vehicle.

Some safety systems only work when the engine is running. Therefore, never switch off the engine while driving.

Warning! GRAM

Strong impacts to the vehicle chassis or tires/wheels, such as when driving over obstacles, debris, or potholes, can cause serious damage and impair the safe operation of the vehicle. If you feel sudden strong vibrations or disturbances in your journey, or suspect damage to your vehicle, you should turn on your hazard lights, slow down carefully, and carefully drive to an area that is a safe distance from the path.

Inspect the vehicle chassis and tires/wheels for damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, it must be towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Dealer or other qualified service or repair workshop for further inspection or repair.

Warning! GRAM

Various warning labels are attached to your vehicle. These warning labels are intended to inform you and others about various hazards. Do not remove any of these warning labels unless specifically instructed to do so in the information on the label itself. Removing any of these labels may make you and others unaware of certain hazards that could lead to accident and/or personal injury.

Entry

Vehicle problems

� Problems with your vehicle If you experience a problem with your vehicle, especially one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we encourage you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified if necessary. If the matter is not resolved satisfactorily, please discuss the issue with the management of the Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, contact us at one of the following addresses:

IN USA:

Customer CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

In Canada:

Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Entry

Report security flaws

� Safety Defect Report US Only: The following text has been published as required by manufacturers under Title 49, Part 575 of the US Code of Federal Regulations, pursuant to the "National Road Safety and Motor Vehicle Act of 1966".

Report security flaws

If you believe your vehicle has a defect that could result in an accident, injury, or death, you should immediately notify the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it can launch an investigation, and if it finds there is a safety issue with a group of vehicles, it can order a recall and repair campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual issues between you, your dealer or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, call the Motor Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in the Washington DC area) or write to: NHTSA, United States Department of Transportation USA, Washington, DC 20590 Other motor vehicle safety information can also be obtained from the helpline.

look

Cabin

combination of instruments

Multifunctional steering wheel

Center console

upper control panel

door control panel

look

Cabin

look

Cabin

Article page

1 Parking brake pedal 45, 51

2 Hood lock release 283

3 Steering wheel adjustment lever

Heated steering wheel* 251

4 Parking brake release 45

5 combination switches

� Indicators 47

� Windshield wipers 47

� High beam 47

6 Door control panel 28

7 Exterior light switch 124

Article page

8 Headlight washer button* 174

9 Cruise control lever

Cruise control 222

� Dystronic* 218

Instrument panel 22.131

b Multifunction steering wheel

24135

c Horn

d Voice control lever*, see separate manual

Article page

e Starter switch 31

f Parktronic warning light* on the front

233

g Master control panel 27

h Phone/glasses box 245

j Glove box lid release, glove box lock

245

k Glove box 245

Center console 25

look

combination of instruments

set of indicators

look

combination of instruments

Article page

1L Left Turn Signal Indicator Light

2V Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Warning Light

313

3 speedometer

4 Multi-function display with:

� Basic display with outdoor temperature display

146

� Status indicator with failure warning message

Daily counter 132

5 l Distance indicator1

1 Vehicles without Distronic*: Warning lamp without function. Comes on when the ignition is on. It should go out with the engine running.

317

6K right turn signal indicator light

Article page

7 Coolant temperature display with:

• Coolant temperature warning light

316

8 Tachometer with:

1 Indicator light for additional security system

318

- Anti-lock braking system (ABS) failure indicator light.

312

< Seat belt indicator 317

High beam indicator

127

9 Main counter with:

� Gear lever position 43

Programming mode 168

Article page

clock from: 148

; Brake warning light, except Canada

314

3 Brake warning light, Canada only

314

? Engine failure indicator light

315

b Fuel display with:

Fuel reserve warning light

317

c Reset button for:

� Reset trip odometer

132

� Adjusting the illumination of the instrument cluster

131

� Confirmation of new time settings

148

look

Multifunctional steering wheel

� Multifunctional steering wheel

Article page

1 Multifunction display on the speedometer

134

work control system

135

2 Select a submenu or adjust the volume

æ raise/increase

ç down/decrease

3 Phone*: Press the button

s to answer the call to make a call

t to end a call to reject an incoming call

Article page

4 menu systems: Press the button

è for the following system

ÿ for the old system

5 Menu navigation: Press the button

j until the next display

k for the previous screen

look

Center console

Center console Upper part Page

1 air conditioning

Automatic air conditioning*

178

188

2 COMAND system, see separate operating manual

3 Heated seat* on the passenger side

Seat ventilation*, passenger side

118

119

4 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) control switch.

5 Central locking switch 111

6 Button for opening/closing the storage compartment or CD changer*, see separate manual

246

7 Rear seat headrest switch, foldable

115

Article page

8 Rear window sun visor* 84

9 Heated seat*, driver's side

Seat ventilation*, driver's side

118

119

hazard light switch

128

b AIRBAG DEACTIVATE indicator light

look

Center console

Lower part Article Page

1 ashtray 249

2 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button*

3 Gearshift lever for automatic transmission

43165

4 Parking assist switch (Parktronic system)*

233

5 Adaptive Damping System (ADS) switch*

230

Article page

6 Vehicle Level Control Switch*

231

7 Distance adjustment knob for Distronic*

225

8 Distance Alert On/Off switch*

226

9 Automatic transmission programming mode switch

168

look

upper control panel

� Top control panel

Article page

1 Switches the rear interior lighting on/off

129

2 Automatic interior lighting 128

3 Switches the front interior lighting on/off

128

4 Sonda temperatury

5 Switching on/off the right reading lamp 128

6 Sliding/tilting roof* or panoramic sliding/tilting roof*

205209

Article page

7 Tele Aid button (emergency call system)

253

8 Rear view mirror 172

9 Reading lamps 128

Garage door opener 261

b Trailer alarm button 90

c Ambient lighting 152

dInterior lighting

e Left reading lamp on/off 129

look

door control panel

� Door control panel

Article page

1 Handle 103

2 Seat adjustment 35

3 Memory function (for storing seat, door mirror and steering wheel settings)

121

4 Adjusting the exterior mirrors

5 Front and rear side window open/close switches, rear window manual control switch

201

6 Remote tailgate release switch, tailgate opening/closing system*

105

Starting

unlock

Modification

driving

car park and lock

Starting

unlock

� The "Getting Started" section provides an overview of the most basic functions of the vehicle. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners should pay particular attention to the information provided here.

If you are already familiar with the basic functions described here, the "Detailed Controls" section will provide you with more information. Relevant page links are provided at the end of each segment.

Unlock Unlock with SmartKey

smart key

1 ‹ Lock Button2 Š Tailgate Unlock Button3 Œ Unlock Button4 В Panic Button (� page 79)

� Press the unlock button Œ on the SmartKey.

All direction indicators flash once. The door lock buttons move up.

The SBC brake system is on.

� Get in the vehicle and insert the SmartKey into the ignition.

For more information, see "Operation Details" (� page 94).

Starting

unlock

starter switch positions

start switch

0 To remove the SmartKey1 power adapter from some devices

Sera such as seat adjustment2 On (power for all

consumers) and driving position3 Starting position

Warning! GRAM

Always have the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle when leaving the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may result in an accident and/or serious injury.

iThe SmartKey can only be removed from the ignition switch when the shift lever is in the P position.

!If the SmartKey cannot be turned, the battery may not have sufficient charge.

� Check the battery and charge it if necessary (� page 381).

� Good start (� page 382).

To avoid accelerated battery discharge or complete battery discharge, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition switch when the engine is not running.

Starting

unlock

Unlock with KEYLESS-GO*

If it has KEYLESS-GO, the vehicle checks if the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid when you pull the door handle. If the SmartKey is valid, the door will be unlocked and can be opened.

The SmartKey function replaces the KEYLESS-GO function.

� Pull the handle.

The direction indicators will flash once. The door lock knobs move up.

The SBC brake system is on.

If the SmartKey is in the vehicle, pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the shift lever is equivalent to turning the SmartKey to different positions on the starter switch.

iTo unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be outside the vehicle, no more than approximately 1 meter from the door.

Warning! GRAM

When leaving the vehicle, always carry the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may result in an accident and/or serious injury.

Starting

unlock

1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

Before pressing the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button, the vehicle's on-board electronics are in state 0 (as when the SmartKey is removed).

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be in the vehicle.

� Make sure the shift lever is in the P position.

� Do not press the brake pedal.

position 1

� Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once.

This supplies power to some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustments.

On (or position 2)

� Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice.

This supplies energy to all electrical receivers. All lights on the instrument panel come on.

For more information, see "Operation Details" (� page 97). For information on starting the engine with the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, see "Starting with the KEYLESS-GO" (� page 44).

iIf you now press the start/stop button on the KEYLESS-GO

again, the ignition (position 2) is on.

� twice, the power is turned off again.

i Now, if you press the start/stop button on the KEYLESS-GO once, the power will be turned off again.

Starting

Modification

Regulation

Judgment

Warning! GRAM

All adjustments to the seats, head restraints, steering wheel and rear-view mirrors, as well as fastening the seat belts, must be done before starting the vehicle.

Warning! GRAM

Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving. Adjusting the seat while driving may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest reclined excessively as this can be dangerous. You can slip under the seat belt in a crash. If it slips underneath, the belt will exert force on the abdomen or neck. This may cause serious or fatal injury. The seat back and seat belts provide the best protection when the occupant is in a nearly upright position and the belts are positioned correctly across the body.

The seat must be adjusted so that the seat belt can be fastened correctly (� page 40).

Never put your hands under the seat or near moving parts when adjusting the seat.

Warning! GRAM

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition, carry it with the KEYLESS-GO* and lock the vehicle.

Even when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition or the SmartKey with KEY-LESS-GO* is removed from the vehicle, the power seats can be operated when the relevant door is open.

Therefore, do not leave children unattended in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may result in an accident and/or serious injury.

Warning! GRAM

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly buckled in the rear seats than in the front seats. Therefore, we strongly recommend that children sit in the back seats. Regardless of the seated position, children under the age of 12 must be transported and properly restrained in an appropriate infant or toddler seat or booster seat recommended for the child's height and weight. See “Children in the Vehicle” (� page 66) for more information.

The risk of serious or fatal injury to a child greatly increases if child seats are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the seat.

Starting

Modification

seat adjustment

The seat adjustment switches are located in the front doors.

1 Headrest height2 Seat height3 Seat inclination4 Seat adjustment front/back5 Backrest inclination

� Switch on the ignition. or

� Open the appropriate door.

Front and rear seat adjustment

� Move the switch forward or backward in the direction of the arrow 4.

Find a comfortable sitting position that still allows you to safely reach the accelerator/brake pedal. The position should be as far back as possible commensurate with the ability to operate the controls correctly.

Seat tilt

� Move the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 3 until your upper legs are lightly supported.

backrest inclination

� Move the switch forwards or backwards in the direction of arrow 5 until your arms are slightly bent while holding the steering wheel.

seat height

� Move the switch up or down in the direction of the arrow 2.

Make sure there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when moving the seat. Otherwise you may damage the seats.

The memory function (� page 121) allows you to save your seat position settings along with the steering wheel and door mirror settings.

Starting

Modification

headrest height

� Slide the switch up or down in the direction of the arrow 5.

tilt of the headrest

Manually adjust the angle of the headrest.

� Push or pull the bottom edge of the headrest cushion.

For more information on the seats, see the "Detailed Controls" chapter (� page 113).

steering wheel

Warning! GRAM

For your own safety, only ride with properly adjusted head restraints.

Adjust the headrest so that the center of the headrest supports the back of your head at eye level. This will reduce the possibility of head and neck injuries in the event of an accident or similar situation.

Do not drive without head restraints on the seat. Head restraints are designed to reduce injuries in a crash.

Warning! GRAM

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. If you adjust the steering wheel while driving, the driver may lose control of the vehicle.

Even when the SmartKey with KEY-LESS-GO* is removed from the ignition switch or the SmartKey with KEY-LESS-GO* is removed from the vehicle, the steering wheel adjustment function can be operated while the driver's door is open.

Therefore, do not leave children unattended in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may result in an accident and/or serious injury.

Starting

Modification

steering wheel adjustment

The steering wheel adjustment lever is located on the steering column (lower left corner).

1 Adjust the steering column inwards or outwards. 2 Adjust the steering column upwards or downwards

� Switch on the ignition.

� Open the driver's door.

Adjust the steering column inwards or outwards

� Move the lever forwards or backwards in the direction of arrow 1 until you are comfortable on the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent at the elbows.

Move the steering column up or down

� Move the joystick up or down in the direction of the arrow 2.

Make sure your legs can move freely and that all gauges (including faults and indicator lights) in the instrument cluster are clearly visible.

See "Heated Steering Wheel*"(� page 251) for more information.

Mirrors

Adjust the inside and outside rear-view mirrors before driving to get a good view of the road and road conditions.

interior rearview mirror

� Manually adjust the interior rearview mirror.

For more information, see "Operation Details" (� page 172).

The iMemory function (� page 121) allows you to save your seat position settings along with the settings for the steering wheel and door mirrors.

Warning! GRAM

In the event of an accident, liquid electrolyte may leak from the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks.

The electrolyte is irritating. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with the eyes, skin, clothing or respiratory system. In this case, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention if necessary.

Starting

Modification

Outside rearview mirror The buttons are located on the driver's door.

1 Passenger side exterior rear view mirror button

2 Adjustment button 3 Driver's side outside rear view mirror

button

� Make sure the ignition is turned on.

All indicator lights in the instrument cluster come on.

� Press button 3 for the left mirror or button 1 for the right mirror.

� Press the adjustment button 2 up, down, left or right according to the desired setting.

Warning! GRAM

Be careful when using the outside rear view mirror on the passenger side. The mirror surface is convex (surface curved outwards for a wider field of view). Objects in the mirror are closer than they appear. Before changing lanes, check your interior rear-view mirror or look over your shoulder.

! Electrolyte droplets that come into contact with the paint of the vehicle can only be completely removed in the liquid state with plenty of water.

Starting

Modification

For more information, see "Activating the Exterior Mirror Park Position" (� page 173).

!If the outside rearview mirror has been pushed hard forward (rear impact) or rearward (front impact), reattach it by pushing it firmly until it clicks into place. The mirror housing is now correctly positioned and the mirror can be adjusted normally.

The iMemory function (� page 121) allows you to save your seat position settings along with the settings for the steering wheel and door mirrors.

In cold weather, the mirrors heat up automatically.

Starting

driving

� Driving

Fasten seatbelts

Warning! GRAM

Do not place any objects in the driver's footwell. Make sure that the mats or mats in the driver's footwell have enough space for the pedals.

During hard driving or braking manoeuvres, objects can fall between the pedals. After that I couldn't brake or accelerate anymore.

Warning! GRAM

Always fasten your seat belts before starting your journey. Always ensure that all passengers are properly restrained, including rear seat passengers and pregnant women.

Incorrectly fitting, fastening and adjusting the seat belt significantly increases the risk of injury and its probable severity in the event of an accident. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts.

If you ever have an accident, your injuries can be much more serious without a seat belt properly fastened. Without a seat belt fastened, there is a much greater chance of hitting or falling out of the vehicle. You can be seriously injured or killed.

In the same accident, the risk of injury or death is lower if you wear a seat belt. Airbags can only provide the protection they are designed to provide when occupants wear seat belts (� page 63).

Warning! GRAM

The risk of serious or fatal injury to a child greatly increases if child seats are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the seat.

Starting

driving

1 Retractor 2 Snap plate 3 Buckle 4 Release button

Warning! GRAM

Never allow more people to ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Make sure everyone in the vehicle is properly strapped in with separate seat belts. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time.

Warning! GRAM

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest reclined excessively as this can be dangerous. You can slip under the seat belt in a crash. If it slips underneath, the belt will exert force on the abdomen or neck. This can cause serious or even fatal injury. The seatback and seat belt provide the best protection when the occupant is in a nearly upright position and the belt is positioned correctly across the body.

Warning! GRAM

Read and follow the additional warnings printed in the "Safety and Safety" chapter (� page 63).

Starting

driving

� Place the shoulder belt over your upper shoulder and the lap belt over your hips.

� Push the latch plate 2 into the buckle 3 until you hear a click.

� If necessary, squeeze the hip section firmly by pulling the shoulder section up.

Tape outlet height adjustment

1 release button

� Press the release button 1 and move the seat belt height adjuster up or down.

Correct use of seat belts.

� Do not twist the strap when fastening.

� Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder part is as close to the center of the shoulder as possible (it should not touch the neck). Never pull the shoulder part of the belt under your armpit.

� Place the lap belt as low as possible across the hips (above the hip joint) and not across the stomach.

� Adjust the seat back to an almost upright position.

� Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time.

� Do not fasten the seat belt around a person and another object at the same time. When using seat belts to secure infant or toddler seats or children in booster seats, always follow the seat manufacturer's instructions.

� Periodically check the seat belt while traveling to ensure that it is properly positioned.

� Make sure the seat belt is always fastened. Be especially careful when wearing loose clothing.

Warning! GRAM

Do not pull the straps over sharp edges. They could tear.

Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the door or seat adjustment mechanism. This may damage the belt.

Never try to modify the seat belts. This may affect the effectiveness of the seat belts.

Do not bleach or dye the seat belts as this can seriously weaken them. In the event of an accident, they may not be able to provide adequate protection.

Damaged seat belts or belts that have been under a lot of tension in an accident must be replaced. Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

Starting

driving

Start the engine. Automatic transmission

Gear shift diagram for automatic transmission

P Park position with shift lever lock

R Reverse N Neutral D Driving position

For more information, see "Operation Details" (� page 164).

Getting started with your SmartKey

� Make sure the shift lever is in the P position.

� Do not press the accelerator pedal.

� Turn the SmartKey in the ignition switch to position 3 and hold it there until the engine starts (� page 31).

� Depress the brake pedal.

The shift lever lock is released.

For information on turning off the engine using the SmartKey, see "Shutting Down the Engine" (� page 52).

Warning! GRAM

Inhalation of exhaust fumes is dangerous to health. All exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide and inhalation can cause unconsciousness and death.

Do not run the engine in an enclosed area (such as a garage) that is not properly ventilated. If you believe that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, determine the cause and correct it immediately. If you must drive in these conditions, drive alone with at least one window fully open.

iYou can also use the "touch start" function. Turn the SmartKey to position 3 and release it immediately. Then the engine starts automatically.

Starting

driving

Z KEYLESS-GO*

You can start your vehicle without a SmartKey in the ignition using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear lever.

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be in the vehicle.

1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

� Make sure the shift lever is in the P position.

� Depress the brake pedal during the start-up procedure. Do not press the AC accelerator pedal.

The shift lever lock is released.

� Press the KEYLESS-GO 1 start/stop button once.

The engine starts automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle.

For information on how to turn off the engine with KEYLESS-GO, see “Shutting Down with KEYLESS-GO*” (� page 53).

starting difficulties

If the engine does not start as described, do the following:

� If you are starting the engine with the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey in the ignition switch to the 0 position and repeat the starting procedure.

� If you start the engine with a KEYLESS-GO: close any door that may be open to allow better detection of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO OR: start the engine with the SmartKey as radio signals from another source may interfere with the operation of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.

� Repeat the startup procedure (� page 43). Remember that prolonged attempts to crank the starter may drain the battery.

� Good start (� page 382).

Starting

driving

If the engine does not start after several attempts to start, there may be a problem with the engine electronics or the fuel supply system.

� Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

Hand brake

1 Parking brake pedal 2 Parking brake release lever

� Release the parking brake by pulling the handle 2.

warning lamp; (US only) or 3 (Canada only) in the instrument cluster goes out.

driving

� Depress the brake pedal.

� Move the shift lever to D or R.

� Release the brake pedal.

� Carefully press the accelerator pedal.

When the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking is activated and the locking knobs are lowered.

Warning! GRAM

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition, carry it with the KEYLESS-GO* and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children can release the parking brake, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury.

iWait for the gear selection process to complete before starting the vehicle.

You can open a locked door from the inside. Only open doors when conditions are safe to do so. ��

Starting

driving

After a cold start, the automatic transmission engages at higher revs. This allows the catalyst to reach operating temperature faster.

For more information on driving, see the "Maintenance" chapter (� page 269).

headlights on

exterior light switch

1 off 2 on low beam

� Set the switch to position B.

For more information, see "Operation Details" (� page 124).

!When starting off, if you hear a warning beep and a message appears in the multifunction display, you forgot to release the parking brake.

Release the parking brake.

Warning! GRAM

On slippery surfaces, never downshift to brake. This can cause the drive wheels to slip and reduce vehicle control. Your vehicle's ABS system will not prevent this type of loss of control.

Warning! GRAM

Moving the shift lever out of P or N is dangerous if the engine speed is higher than the idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle may rapidly accelerate forward or backward. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift gears when the engine is idling normally and your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

!Simultaneously pressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brakes reduces engine performance and causes premature wear of the brakes and transmission.

��

Starting

driving

Turn signals and traffic lights

The combination switch is located on the left side of the steering column.

combination switch

1 Right indicator 2 Left indicator

� Move the combination switch up 1 or down 2.

The corresponding direction indicator lamp L or K flashes in the instrument cluster.

High light

� Slide the combination switch forward.

High beam is on. The high beam symbol A in the tachometer comes on.

For more information, see "Operation Details" (� page 127).

Sprinkler

The combination switch is located on the left side of the steering column.

combination switch

1 Single wipe 2 Wiper on

� Make sure the ignition is turned on.

All lights on the instrument panel come on.

iTo indicate slight changes in direction, move the combination switch only to the point of resistance and release it. The direction indicator flashes three times.

Starting

driving

wiper ignition

� Turn the combination switch to the desired position depending on the intensity of the rain.

0 Wipers off

I Periodic cleaning (frequency depends on windshield humidity)

II Normal wiper speed

III High wiper speed

single wipe

� Briefly press the switch in the direction of arrow 1.

Wipers wipe once without washer fluid.

Cleaning with washer fluid

� Move the switch in the direction of arrow 1 past the resistance point.

Windshield wipers run on washer fluid.

To fill the windshield washer reservoir, refer to the "Maintenance" section (� page 289).

i The frequency of periodic cleaning depends on the humidity of the windshield. She will not clean with the door open.

!Do not leave the wipers in the intermittent position when driving the car to an automatic car wash or when cleaning the windshield. The windshield wipers will operate in the presence of water splashed on the windshield and may fail as a result. began. Dust accumulating on the windshield may scratch the windshield and/or damage the wiper blades when wiping the windshield dry.

Starting

driving

driving problems

Engine runs erratically and misfires

� The ignition cable may be damaged.

� Motor electronics may not be working properly.

� Unburned gasoline could get into the catalytic converter and damage it.

Give it very little gas.

� Have the fault rectified as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop.

!If something blocks the wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), turn them off immediately.

� For safety reasons

� turn off the engine by turning the SmartKey to position 0 and removing the SmartKey from the ignition

� turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* and open the driver's door (when the driver's door is open, the starter switch is in the 0 position, the same as when the SmartKey is removed from the switch)

before attempting to remove any blockages.

� Remove the lock.

� Turn the wipers back on.

If the wipers do not operate at all in switch position I,

� set the combination switch to the next higher wiper speed

� have the wiper blades checked by the nearest Mercedes-Benz Dealership

Starting

driving

Coolant temperature exceeds 248°F (120°C)

The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling the engine.

� Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and switch off the engine. Allow the engine and coolant to cool down.

� Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary (� page 287).

In case of emergency

If the vehicle is losing gas:

� Never start the engine.

� Notify your local fire department and/or police.

If the extent of damage cannot be determined:

� Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

If damage cannot be determined in

large teams

fuel system

Engine mount:

� Start the engine as usual.

Starting

car park and lock

� Parking and Locking You have just completed your first trip. You have successfully stopped and parked your vehicle. Finish your journey as follows.

Hand brake

1 Parking brake2 Release the handle

� Firmly apply the parking brake 1.

When the engine is running, the warning light; (US only) or 3 (Canada only) in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

Warning! GRAM

Wait for the vehicle to stop before removing the SmartKey from the ignition. The vehicle cannot be driven when the SmartKey is removed.

Warning! GRAM

There is no electric power steering or braking when the engine is switched off. In this case, remember that braking and turning the vehicle requires much more effort.

Warning! GRAM

Do not park this vehicle in areas where flammable materials such as grass, hay, or leaves can come into contact with a hot exhaust system, as these materials may ignite and cause a vehicle fire.

To reduce the risk of personal injury due to vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and exiting the vehicle, always:

� Keep your right foot on the brake pedal.

� Depress the parking brake pedal firmly.

� Move the shift lever to the P position.

� Slowly release the brake pedal.

� When parking on a hill, turn the front wheel toward the curb.

� Turn the SmartKey to the ignition switch position 0 and remove it, or press the Start/Stop button (vehicles with KEY-LESS-GO*).

� Take the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* and lock the vehicle when leaving.

Starting

car park and lock

headlights off

� Set the exterior light switch to the M position (� page 46).

For more information, see "Operation Details" (� page 124).

turn off the engine

� Place the shift lever in the P position.

Warning! GRAM

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition, carry it with the KEYLESS-GO* and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children may release the parking brake and/or move the shift lever out of P, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury.

Warning! GRAM

It is dangerous to leave the vehicle with the shift lever not fully in the P position. Also, when parking on a hill, the P position alone may not prevent the vehicle from moving, which could result in hitting people or objects.

Always apply the parking brake except when shifting into P.

When parking on a slope, turn the front wheels toward the curb.

iAlways apply the parking brake except when shifting into P.

On steep inclines, turn the front wheels toward the curb.

Starting

car park and lock

Turn off with SmartKey

� Turn the SmartKey in the ignition switch (� page 31) to the 0 position and remove it. The immobilizer is on.

� Press the seat belt release button (� page 41).

Allow the retractor to fully retract the seat belt by guiding the latch plate.

� After leaving the vehicle, press the lock button ‹ on the SmartKey (� page 30).

All direction indicators flash three times. The door lock knobs are moved down.

For more information, see "Operation Details" (� page 94).

Disable with KEYLESS-GO*

� Place the shift lever in the P position.

� Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button to stop the engine.

With the driver's door closed, the ignition switch is now in position 1. With the driver's door open, the ignition switch is in position 0, the same as the SmartKey removed from the ignition switch (� page 31).

iThe SmartKey can only be removed from the ignition switch when the shift lever is in the P position.

iAfter the SmartKey is removed and the driver's door is opened, a chime sounds and the message Lights Off appears in the multifunction display if the vehicle's exterior lights are not turned off.

Warning! GRAM

To avoid personal injury, always keep your hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the door. Be especially careful when small children are around.

Before closing the door, make sure that there is no possibility of trapping someone in the door while it is closing.

Warning! GRAM

Always remove the SmartKey from the ignition and lock the vehicle when leaving the vehicle. Do not leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Using the vehicle unattended may result in an accident and/or serious injury.

��

Starting

car park and lock

� Press the seat belt release button (� page 41).

1 lock button on the door handle

� After leaving the vehicle, press the lock button 1 on the door handle or trunk lid.

All direction indicators flash three times. The door lock knobs are moved down.

For more information, see "Operation Details" (� page 97).

!If you hear a warning tone, you've got it

forgot to turn off the vehicle's exterior lights before opening the driver's door,

tried to switch off the engine when the gearshift lever was not in the P position.

Turn off the lights or put the shift lever in the P position.

Warning! GRAM

To avoid personal injury, always keep your hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the door. Be especially careful when small children are around.

Before closing the door, make sure that there is no possibility of trapping someone in the door while it is closing.

Warning! GRAM

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition, carry it with the KEYLESS-GO* and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may result in an accident and/or serious injury.

��

Protection and security

User security

alarm panic

Driving safety systems

anti-burglary systems

Protection and security

User security

� Passenger safety In this chapter you will learn the most important information about the elements of the vehicle protection system.

� Seat belts (� page 63)

� Child seats (� page 75)

� Bottom anchors and ropes for children (LATCH) (� page 77)

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) z

� Airbags (� page 57)

� Airbag controller (with crash sensors)

� Emergency Tensioner (ETD) for seat belts (� page 66)

Advanced airbag system components z

� PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator light (� page 73)

� Occupant Classification System (OCS) passenger seat (� page 70)

As standalone systems, their security functions work together.

The SRS performs a self-test when the ignition is turned on and at regular intervals while the engine is running. This facilitates early failure detection. Indicator light 1 in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition is switched on and goes out no later than a few seconds after starting the engine.

The SRS components are ready for operation if indicator light 1 is off when the engine is running.

A fault has been detected in the system if indicator light 1:

� does not turn off approximately four seconds after starting the engine

it doesn't turn on at all

� lights up when the engine is started or while driving

iFor information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and infant and child seats, see "Children in the Vehicle" (� page 66).

Protection and security

User security

Airbags Warning! GRAM

If indicator light 1 comes on while driving or does not come on at all, the SRS self-test has detected a fault. For safety reasons, we strongly recommend that you go to an Authorized Mercedes-Benz Retailer immediately to have the system checked; Otherwise, the SRS may not activate as needed in the event of an accident, resulting in death or serious injury, or it may operate unexpectedly and unnecessarily, which may also result in injury.

In addition, if the SRS is not properly repaired, there is a risk that the SRS will become inoperative or cause the airbag to deploy unintentionally. Therefore, work on the SRS should only be performed by qualified technicians. Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

If the advanced airbag system needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, please contact your local authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer Service Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367- 6372) for details.

Warning! GRAM

Airbags are designed to reduce the risk of injury and fatality in certain frontal (frontal airbags), side-impact (side and head-curtain airbags) or rollover (head-curtain airbags) collisions. airbags). However, no system currently available can completely eliminate injuries and deaths.

When the airbags are deployed, a small amount of dust from the airbags is released temporarily. However, this dust is not harmful to health and does not indicate a fire in the vehicle. The dust may cause temporary respiratory distress in people with asthma or other respiratory problems. To prevent this, you can get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have difficulty breathing but cannot get out of the vehicle after the airbag inflates, get some fresh air by opening a window or door.

Protection and security

User security

Warning! GRAM

To reduce the risk of injury when the front airbags inflate, it is very important that the driver and front passenger always sit properly and wear their seat belts.

For maximum protection in the event of a collision, always sit with your back against the seatback. Fasten the seat belt and make sure it is properly positioned on your body.

Because the airbag inflates with considerable speed and force, proper seat and hand positioning on the steering wheel will help you maintain a safe distance from the airbag. Occupants who are not wearing seat belts, are in the wrong position, or are too close to the airbag may be seriously injured by the airbag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye:

� Sit properly braced in an almost upright position with your back against the back of the seat.

� Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible while still allowing the vehicle's controls to function properly. The distance from the center of the driver's sternum to the center of the airbag cover on the steering wheel must be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or more. You should be able to achieve this through a combination of seat and handlebar adjustments. In case of problems, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

� Do not lean your head or chest near the steering wheel or dashboard.

� Keep your hands on the outside of the steering wheel rim. Placing your hands and arms inside the wheel may increase the risk of and potentially severe injury to your hands or arms when the driver's front airbag inflates.

� Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible from the dashboard when the seat is occupied.

A Occupants, especially children, should never position their body or lean their heads in the area of the door where the side airbag deploys. Airbag deployment can cause serious injury or death. Always sit almost upright, wear your seat belt properly, and use an infant or toddler seat or booster seat recommended for your child's height and weight.

Failure to follow these instructions could result in serious injury to you or other passengers.

If you are selling your vehicle, it is extremely important to inform the buyer of this safety information. Be sure to give the buyer this manual.

Protection and security

User security

Warning! GRAM

Accident studies show that the safest place for children in a car is in the back seat.

It should be noted that with respect to the front and rear side airbags, there is a potential for side airbag related injury if occupants, especially children, are not seated or properly restrained while in the vicinity of the side airbag, which must deploy quickly in the event of a side impact to do its job.

To avoid the possibility of injury, follow these guidelines:

(1) Occupants, especially children, should never position their body or put their head in the area of the door where the side airbag is inflating. This could result in serious injury or death if the side airbag deploys.

(2) Always sit almost upright, wear seat belts properly, and use an infant or toddler seat or booster seat recommended for the child's height and weight for children under 12 years of age.

(3) Always fasten your seat belts properly.

If you believe that even with these guidelines, it would be safer for rear seat passengers to disable the rear-mounted side airbags, deactivation can be done upon written request to do so with your consent. -Curly Mercedes-Benz Center for an additional fee.

For more information, please contact your local Mercedes-Benz Authorized Center or call our Customer Service Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).

iAir airbags are designed to inflate only in certain frontal impacts (frontal airbags), side impacts (curtain and side airbags) that exceed preset thresholds, and certain rollovers (curtain airbags). Head protection air curtain). Only during these events will they provide additional protection.

The driver and passengers should always wear seat belts. Otherwise, the airbags will not provide additional protection.

Protection and security

User security

Safety guidelines for seat belts, emergency pre-tensioners and airbags

For other types of collisions and impacts below the airbag deployment thresholds, the airbags will not deploy. The driver and passenger will then be protected as much as possible by properly fastened seat belts. A properly fastened seat belt is also essential to ensure the best possible protection in the event of a rollover.

We warn you not to rely on the presence of airbags to avoid wearing seat belts.

For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, it is important to replace any deployed airbags and repair any inoperative airbags so that your vehicle continues to provide additional crash protection to your occupants.

Warning! GRAM

� Damaged seat belts or belts that have been subjected to severe tension during an accident should be replaced and their attachment points checked. Only use seat belts installed or supplied by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

� Airbags and Emergency Deployment Devices (ETDs) are designed to deploy only once. Replace the activated airbag or ETD.

� Do not pull the straps around sharp edges. They could tear.

� Do not make any modifications that may alter the effectiveness of the belts.

� Do not bleach or dye the seat belts as this can seriously weaken them. In the event of an accident, they may not be able to provide adequate protection.

� Do not make any modifications to any component or wiring of the SRS. This includes altering or removing any SRS component or part, installing additional trim material, badges, etc. over the center of the steering wheel, passenger front airbag cover, door panels or door jamb trim and installation. additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring. Keep the space between airbags and passengers away from objects (e.g. packages, bags, umbrellas, etc.).

� Do not hang items such as clothes hangers on hangers or over door handles. These objects can become projectiles and cause head and other injuries when the curtain airbag is deployed.

� Never put your feet on the dashboard, dashboard or seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of you when sitting.

� The component of the airbag system inside the steering wheel becomes warm after the airbag has inflated. Do not touch.

Protection and security

User security

When you sell your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you notify the next owner that it is equipped with an SRS system by informing them of the appropriate section in the Owner's Manual.

front airbags

1 Driver airbag 2 Passenger airbag

Driver and passenger airbag deployment:

� for some frontal collisions

� if the impact exceeds the set implementation threshold

� regardless of the side airbags

� In addition, if the SRS system is not properly repaired, there is a risk that the SRS system will become inoperative or cause the airbag to deploy unintentionally. Therefore, work on the SRS should only be performed by qualified technicians. Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

� For your own safety and the protection of others, please follow our safety instructions when disposing of an airbag or emergency pre-tensioner. This manual is available from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

� Due to the high opening speed, the required inflation volume, and the textile structure of the airbags, there is a potential for abrasions or other serious injury as a result of airbag inflation.

Warning! GRAM

Only use covers that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. The use of other seat covers may interfere with or prevent deployment of the front side airbags. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.

Protection and security

User security

Airbags will not deploy on impacts that do not exceed the system's deployment thresholds. Then you will be protected by fastened seat belts.

The passenger front airbag will only deploy when:

� the system, based on the readings from the OCS mass sensor, detects the front passenger seat being occupied

� the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator light on the center console does not light up (� page 73)

� the impact exceeds the established implementation threshold

Side airbags, curtain airbags

1 Side airbags 2 Curtain airbag

Deployment of side airbags and curtain airbags:

� on the impacted side of the vehicle

� for influences that exceed a predetermined deployment threshold

� regardless of the front airbags

i The front airbags in this vehicle are designed to inflate in two stages. This allows the airbag to have different degrees of inflation which are based on the respective vehicle deceleration factor judged by the airbag control unit.

On the front passenger side, deployment of the front airbag is also affected by the passenger's weight category as identified by the Occupant Classification System (OCS) (� page 70).

The lighter the occupant on the passenger side, the greater the braking speed of the vehicle required to inflate the second stage airbag.

Protection and security

User security

Additionally, 2 curtain airbags inflate:

� in some vehicle rollovers

The front passenger side airbags 1 will only deploy:

� regardless of the front airbags

Side airbags and curtain airbags do not deploy in crashes that do not exceed the activation threshold.

Seatbelts

When the engine is started, the seat belt unfastened indicator < illuminates to remind the driver and passengers to fasten their seat belts.

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened before starting the engine, the fastener indicator < illuminates and the warning chime sounds for approximately six seconds after the engine starts.

Seat belts and infant and child restraints are required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, US territories and all Canadian provinces.

Even if this is not the case, all vehicle occupants must wear seat belts while the vehicle is in motion.

For more information, see "Fastening Seat Belts" (� page 40).

iFor information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and infant and child seats, see "Children in the Vehicle" (� page 66).

Warning! GRAM

Always fasten your seat belts before starting your journey. Always ensure that all passengers are properly restrained, including rear seat passengers and pregnant women.

In the same accident, you are less likely to be injured or killed if you wear your seat belt correctly. Airbags can only protect as intended if occupants wear their seat belts correctly.

Protection and security

User security

Warning! GRAM

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest reclined excessively as this can be dangerous. You can slip under the seat belt in a crash. If it slips underneath, the belt will exert force on the abdomen or neck. This can cause serious or even fatal injury. The seatback and seat belt provide the best protection when the occupant is in a nearly upright position and the belt is positioned correctly across the body.

Warning! GRAM

Damaged seat belts or belts that have been subjected to severe tension during an accident should be replaced and their anchorage points checked.

Only use seat belts approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Do not make any modifications to the seat belts. This may result in unwanted activation or crash.

Do not bleach or dye the seat belts as this can seriously weaken them. In the event of an accident, they may not be able to provide adequate protection.

All work should be carried out by qualified technicians only. Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

Warning! GRAM

USE THE SEAT BELTS CORRECTLY

� Seat belts only work when used correctly. Never use the seat belts other than as described in this section as serious injury may result in an accident.

� Every occupant must wear a seat belt at all times, as seat belts help reduce the likelihood and potential severity of injury in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated safety system includes SRS (driver's airbag, front passenger's airbag, side airbags, curtain airbags in the side windows), ETD (emergency belt tensioning device) and front seat knee reinforcements.

Sixty-five

Protection and security

User security

The system is designed to increase the protection of occupants properly buckled in certain frontal (front airbags and ETD) and side impact (side and curtain airbags and ETD) collisions that exceed set thresholds, and in some rollovers (curtain airbags and ETD) .

� Never wear the shoulder strap under your armpit, around your neck or over your shoulder. In a frontal collision, your body would have moved too far forward. This would increase the risk of head and neck injuries. The belt could also exert excessive force on the ribs or abdomen, which could severely damage internal organs such as the liver or spleen.

� Never wear the straps over rigid or breakable objects in or on clothing, such as glasses, pens, SmartKeys, etc., as they may cause injury.

� Place the lap belt as low as possible across your hips, not over your belly. If the belt slips across the belly, it could cause serious injury in the event of an accident.

� Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Do not fasten the seat belt around one person and another or other objects.

� The belts must not be worn crooked. In a crash, you wouldn't have the full width of the belt to distribute the impact forces. A belt twisted around the body can cause injury.

� Pregnant women should also wear a lap and shoulder belt. The lap section of the belt should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid possible pressure on the abdomen.

� Never put your feet on the dashboard, dashboard or seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of you when sitting.

� When using the seat belt to secure infant or toddler seats or children in a booster seat, always follow the seat manufacturer's instructions.

Protection and security

User security

Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD), seat belt force limiter

The front and rear outer seat belts are equipped with emergency pre-tensioners and belt load limiters.

ETD is designed to be activated in the following cases:

� in frontal or rear collisions exceeding a given force level

� in some vehicle rollovers

� if the safety systems are working properly, see 1 indicator light (� page 56)

In the event of a crash, the emergency pre-tensioners tighten the seat belts. Belt force limiters reduce the force exerted by the seat belts on the occupants in a crash.

Automatic seat belt with comfort adjustment function

The automatic front seat comfort feature reduces the retraction force of the seat belts during normal use.

Children in the vehicle

If an infant or child is traveling with you in the vehicle:

� The child must be secured using a child restraint or booster seat suitable for the child's age and height and recommended for use by Mercedes-Benz.

� Ensure that the infant or child is securely strapped in at all times while the vehicle is in motion.

Infant and child seats and information on choosing the right restraint system can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Centre.

!Etd of the front seats will only engage when the front seat belts are fastened (the latch plate is properly inserted into the buckle).

The rear seat exterior ETD sensors will activate with or without the seat belts fastened.

Warning! GRAM

An Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) that has tripped must be replaced.

Please follow our safety instructions when disposing of the emergency tensioner. They are available from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

Protection and security

User security

Restraint systems for infants and children

We recommend that all babies and children are properly restrained at all times when the vehicle is in motion.

All lap and shoulder belts, with the exception of the driver's seat belt, are equipped with special seat belt retractors to securely hold child seats.

To install a child seat, follow the child seat installation instructions. Then, fully extend the shoulder belt and let it collapse. When retracting the seat belt, a rattle sound may be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is engaged. The lane is now blocked. Press down on the child seat to remove the slack.

To deactivate, release the seat belt buckle and allow the belt to fully retract. The seat belt can be reused normally.

iInformation on child seats with mounting accessories for anchor points (� page 75).

More information on LATCH child seat mounts (� page 77).

! Infant and child seats are required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, US territories and all Canadian provinces.

Infants and toddlers must be carried in an appropriate infant or child restraint, properly secured with a lap/shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a top anchor point and low restraint system. 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.

Warning! GRAM

Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion, as this will disengage the special seat belt retractor.

!The child seat manufacturer's declaration of compliance with this standard can be found on the child seat instruction label and in the instruction manual supplied with the child seat.

When using any infant or child restraint, carefully read and follow all manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.

Read and follow the warning labels located inside the vehicle and on infant and child seats.

Protection and security

User security

Warning! GRAM

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly buckled in the rear seats than in the front seats. We therefore strongly recommend that children travel in the back seats whenever possible. Regardless of the seated position, children under the age of 12 must sit and be properly restrained in an infant or child seat recommended for the child's height and weight.

The infant or child seat must be properly secured with the vehicle seat belt, seat belt and top tether, or lower anchors and top tether, in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Children could be killed or seriously injured if the airbag inflates. Please note the following important information when circumstances require you to place your child in the front passenger seat:

Your vehicle is equipped with advanced airbag technology designed to disable the front passenger airbag in the vehicle when the OCS detects the weight of a typical child 12 months or younger along with the weight of the corresponding standard child. child seat in the front passenger seat.

� A child in a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or die if the front passenger's front airbag inflates during a crash, which may occur under certain circumstances, including accelerated air travel . Bag technology The only way to completely eliminate this risk is to never place your child in a rear-facing child seat in the front seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place your child in a rear-facing child seat in the back seat.

� If you must install a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger seat because circumstances require it, make sure the PASS AIR BAG OFF light is on, which means the passenger's front airbag is disabled. edit If the light does not come on or goes off when the security system is installed, check the installation. Periodically check the indicator light while driving to make sure it is on. If the PASS AIR BAG OFF light goes off or stays off, do not carry a child in the front passenger seat until the system is repaired. A child in a rear-facing car seat in the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or killed if the front passenger airbag inflates.

Protection and security

User security

� If you must place your child in a forward-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible, use an appropriate child restraint system recommended for the child's age, height, and weight, and secure the child restraint system with the vehicle's seat belt in accordance with the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. For children larger than a typical 12 month old, the passenger front airbag may or may not deploy (� page 71).

Warning! GRAM

Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with other passengers. In the event of an accident, they can be crushed between the passenger and the seat belt.

The risk of serious or fatal injury to a child greatly increases if child seats are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the seat.

Children too large to be used in a toddler seat should travel in seats with regular seat belts. Place the shoulder strap across your chest and shoulder, not across your face or neck. A booster seat may be required to obtain proper belt positioning for children weighing less than 41 lbs until they reach a height where the lap/shoulder belt will fit properly without a booster seat.

When the seat is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent it from falling out of the seat in the event of an accident.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if they are secured in child seats. Unsupervised children in a car seat can use the vehicle's equipment and cause an accident and/or serious injury.

Protection and security

User security

Tenant classification system

The Occupant Classification System (OCS) automatically activates or deactivates the passenger frontal airbag based on the occupant's weight category as determined by readings from the front passenger's seat mass sensor.

Passengers must be properly seated in a nearly upright position with their backs against the seatback and feet on the floor to be correctly classified. If the passenger's weight is transferred to another object in the vehicle (for example, the rest of the armrests), the OCS system may not be able to correctly approximate the passenger's weight class.

In addition, the occupant's weight may increase or decrease due to objects dangling from the seat, other occupants pressing down on the seat, objects lodged under the seat or wedged between the seat and the center console or between the seat and the door, or due to objects that exert pressure on the seat back. Always make sure the seat has clearance in all directions at all times.

Both the driver and front passenger should always turn on the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator as an indication that the front passenger is seated correctly.

The iSystem does not disable the passenger side airbag, curtain airbag and emergency pretensioner.

If your seat, including upholstery and cushion, requires maintenance, take your vehicle to a Mercedes-Benz Authorized Centre.

Only seat accessories approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.

Warning! GRAM

If the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator light comes on while an adult or taller than short person is sitting in the front passenger seat, ask the passenger to sit back in the seat until the light goes out. or check that there are no objects under or near the seat.

For more information on messages on the airbag display (� page 350).

In the event of a crash, the airbag control unit will not allow the front passenger's frontal airbag to inflate when the OCS classifies the person in the front passenger seat as having a weight equal to or less than a typical 12 month old child in the vehicle. standard child seat or if the front passenger seat is detected as empty.

Protection and security

User security

When the OCS detects that the occupant in the front passenger seat weighs less than a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child seat, the PASS AIR BAG OFF light will come on when the engine starts and stay on. , indicating that the passenger's front airbag is disabled.

When the OCS detects that the front passenger seat is classified as vacant, the PASS AIR BAG OFF light will come on when the engine is started and remain on, indicating that the passenger front airbag is disabled.

When the OCS detects that the person in the front passenger seat is classed as heavier than a typical 12-month-old child sitting in a standard child seat, or as a short person (for example, a teenager or a small adult), the PASS AIR BAG OFF light will illuminate for approximately six seconds after starting the engine, and then depending on the readings from the occupant weight sensor in the seats, it will stay on or go off. When the PASS AIR BAG OFF light is on, the passenger front air bag is disabled. When the PASS AIR BAG OFF light is off, the passenger's front airbag is active.

When the OCS detects that the front passenger seat occupant is classed as an adult or larger than a small person, the PASS AIR BAG OFF light will illuminate for approximately six seconds after the engine starts, then turn off, indicating that the front passenger's front seat belt is on. airbag.

If the PASS AIR BAG OFF light is on, the passenger front air bag is disabled and will not deploy.

If the PASS AIR BAG OFF lamp is not illuminated, the passenger front airbag is activated and will deploy:

� for some frontal collisions

� if the impact exceeds the set implementation threshold

� regardless of the side airbags.

If the front passenger's front airbag deploys, the degree of deployment will be affected by:

� appropriate vehicle deceleration coefficient as assessed by the airbag control unit

� Front passenger weight category as determined by the Occupant Classification System (OCS).

Protection and security

User security

Warning! GRAM

The infant or child seat must be properly secured with the vehicle seat belt, seat belt and top tether, or lower anchors and top tether, in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Children could be killed or seriously injured if the airbag inflates. Please note the following important information when circumstances require you to place your child in the front passenger seat:

Your car is equipped with advanced airbag technology designed to disable the front passenger airbag in your vehicle when the system detects the weight of a typical child 12 months or younger along with the weight of a car seat suitable for standard children in the front passenger seat.

Protection and security

User security

The PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator light is located on the center console.

1 indicator light

iDeployment of the driver's front airbag does not mean that the passenger's front airbag should also deploy.

The tenant classification system (� page 70) could determine:

The seat was empty or occupied by a weight equal to or less than that of a typical 12-month-old child sitting in a standard child seat; In both cases, the system prevented the passenger's front airbag from inflating even though the impact met the criteria and was severe enough to deploy the driver's front airbag.

the seat was occupied by a short person (for example, a teenager or a small adult) or a child who weighed more than a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child seat; in these cases, the system may suppress deployment of the passenger's front airbag, even if the impact met the criteria and was severe enough to deploy the driver's front airbag.

Protection and security

User security

The PASS AIR BAG OFF 1 indicator light will illuminate except when the SmartKey is removed or the ignition switch is in the 0 position.

Self-monitoring Passenger classification system

When the SmartKey is turned to position 1 or 2 or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button is pressed once or twice, the PASS AIR BAG OFF 1 indicator light on the center console will illuminate. If an adult occupant is seated correctly in the front passenger seat and the system detects that the adult occupant is present, the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator will illuminate and turn off after approximately six seconds.

If the seat is not occupied and the system detects that the front passenger seat is vacant, the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator will illuminate and remain on.

Warning! GRAM

If the indicator light 1 and the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator light come on at the same time, there is a fault in the occupant classification system. In this case, the passenger's front airbag will deactivate.

To ensure proper operation of the airbag system and OCS system:

� Have the system checked by qualified technicians as soon as possible. Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

� Do not put more than 2 kg (4.4 lb) in the crinkle storage bag on the back of the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the OCS system may not be able to correctly estimate the weight category of the passengers.

� Do not place objects under and/or around the front passenger seat.

� Do not hang or attach any objects to the seats.

� Do not place objects, such as books, between the center console and the front passenger seat.

� Do not slide the front passenger seat back against hard objects.

� Sit properly braced in an almost upright position with your back against the back of the seat.

� Do not lean on the armrests or rise from the seat using the handle above the door, as this may prevent the OCS from correctly determining the weight category of the occupant.

� Have the seat repaired or replaced only by an authorized Mercedes-Benz service center.

� Read and follow all warnings in this chapter.

Protection and security

User security

For more information, see “Tips of thumb” (� page 350).

Installation of restraint systems for infants and children.

This vehicle is equipped with top tether anchorage points on each rear seat position.

Non-folding rear seat backrest

1 cover

� Remove cover 1 from the retaining ring.

� Route the tether strap between the headrest and the top of the seatback.

� The head restraint must be installed (if removable) and positioned so that the top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and the top of the seat back.

Make sure that the fastening strap is not twisted.

2 Hook 3 Anchor ring

� Securely attach the hook 2 to the attachment ring 3.

Warning! GRAM

If the indicator light does not come on, the system is not working. Before placing a child in the front passenger seat, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Retailer.

Warning! GRAM

Never place anything between the seat cushion and the child seat (e.g. a cushion) as this reduces the effectiveness of the occupant classification system. The underside of the child seat must be in full contact with the passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly fitted child seat may cause injury to the child in the event of an accident instead of increasing protection.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions for installing child seats.

Protection and security

User security

After connecting the anchor hook of the top tether, the child seat can be secured. Adjust the top tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Folding rear seat backrest*

� Tilt the rear seat slightly forward.

� Remove the cover from the retaining ring.

� Route the tether strap between the headrest and the top of the seatback.

� Adjust the head restraint so that the top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and the top of the seat back.

Make sure that the fastening strap is not twisted.

2 Hook 3 Anchor ring

� Securely attach the hook 2 to the attachment ring 3.

2 Hook 3 Anchor ring

After connecting the anchor hook of the top tether, the child seat can be secured. Adjust the top tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

� Rotate the rear seat back until you hear a click.

� Check that the rear seatback is locked in the upright position (� page 328).

iFor safety, make sure the hook 2 is hooked into the ring 3 outside the safety clip as shown in the picture.

iFor safety, make sure tab 2 engages ring 3 outside of the securing clip as shown below.

Protection and security

User security

LATCH anchors for child seats

This vehicle is equipped with two bottom anchor anchors and child anchors (LATCH) (on each outer rear seat) for installing a "LATCH" child seat with the appropriate fasteners.

The anchors are located behind the upholstery mix.

1 Indicates the position of the anchors. 2 Anchors

� Install the child seat in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

!Make sure that the center seat belt is working freely after installing the child seat.

iNon-LATCH child seats can also be used and can be installed using the vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child seat according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Protection and security

User security

Rear door window lock

1 Master switch 2 Indicator lamp

� Press master switch 1.

Control indicator 2 comes on. The rear door windows can no longer be operated using the switches located on the rear doors.

For more information on electric windows, refer to the "Detailed Controls" chapter (� page 191).

Warning! GRAM

Install the child seat according to the manufacturer's instructions.

The child seat must be securely attached to the left and right side anchorages 2.

An incorrectly fitted child seat could come loose in an accident and cause serious injury or death to the child.

Damaged or impact-damaged child seats or child seat fasteners must be replaced.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if they are secured in child seats.

!It is still possible to control the rear door windows using the switches located on the driver's door control panel.

Warning! GRAM

Turn on the master switch when children are traveling in the rear seats of the vehicle. Otherwise, children may be injured, e.g. by being caught in a window opening.

Always remove the SmartKey from the ignition and lock the vehicle when leaving the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may result in an accident and/or serious injury.

Protection and security

alarm panic

� Panic Alarm The audible alarm and flashing exterior lights will sound for approximately 2 1/2 minutes.

1 button

activation

� Hold button 1 for at least one second.

Deactivate

� Press button 1 again.

� Insert the SmartKey into the ignition.

iFor US Use Only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. The operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Protection and security

Driving safety systems

� Driving safety systems In this chapter you will find information about the following driving safety systems:

� ABS (anti-lock braking system)

� BAS (Brake Assist System)

� ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

� SBC (Sensotronic brake control)

� 4MATIC (Electronic Four-Wheel Drive)

ABS

The anti-lock braking system (ABS) regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock when braking. This allows you to maintain the ability to drive the vehicle.

The ABS operates above approximately 8 km/h (5 mph), regardless of road conditions.

On slippery surfaces, the ABS will react even with light pressure on the brake.

When driving in winter, the maximum effectiveness of ABS, BAS, ESP, SBC and 4MATIC can only be achieved with winter tires (M+S tyres) or snow chains as required.

Warning! GRAM

The following factors increase the risk of accidents:

� Excessive speed, especially when cornering

� Wet and slippery road surfaces

Following another vehicle too closely

ABS, BAS, ESP, SBC and 4MATIC cannot reduce this risk.

Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.

Warning! GRAM

Do not pump the brake pedal. Instead, press the brake pedal firmly and evenly. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of ABS and significantly reduces braking efficiency.

Protection and security

Driving safety systems

The fault warning lamp in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition is switched on. Goes off when the engine is running.

Braking

If the ABS activates during braking, the ABS/ESP warning light v on the instrument cluster will flash. Thanks to the SBC braking system, you won't feel the pulsation of the brake pedal.

� Keep firm, constant pressure on the brake pedal.

Constant and constant pressure on the brake pedal gives you the benefits of ABS, namely stopping power and steering ability.

The ABS/ESP warning light v flashes when the ABS is engaged, which may indicate unsafe road conditions and remind you to take extra care while driving.

emergency braking maneuver

� Maintain full and continuous pressure on the brake pedal.

For more information, refer to the "Useful Tips" chapter (� page 313).

Warning! GRAM

ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on a vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering performance beyond what the condition of the vehicle's brakes and tires or the grip they provide allow. ABS cannot prevent accidents, including accidents resulting from excessive cornering speed, following another vehicle too closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive and qualified driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with ABS must never be used in a reckless or dangerous manner that may compromise the safety of you or others.

Protection and security

Driving safety systems

SHORT

The Brake Assist System (BAS) works in emergency situations. If the brakes are applied too quickly, the BAS system automatically provides full brake boost, potentially shortening stopping distances. Apply continuous full brake pressure until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

When the brake pedal is released, the brakes operate normally again. Then the BAS system is turned off.

ESP

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) monitors vehicle traction (the force of adhesive friction between the tires and the road surface) and handling.

ESP recognizes when a wheel is slipping or when the vehicle starts to skid. By applying the brakes to the appropriate wheel and limiting engine power, ESP stabilizes the vehicle. ESP is especially useful when driving outdoors and on wet or slippery surfaces.

The ABS/ESP warning light v in the instrument cluster flashes when ESP is on.

The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition is switched on. Goes off when the engine is running.

Warning! GRAM

BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking performance beyond what the condition of the vehicle's brakes, tires, or traction allows. BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive cornering speed, too little distance or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be used in a reckless or dangerous manner that may compromise the safety of you or others.

Protection and security

Driving safety systems

For more information, refer to the "Useful Tips" chapter (� page 313).

Warning! GRAM

Never disable the ESP system when you see the ABS/ESP warning light v flashing on the instrument cluster. In this case, proceed as follows:

� While driving, accelerate as little as possible.

� While driving, release the accelerator pedal.

� Adjust your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions may cause the vehicle to skid.

ESP cannot prevent accidents caused by excessive speed.

Warning! GRAM

ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on a vehicle, nor can it increase the traction it offers. ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive cornering speed or skidding. Only a safe, attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with ESP must never be used in a reckless or dangerous manner that may compromise the safety of you or others.

!ESP will only work properly when using wheels with the recommended tire size (� page 398).

!Vehicles without 4MATIC: Due to the automatic operation of the ESP, the engine and ignition must be switched off (SmartKey in start position 0 or 1 or Start/Stop KEYLESS-GO button* in position 0 or 1) when:

the parking brake is tested on a brake dynamometer

� the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised

Otherwise active braking by ESP can seriously damage the braking system.

For vehicles with 4MATIC, see "Electronic Four-Wheel Drive (4MATIC) with ESP" (� page 88).

Protection and security

Driving safety systems

turn off ESP

To improve vehicle traction, turn off ESP in situations where it would be beneficial for the drive wheels to slip and therefore cut into surfaces that provide better traction, such as:

� starting on slippery surfaces and deep snow in combination with snow chains

� in sand or gravel

The switch is located on the center console.

1 ESP on/off switch

� Press the ESP switch 1 until the ABS/ESP warning light v on the instrument panel comes on.

ESP is off.

If one or more drive wheels are spinning, the ABS/ESP warning light v on the instrument panel flashes regardless of speed.

Traction control brakes the spinning wheel even when ESP is turned off.

ESP always works when braking, even if it has been turned off.

Warning! GRAM

The ESP system should not be turned off during normal driving except as described below. Disabling the system will reduce vehicle stability during driving manoeuvres.

!Turn on ESP immediately if the above conditions no longer exist.

iDISTRONIC* cannot be activated when ESP has been deactivated.

!Avoid spinning the drive wheel for a long time with ESP deactivated. This can cause serious damage to the transmission which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Protection and security

Driving safety systems

Turn ESP on

� Press the ESP button 1.

The ABS/ESP indicator light v on the instrument panel goes out.

You are back in normal driving mode.

SBC braking system

The SBC braking system combines a hydraulic brake circuit with an electronically controlled brake booster. Increased braking safety and improved braking comfort.

Warning! GRAM

When the ABS/ESP warning light v is on steadily, ESP is disabled.

Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and the condition of the ESP not working.

!Turn on ESP immediately if the above conditions no longer exist.

Warning! GRAM

Never ignore a brake fault indicated on the speedometer display, for example by; (US only) or 3 warning lights (Canada only). Refer to the "Tips" section (� page 314). Also read and follow the messages in the instrument cluster display (� page 321).

Warning! GRAM

The SBC braking system requires electrical power to function.

Failure of the vehicle's power supply or electrical system may affect the operation of the braking system and put it into emergency mode. In this case, the red brake warning lamp (� page 314) and warning messages on the instrument panel (� page 321) come on while driving. To brake, the driver must apply much more pressure to the brake pedal and depress it much harder to achieve the desired braking effect. Depress the brake pedal fully if necessary. The brakes only work on the front wheels. Braking distance increases! ��

Protection and security

Driving safety systems

The SBC brake system automatically applies when:

� unlock the vehicle with SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*

� open the driver or passenger door

� turn the SmartKey in the ignition switch to position 1

� on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*, press the start/stop button on the gearshift lever once

� press the brake pedal

� release the parking brake

If there is a fault with the SBC braking system, we recommend transporting the vehicle with all wheels off the ground using a flatbed or a suitable wheel trolley/lifter. A tow bar should be used if circumstances do not allow the recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is only permitted up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not exceeding 30 miles per hour (50 km/h). See "Towing Your Vehicle" (� page 385) for more information.

iIf the SBC brake system activates the first time you press the brake pedal, you may feel less pedal resistance and longer than normal pedal travel. When you release the pedal, you can also feel the brake pedal pulsating and you can hear the sound caused by the activation of the SBC master cylinder. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. Pedal travel returns to normal when the brake pedal is released, and the sound soon stops.

If the above symptoms occur while driving and the red brake warning light (� page 314) comes on and/or warning messages appear in the instrument cluster (� page 321), the brake system is not working properly. Follow the instructions in the warning messages and have the brake system checked immediately.

��

Protection and security

Driving safety systems

SBC brake assist is automatically disabled

� Approximately two minutes after turning the SmartKey in the ignition switch to the 0 position or removing the SmartKey

� approximately two minutes after pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button to turn off the engine or power and open the driver's door (when the driver's door is open, the starter switch is in the 0 position, as is the SmartKey switch removed from the starter motor)

� approximately 20 seconds after locking the vehicle from the outside

Note on driving with SBC

� After long periods of light load on the braking system, apply the brakes occasionally while driving at high speed. This improves the grip of the brake pads.

� After driving on wet or snowy roads, apply the brakes firmly before parking the vehicle. This generates heat which is used to dry the brake discs and help prevent corrosion.

� On long, steep descents, downshift to a lower gear (speed range 1, 2, or 3) to prevent brake overheating and reduce brake wear.

� After sudden braking, it is advisable to continue driving for a while so that the air current cools the brakes faster.

� Only parts approved by Mercedes-Benz (e.g. brake pads) may be fitted to the vehicle. Brake pads not approved by Mercedes-Benz may compromise the safety of your car.

Warning! GRAM

Brake pad replacement and other work on the SBC brake system should only be performed by qualified technicians. For more information, please contact the Mercedes-Benz Center. The SBC brake system must be deactivated before working on the system. As part of an automatic self-test, the system periodically builds up high pressure. In addition, the system is automatically activated when the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey, the driver's or passenger's door is opened, the ignition switch is turned to position 1, the brake pedal is pressed or the ignition is switched on. break. in commissioning. If the system is not deactivated before maintenance, the brake pistons will extend and brake fluid will leak, which may cause injury (bruises and acid burns). Elongated brake pistons can also cause injury.

Warning! GRAM

Be especially careful when braking so as not to endanger other road users.

Protection and security

Driving safety systems

Electronic All-Wheel Drive (4MATIC) with ESP

All-wheel drive models only.

4MATIC improves the vehicle's ability to use the available traction, e.g. when driving in winter in the mountains in snowy conditions, by transferring power to all four wheels.

Warning! GRAM

If you see the ESP v warning light flashing on the speedometer, do the following:

� While driving, accelerate as little as possible

� While driving, release the accelerator pedal

� Adjust your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions

Failure to follow these instructions may cause the vehicle to skid.

ESP cannot prevent accidents caused by excessive speed.

!Do not tow with the axle raised.

Failure to do so may damage the transfer case, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

!Performance testing should only be performed on a dual axis dynamometer.

Failure to do so may damage the transfer case, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

!Due to the automatic operation of the ESP system, the engine and ignition must be off (SmartKey in start switch position 0 or 1, or Start/Stop KEYLESS-GO* in 0 or 1 position) when checking the parking brake on the brake test bench.

Otherwise, active braking by ESP can seriously damage the braking system of the front or rear axle.

Functional tests with the engine running may only be performed on a two-axle dynamometer.

Protection and security

anti-burglary systems

� Anti-burglary systemsInmobilizador

The immobilizer prevents the vehicle from being started by unauthorized persons.

activation

� With SmartKey: Removing the SmartKey from the ignition switch activates the immobilizer.

� With KEYLESS-GO*: Switching off the engine with the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear lever activates the immobilizer.

Deactivate

� With SmartKey: Inserting the SmartKey into the ignition switch disables the immobilizer.

� With KEYLESS-GO*: Starting the engine with the Start/Stop button on the gearshift lever disables the immobilizer.

burglary alarm system

Once the alarm system is armed, the audible and visual alarm is activated when someone opens

door

trunk

to the hood.

The alarm will remain on even if the trigger (for example, a door) is closed immediately.

The alarm system will also activate when

someone is trying to lift the vehicle.

Arming the alarm system

The alarm system activates approximately ten seconds after the vehicle is locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*. The direction indicators will flash three times to indicate that the alarm system is armed. The indicator light on the central locking switch (� page 25) starts flashing when the alarm system is armed.

iIf the engine does not start (vehicle battery is still charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (Canada).

iIf the alarm remains on for more than 20 seconds, the Tele Aid* system automatically initiates an emergency call (� page 253), provided Tele Aid is subscribed and properly activated, and cellular service and GPS coverage are required. available.

Protection and security

anti-burglary systems

Disarm the alarm system

The alarm system disarms when you unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*. The direction indicators will flash once to indicate that the alarm system is disarmed.

alarm cancellation

with a smart key

� Insert the SmartKey into the ignition.

� Press the Œ or ‹ button on the SmartKey.

The alarm will be cancelled.

Z KEYLESS-GO*

� Grasp the outside door handle.

� Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button*.

The alarm will be cancelled.

trailer alarm

Once the tow alarm is armed, an audible and visual alarm will sound when someone tries to lift the vehicle.

Arm trailer alarm

When the vehicle is locked, the trailer alarm goes off automatically after approximately 30 seconds.

When the vehicle is unlocked, the tow protection is automatically deactivated.

iIf the turn signals do not flash three times, one of the following may not be properly closed:

door

trunk lid

Close the appropriate position and lock the vehicle again.

i The anti-tow alarm is activated, for example, when the vehicle is raised on one side.

If the alarm remains on for more than 20 seconds, the Tele Aid* system automatically initiates an emergency call (� page 253), provided that the Tele Aid service is subscribed and properly activated, and that the required mobile network service and GPS coverage is available.

Protection and security

anti-burglary systems

Disarm the trailer alarm

To prevent the trailer alarm from activating, disable the trailer alarm before towing the vehicle or when parking on a moving surface, such as a ferry or automatic train.

The button is located on the top control panel.

1 Trailer alarm off button

� Turn off the ignition and remove the SmartKey.

� Press button 1.

The indicator light on the button will light up briefly.

� Get out and lock the vehicle using the SmartKey or (vehicles with KEY-LESS-GO*) the lock button on each door handle.

The trailer alarm remains disabled until the vehicle is locked again.

Trailer alarm cancel

To cancel an alarm:

with a smart key

� Insert the SmartKey into the ignition.

� Press the Œ or ‹ button on the SmartKey.

Z KEYLESS-GO*

� Grasp the outside door handle.

� Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.

i The trailer alarm cannot be disarmed when the ignition is on.

checks in detail

lock and unlock

Judgment

memory function

Turning on

combination of instruments

Control system

Automatic gearbox

good visibility

Climate control

Automatic air conditioning*

Electric windows

Sunroof/tilt*

Panoramic moonroof/tilting roof*

drive systems

Landing

useful functions

checks in detail

lock and unlock

�See the "Detailed Controls" section for detailed information on how to operate the devices installed in your vehicle. If you already know the basic functions of your vehicle, this section will be of particular interest to you.

For a quick overview of the vehicle's basic functions, refer to the "Getting Started" section of this manual. The relevant page numbers are listed at the beginning of each segment.

Locking and unlocking the SmartKey

Your vehicle comes with two SmartKeys, each with a remote control and a removable mechanical key. The locking tabs on the mechanical part of the two SmartKeys are colored differently to help distinguish each key.

SmartKey provides an extended range of operation. However, to prevent theft, it is recommended that you only unlock your vehicle when you are near it.

SmartKey locks and unlocks centrally

door

trunk

fuel filler cap

SmartKey with remote control

1 ‹ Lock button 2 Š Tailgate unlock button3 Mechanical key lock catch4 Œ Unlock button5 Battery status indicator6 Â Panic button (� page 79)

checks in detail

lock and unlock

Factory settings

global unlock

� Press the Œ button.

All direction indicators flash once. The door lock buttons move up.

The vehicle will automatically re-lock within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if:

The doors and trunk do not open

� The SmartKey is not inserted into the ignition

the central locking switch is not activated

blockade global

� Press the ‹ button.

All direction indicators flash three times. The door lock buttons move down.

selective regulation

If you often travel alone, you can reprogram the SmartKey so that pressing Œ only unlocks the driver's door and fuel filler door.

� Press and hold the Œ and ‹ buttons simultaneously for approximately five seconds until the battery indicator 5 flashes twice.

SmartKey will work as follows:

Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap

� Press the Œ button once.

global unlock

� Press the Œ button twice.

blockade global

� Press the ‹ button.

Warning! GRAM

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition, carry it with the KEYLESS-GO* and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children can open the armored door from the inside, which could cause an accident or serious injury.

!To prevent possible malfunctions, avoid exposing the SmartKey to high levels of electromagnetic radiation.

iThe SmartKey can also be used to open and close the electric windows (page 201) and the sliding/lifting roof* (page 205) or panoramic sliding/lifting roof* (page 212).

checks in detail

lock and unlock

Factory reset

� Press and hold the Œ and ‹ buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery indicator 5 flashes twice.

Unlocking and opening the tailgate

You can unlock and open the trunk separately.

A minimum headroom of 5.90 ft (1.80 m) is required to open the tailgate.

� Press button Š until the boot unlocks and begins to open.

The boot can also be opened from the inside in an emergency, see "Opening the boot lid in an emergency" (� page 110).

!If you can no longer lock or unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey, the SmartKey batteries are dead, the SmartKey is not working properly, or the vehicle battery is dead.

Check the batteries in the SmartKey (page 97) and replace them if necessary (page 361).

� Use the mechanical key to unlock the door (� page 359).

� Have the vehicle batteries and connections checked.

� Use the mechanical key to lock the door (� page 359).

If the SmartKey does not work properly, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Retailer.

!The boot lid opens automatically. Always make sure you have enough headroom.

Vehicles with tailgate opening/closing system*: to stop the opening process, press button Š. The trunk lid stops moving.

iIf the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the tailgate will lock automatically when closed (� page 105). The direction indicators will flash three times to confirm locking.

checks in detail

lock and unlock

Battery check

� Press the ‹ or Œ button.

The battery indicator light 5 will illuminate briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are operational.

SmartKey or mechanical key lost

If you lose your SmartKey or mechanical key, follow these steps:

� Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to deactivate the SmartKey.

� If you lose your SmartKey or mechanical key, report it to your car insurer immediately.

� Replace the mechanical interlock if necessary.

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be happy to provide you with a replacement part.

SmartKey z KEYLESS-GO*

Specially equipped vehicles come with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each with a remote control and a removable mechanical key. The locking tabs on the mechanical part of the two SmartKeys are colored differently to help distinguish each SmartKey.

KEYLESS-GO is integrated into the SmartKey. In these vehicles, the validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is checked each time the door handle is gripped.

If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid, the vehicle is unlocked

door

trunk lid

fuel filler cap

!If the battery indicator light 5 does not light up briefly during the check, the SmartKey batteries are discharged.

Replace the batteries (� page 361).

The necessary batteries can be purchased at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

iIf the batteries are being tested within vehicle signal range, pressing the ‹ or Œ button will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly.

checks in detail

lock and unlock

smart key

1 ‹ Lock button 2 Š Tailgate unlock button3 Mechanical key lock catch4 Œ Unlock button5 Battery status indicator6 Â Panic button (� page 79)

For more information on using the SmartKeys, see "SmartKey" (� page 94).

Important tips for using KEYLESS-GO

� You can also use the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO as a normal SmartKey (� page 94).

� You can combine KEYLESS-GO functions with normal SmartKey functions (for example, opening with KEYLESS-GO and locking with the remote).

� Always carry the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you.

� Never store the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO together with:

� Electronic items such as a mobile phone or other SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO

� Metal objects such as coins or aluminum foil

This may impair the operation of the KEYLESS-GO system.

Warning! GRAM

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition, carry it with the KEYLESS-GO* and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Using vehicle equipment unattended may result in serious personal injury.

!To prevent possible malfunctions, avoid exposing the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO to high levels of electromagnetic radiation.

iThe SmartKey can also be used to open and close the electric windows (page 201) and the sliding/lifting roof* (page 205) or panoramic sliding/lifting roof* (page 212).

checks in detail

lock and unlock

� To lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey must be outside the vehicle, approximately 1 m from the door or trunk.

� To start the engine using the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:

� The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be in the vehicle.

� All doors must be closed.

� The brake pedal must be pressed firmly. Do not press the accelerator pedal.

� If you started the engine with the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you can only stop it again with this button, even if you have inserted the SmartKey in the ignition in the meantime.

� This does not apply if the shift lever is still in the P position after starting and the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition. The SmartKey will then take priority over KEYLESS-GO and the vehicle's electrical system will operate according to the position of the SmartKey in the ignition switch, even when the engine is off.

� If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is further away from the vehicle and cannot be recognized by the system, the vehicle cannot be locked or the engine cannot be started using the KEYLESS-GO system.

� If the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO is removed from the vehicle with the ignition on (e.g. when a passenger exits the vehicle with the SmartKey), the message Key not recognized! will appear on the multifunction display.

Locate your SmartKey or change its current location immediately (for example, put it in the front passenger seat or put it in your shirt pocket).

� Remember that the engine can be started by anyone who has a SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO left in the vehicle. If you leave the SmartKey in the KEYLESS-GO while exiting and locking the vehicle, the message Key recognized in vehicle! will appear on the multifunction display.

100

checks in detail

lock and unlock

Factory settings

global unlock

� Grab the door handle.

The vehicle will relock automatically after approximately 40 seconds if neither the doors nor the trunk are opened.

blockade global

� Press the lock button on the door handle (� page 54) or trunk lid (� page 102). selective regulation

If you often travel alone, you can reprogram your SmartKey with KEY-LESS-GO so that only the driver's door and fuel door unlock when you grab the driver's door handle.

� Press and hold the Œ and ‹ buttons simultaneously for approximately five seconds until the battery indicator 5 flashes twice.

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will work as follows:

Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap

� Press the Œ button once.

global unlock

� Press the Œ button twice.

blockade global

� Press the ‹ button.

Factory reset

� Press and hold the Œ and ‹ buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery indicator 5 flashes twice.

!If you can no longer lock or unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey, the SmartKey batteries are dead, the SmartKey is not working properly, or the vehicle battery is dead.

Check the batteries in the SmartKey (page 97) and replace them if necessary (page 361).

� Use the mechanical key to unlock the door (� page 359).

� Have the vehicle batteries and connections checked.

� Use the mechanical key to lock the door (� page 359).

If the SmartKey does not work properly, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Retailer.

101

checks in detail

lock and unlock

Unlocking and opening the tailgate

A minimum headroom of 5.90 ft (1.80 m) is required to open the tailgate.

The holder is located in the recess of the rear number plate.

The tailgate can be unlocked and opened separately.

� Pull the handle

� Press and hold the Š button until the boot lid unlocks and opens.

The tailgate can also be opened from the inside in an emergency, see "Emergency opening of the tailgate" (� page 110).

!If you can no longer lock or unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, the SmartKey batteries are dead, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery is dead.

Check the SmartKey batteries with KEYLESS-GO (page 97) and replace them if necessary (page 361).

� Use the mechanical key to unlock the door (� page 359).

� Have the vehicle battery checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop.

� Use the mechanical key to lock the door (� page 359).

If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO does not work properly, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

!The boot lid opens automatically. Always make sure you have enough headroom.

Vehicles with tailgate open/close system*: To stop the opening process, press the Š button on the SmartKey. The trunk lid stops moving.

iIf the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the tailgate will lock automatically when it is closed. The direction indicators will flash three times to confirm locking.

102

checks in detail

lock and unlock

vehicle lock

1 trunk lock button

� Press lock button 1.

� Press the lock button on the outside door handle (� page 54).

� On vehicles with the tailgate open/close system*, press the KEYLESS-GO lock/close switch on the tailgate (� page 109).

The vehicle is locked. The direction indicators flash three times to confirm locking.

Battery check

� Press the ‹ or Œ button.

The battery indicator light 5 will illuminate briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are operational.

Lost SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO

If you lose your SmartKey using KEY-LESS-GO, you need to do the following:

� Deactivate the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO at an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop.

� Report the damage to your auto insurer immediately.

� Replace the mechanical interlock if necessary.

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be happy to provide you with a replacement part.

!If the battery indicator light 5 does not light up briefly during the check, the SmartKey batteries are discharged.

Replace the batteries (� page 361).

The necessary batteries can be purchased at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

iIf the batteries are being tested within vehicle signal range, pressing the ‹ or Œ button will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly.

103

checks in detail

lock and unlock

Opening the door from the inside

You can open a locked door from the inside. Only open doors when conditions are safe to do so.

1 Lock knob 2 Inside door handle

� Pull the handle 2.

If the door was locked, the lock knob 1 will move up.

opening the trunk

Opening the trunk from the outside

A minimum headroom of 5.90 ft (1.80 m) is required to open the tailgate.

The holder is located above the rear license plate recess.

� Pull the handle.

The trunk opens.

iIf the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside using the SmartKey, opening the door from the inside will activate the burglar alarm.

To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:

with a smart key

� Insert the SmartKey into the ignition.

� Press the Œ or ‹ button on the SmartKey.

Z KEYLESS-GO*

� Grasp the outside door handle.

� Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button*.

104

checks in detail

lock and unlock

The trunk can also be opened using the SmartKey (� page 96) or from inside in an emergency, see "Emergency opening of the boot lid" (� page 110).

Opening the trunk from the inside

The trunk can be opened from the inside when the vehicle is stationary.

A minimum headroom of 5.90 ft (1.80 m) is required to open the tailgate.

The switch is located on the driver's door.

1 remote tailgate opener switch with indicator light

� Pull the remote tailgate release switch 1 until the trunk begins to open.

The trunk lid opens. The indicator light in the switch comes on and stays on until the trunk is closed.

The trunk can also be opened using the SmartKey (� page 96) or from inside in an emergency, see "Emergency opening of the boot lid" (� page 110).

!The boot lid opens automatically. Always make sure you have enough headroom.

iThe vehicle is centrally locked (� page 94).

If the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the tailgate will lock automatically when closed (� page 97). The direction indicators will flash three times to confirm locking.

!The boot lid opens automatically. Always make sure you have enough headroom.

iIf the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the tailgate will lock automatically when closed (� page 105). The direction indicators will flash three times to confirm locking.

105

checks in detail

lock and unlock

closing the trunk

1 obsession

� Lower the boot lid by pulling handle 1 firmly.

� Close the trunk lid with your hands flat on it.

Tailgate opening/closing system*

The trunk can be opened from the inside when the vehicle is stationary.

opened from the inside

A minimum headroom of 5.90 ft (1.80 m) is required to open the tailgate.

The switch for opening and closing the trunk is located on the driver's door.

1 remote tailgate switch with indicator light

Warning! GRAM

To avoid personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are around.

Warning! GRAM

Only drive with the boot closed, as, in addition to other hazards such as obstruction of visibility, exhaust fumes can enter the interior of the vehicle.

iDo not put the SmartKey in an open trunk. You can block yourself.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent possible accidental locking, the tailgate will open automatically if a KEYLESS-GO-enabled SmartKey is recognized in the vehicle or in the trunk.

106

checks in detail

lock and unlock

� Pull the trunk lid remote switch 1 until the trunk begins to open.

The tailgate opens automatically. The indicator light in the switch comes on and stays on until the trunk is closed.

The trunk can also be opened using the SmartKey (� page 96) or from inside in an emergency, see "Emergency opening of the boot lid" (� page 110).

Tailgate opening height limitation*

The opening height of the boot lid may be limited when carrying goods on the roof rack (e.g. presence of the optional MB sports luggage box). When activated, the tailgate opens to approximately the height of the roof edge.

The tailgate opening height limitation can be activated via the control system (� page 155).

closed from the inside

� Press the remote tailgate switch (� page 105) until the indicator light on the switch goes out and the tailgate closes.

To interrupt the shutdown procedure:

� Release the trunk lid remote switch.

If the boot lid comes into contact with an object (e.g. luggage that is too high) during closing, the closing process is interrupted and the boot opens slightly again.

!The boot lid opens automatically. Always make sure you have enough headroom. To stop the unlocking procedure, push or pull the tailgate remote switch.

iIf the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the tailgate will lock automatically when closed (� page 105). The direction indicators will flash three times to confirm locking.

Warning! GRAM

Keep an eye on the trunk area when operating the door mounted switch. Carefully monitor the lockdown procedure to ensure that no one is at risk of injury.

To abort the locking procedure, release the remote trunk lid switch on the door.

107

checks in detail

lock and unlock

Closing the boot from the outside (vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*)

1 tailgate lock switch

� Briefly press the tailgate lock switch 1.

The trunk lid closes.

If the tailgate comes into contact with an object when closing (e.g. luggage that is too high), the closing process is stopped and the tailgate opens slightly again.

The shutdown procedure can be stopped at any time by:

� by pressing the tailgate lock button again

� pull the remote control switch on the driver's door

� pressing the Š button on the SmartKey when the SmartKey is not in the ignition

iDo not put the SmartKey in an open trunk. You can block yourself.

Warning! GRAM

Only drive with the boot closed, as, in addition to other hazards such as obstruction of visibility, exhaust fumes can enter the interior of the vehicle.

Warning! GRAM

Carefully supervise the locking procedure to ensure that no one is exposed to injury. To avoid personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the closing procedure, press the remote tailgate switch (on the driver's door), the tailgate lock switch 1 or the Š button on the SmartKey.

Always remove the SmartKey from the ignition switch when leaving the vehicle, take the SmartKey and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may result in an accident and/or serious injury.

108

checks in detail

lock and unlock

Closing the boot from the outside (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*)

1 tailgate lock switch

� Make sure you have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you.

� Briefly press the tailgate lock switch 1.

The trunk lid closes.

If the boot lid comes into contact with an object (e.g. luggage that is too high) during closing, the closing process is interrupted and the boot opens slightly again.

The shutdown procedure can be stopped at any time by:

� by pressing the tailgate lock button again

� pull the remote control switch on the driver's door

� pressing the Š button on the SmartKey when the SmartKey is not in the ignition

iTo prevent possible accidental locking, the tailgate will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized in the vehicle or in the trunk.

Warning! GRAM

Only drive with the boot closed, as, in addition to other hazards such as obstruction of visibility, exhaust fumes can enter the interior of the vehicle.

Warning! GRAM

Carefully supervise the locking procedure to ensure that no one is exposed to injury. To avoid personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the locking procedure, press the remote tailgate switch (on the driver's door), the tailgate lock switch 1 or the Š button on the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition switch, carry the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may result in an accident and/or serious injury.

109

checks in detail

lock and unlock

Closing the boot and locking the vehicle from the outside (vehicles with KEY-LESS-GO*)

1 KEYLESS-GO lock/switch*

You can close the boot lid and lock the vehicle at the same time.

� Make sure you have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you.

� Briefly press switch 1.

The vehicle will be locked and the tailgate will close automatically. The direction indicators flash three times to confirm locking.

If the boot lid comes into contact with an object (e.g. luggage that is too high) during closing, the closing process is interrupted and the boot opens slightly again.

The shutdown procedure can be stopped at any time by:

� by pressing the tailgate lock button again

� pull the remote control switch on the driver's door

� pressing the Š button on the SmartKey when the SmartKey is not in the ignition

iTo prevent possible accidental locking, the tailgate will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized in the vehicle or in the trunk.

Warning! GRAM

Carefully supervise the locking procedure to ensure that no one is exposed to injury. To avoid personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the locking procedure, press the remote tailgate switch (on the driver's door), the tailgate lock switch 1, the Š button on the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, or the remote locking switch. door).

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition, carry it with the KEYLESS-GO* and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may result in an accident and/or serious injury.

110

checks in detail

lock and unlock

Emergency opening of the trunk lid

The emergency release button is located on the inside of the tailgate.

1 emergency release button

� Briefly press the emergency release button 1.

The trunk is unlocked and the boot lid opens.

Emergency unlock button illumination:

� The button will flash for 30 minutes after opening the trunk.

� The button will flash for 60 minutes after the trunk is closed.

Warning! GRAM

Only drive with the boot closed, as, in addition to other hazards such as obstruction of visibility, exhaust fumes can enter the interior of the vehicle.

iEmergency release button unlocks and opens the trunk while stationary or driving.

The emergency unlock button will not open the tailgate if the vehicle's battery is discharged or disconnected.

iIf the emergency unlock button is pressed and the vehicle has been centrally locked from the outside using the SmartKey, the exterior lights will flash and the audible alarm will sound when the tailgate is opened.

To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:

with a smart key

� Insert the SmartKey into the ignition.

� Press the Œ or ‹ button on the SmartKey.

Z KEYLESS-GO*

� Grasp the outside door handle.

� Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button*.

111

checks in detail

lock and unlock

automatic central locking

The doors and trunk lock automatically when the ignition is turned on and the wheels are spinning at a vehicle speed of approximately 15 km/h or more.

You can open a locked door from the inside. Only open doors when conditions are safe to do so.

For information on towing the vehicle, see the "Tips" section (� page 385).

The auto-lock mode can be disabled via the control system (� page 154).

Lock and unlock from the inside

You can lock or unlock the doors and trunk from the inside using the central locking switch. This can be useful, for example, when you want to lock the vehicle before driving.

The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with the central locking switch.

The switch is located on the center console.

central locking switch

1 Lock 2 Unlock

The iDoor unlocks automatically after an accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold.

The vehicle automatically locks when the ignition is turned on and the wheels are spinning at a speed of approximately 15 km/h or more. Therefore, it can be locked when the vehicle

being pushed or towed

He's on the test bench

Warning! GRAM

Always remove the SmartKey from the ignition when leaving the vehicle, take it with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may result in an accident and/or serious injury.

112

checks in detail

lock and unlock

� Press the upper half of the central locking switch 1.

If both front doors are closed, the vehicle is locked.

unlock

� Press the lower half of the central locking switch 2.

The vehicle is unlocked.

You can open a locked door from the inside. Only open doors when conditions are safe to do so.

If the vehicle was previously centrally locked with the SmartKey, it cannot be unlocked with the central locking switch.

If the vehicle was previously locked using the central locking switch

� in the selective remote control mode, only the front doors that are opened from the inside are unlocked.

� In global remote control mode, the vehicle is fully unlocked when the front door is opened from the inside.

113

checks in detail

Judgment

� Seats Refer to the “Getting Started” chapter (� page 35) for information on adjusting the seats.

Easy Entry/Exit*

When the easy in/out function is activated, the steering wheel tilts up and the driver's seat moves backwards.

This makes it easier to get in and out of the vehicle when the driver's door is open. However, the engine must be turned off.

When the SmartKey is inserted into the ignition switch or the KEYLESS-Go* Start/Stop button is pressed and the driver's door is closed, the steering wheel and driver's seat return to their last set positions.

You can activate the following features:

� Steering column:

Only the steering column fits.

� Steering column and seat:

The steering column and seat are cramped.

Easy Entry/Exit can be enabled or disabled in the convenient sub-menu of the control system (� page 155).

Warning! GRAM

Make sure that no one can be caught or injured by the moving steering wheel and driver's seat when easy in/out is enabled, the driver's door is open and the engine is turned off, or the smart ignition key is removed. Change.

Do not leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children can open the driver's door and accidentally activate the easy in/out* function, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury.

iTo cancel seat/steering wheel movement, do one of the following:

� Press the seat adjustment switch (� page 28).

� Move the steering column lever (� page 37).

� Press the memory switch (� page 28).

114

checks in detail

Judgment

Removing and installing the head restraints of the front seats

For information on adjusting the headrest, refer to the "Getting Started" chapter (� page 36).

Front seat head restraints

Removing the front head restraints

� Push switch 1 up and hold until the headrest is fully extended.

� Remove the headrest.

Installing the front head restraints:

� Slide switch 1 up and hold it for about five seconds.

� Push the headrest down until you hear a click.

� Adjust the headrest to the desired position (� page 36). Warning! GRAM

For your own safety, only ride with properly adjusted head restraints.

Do not drive without head restraints on the seat. Head restraints are designed to reduce injuries in a crash.

i Tilt the seat back to make it easier to remove and install the head restraints.

115

checks in detail

Judgment

Rear seat head restraints

Reclining headrests with switch on the center console

The rear seat head restraints can be folded down to increase visibility.

1 headrest release switch

� Make sure the ignition is turned on.

All lights on the instrument panel come on.

� Press the side of the symbol on rocker switch 1 to release the head restraints.

The head restraints will fold back.

Adjusting the head restraints in a vertical position

� Pull the headrest forward until it clicks into place.

!The rear seat head restraints cannot be adjusted.

Warning! GRAM

For safety reasons, always drive with the rear head restraints in the upright position when the rear seats are occupied.

Keep the area around the head restraints clear of objects (e.g. clothing) so as not to impede the folding of the head restraints.

!Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted when placing them in the upright position. Otherwise, its protective function cannot be ensured.

116

checks in detail

Judgment

Removing and installing the headrests of the rear seats

1 release latch

Removing the head restraints of the rear seats

� Fold the seatback forward (� page 240).

� Foldable headrest (� page 115).

� Press the headrest release latch 1 and pull the headrests out of the guides.

� Fold the backrest back to its original position.

Installing the rear seat head restraints

Multicontour seat*

The multi-contour seat has a movable seat cushion and integrated inflatable airbags in the backrest to provide additional lumbar and lateral support.

Seat cushion movement, back cushion height and inclination are infinitely variable using the switches on the right side of the seat after turning the SmartKey in the ignition switch to position 2 or pressing the Start/KEYLESS-GO* button twice to stop.

Warning! GRAM

For your own safety, only ride with properly adjusted head restraints.

Adjust the headrest so that it supports the back of your head at eye level. This will reduce the possibility of head and neck injuries in the event of an accident or similar situation.

Do not drive without head restraints on the seat. Head restraints are designed to reduce injuries in a crash.

Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats.

When installing the head restraints, make sure that:

� put the correct head restraint on the middle seat. It is marked with the letter "M" on the outside of the metal bars.

� the head restraints will fully engage.

117

checks in detail

Judgment

1 Seat depth 2 Lower part of the backrest 3 Center of the backrest 4 Side adjustment of the backrest

� Make sure the ignition is turned on.

All indicator lights in the instrument cluster come on.

Seat cushion depth

� Adjust seat depth to thigh length with switch 1.

Back contour

� Adjust the contour of the backrest to the desired position with æ or ç.

� Move the backrest down with button 2 or towards the center with button 3.

Side reinforcements of the backrest

� Adjust the side rails for good side support with switch 4.

Asiento Drive-Dynamic*

The Drive-Dynamic seat automatically adjusts the lateral support provided by the backrest to your driving style.

1 Center of the backrest2 Lower part of the backrest3 Seat depth4 Driving dynamics activation5 Lateral reinforcements of the backrest6 Massage function

The drive-Dynamic seat electronically controls the air pressure in the air chambers on the sides of the backrest. This feature improves comfort and driving pleasure.

118

checks in detail

Judgment

activation

� Press button 4.

The button indicator comes on for five seconds and the following message appears on the multifunction screen for approximately five seconds.

Deactivate

� Press button 4 again.

The light on the button goes out.

Massage function (PULSE)

The massage function helps prevent muscle strain on long journeys.

� Press button 6.

The indicator light in button 2 comes on. The airbags in the lumbar region pulse.

heated seat*

Both front seat switches are located on the center console. The red indicator lights on the switch come on to show the selected heating level.

iUse the control system to adjust the characteristics of the Drive-Dynamic seat (� page 157).

iWhen the engine is turned off, the last damping setting is retained in memory. The airbag automatically adjusts to this setting when the engine is restarted.

iThe massage function turns off automatically after about five minutes.

Level

off No indicator is lit

1 Light on

2 Two lights are on

The seat heating automatically switches to level 1 after approximately ten minutes.

3 Three lights are on

The seat heating automatically switches to level 2 after approximately five minutes.

119

checks in detail

Judgment

1 seat heating switch

� Make sure the ignition is turned on.

All indicator lights in the instrument cluster come on.

Turn on the seat heating

� Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set.

One or more red lights on the switch show the selected heat level.

Turn off the seat heating

� Press button 1 until all lights are off.

Seat ventilation*

The switch is located on the center console. The seat ventilation can be switched on manually with the ignition on or with the summer opening function (� page 203).

The blue indicator lights on the switch show the selected fan level:

The heated seat will turn off automatically after approximately 20 minutes.

!If one or more lights on the seat heating switch are flashing, the voltage is insufficient because too many electric consumers are on. The seat heating switches off automatically.

The heated seat will automatically turn back on as soon as sufficient voltage is available.

Level

3 Three lights are on

2 Two lights are on

1 Light on

off No indicator lamp is lit

120

checks in detail

Judgment

1 seat ventilation switch

� Make sure the ignition is turned on.

All indicator lights in the instrument cluster come on.

Seat ventilation activation

� Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set.

Turn off the seat ventilation

� Press button 1 until all lights are off.

iSeat ventilation is automatically set to the highest setting if activated with the summer opening function (� page 203).

!If one or all of the lamps on the seat ventilation switch are flashing, the voltage is insufficient due to too many electrical consumers connected. The seat ventilation is automatically turned off.

The seat ventilation will turn on automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.

121

checks in detail

memory function

� Memory function You can save up to three different settings for one SmartKey.

The following settings are saved for each saved item:

� Position of the driver's seat and backrest

� Handlebar position

� Location of the exterior rear-view mirror on the driver's side

� Location of the exterior rear-view mirror on the passenger side

� Position of the front passenger seat

These SmartKey-dependent memory settings can be disabled if desired (� page 156).

!Before operating the vehicle, the driver should check and adjust the seat height, forward and backward seat position and, if necessary, seat back angle to ensure adequate control, reach and comfort. The headrest should also be adjusted to the correct height. For more information on the correct sitting position, see also the section on airbags (� page 57).

Also adjust your handlebars for proper control, range, performance and comfort. Both the interior and exterior rear-view mirrors must be adjusted to ensure good rearward visibility.

Fasten seatbelts. Infants and toddlers must be transported in properly restrained child restraints that meet US Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.

Warning! GRAM

Do not activate the memory function while driving. Activating the memory function while driving may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

122

checks in detail

memory function

The memory switch is located on the door.

M Memory button

1, 2, 3 saved positions

� Make sure the ignition is on or the appropriate door is open and the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition.

Storing items in memory

� Adjust the seats, steering wheel and exterior mirrors to the desired position (� page 34).

� Press the memory button M.

� Release the memory button and press the memory button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds.

All settings will be saved in the selected position.

Reading memory positions

� On the memory button, press and hold the memory position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors are fully in the memory positions.

i Releasing the button immediately stops movement to the saved positions.

Warning! GRAM

Do not operate power seats with the memory button if the seatback is too reclined. This may damage the front or rear seats.

First, set the seatback to the upright position.

123

checks in detail

memory function

Storage compartment for the outside rear-view mirror for parking

To make parking easier, the passenger side exterior mirror can be adjusted so that the right rear wheel is immediately visible when reverse gear is engaged.

For more information on activating the park position, see "Activating the park position of the exterior mirrors" (� page 173).

1 exterior rear view mirror on the passenger side

2 adjustment button

� Stop the vehicle.

� Turn on the ignition (if not already on).

� Press button 1.

Passenger side exterior rear view mirror selected.

� Adjust the exterior mirror using button 2 so that you can see the rear wheel and the curb.

� Press the memory button M.

� Within three seconds, press the lower part of the settings button 2.

The parking position is saved if the mirror is not moving.

iYou can use the memory button to store the parking position of the passenger side door mirror for each SmartKey.

iIf the mirror moves, repeat the steps above. After saving the settings, you can move the mirror again.

124

checks in detail

Turning on

� Lighting For information on turning on the headlights and using the turn signals, see “Getting Started” (� page 46).

exterior light switch

The exterior light switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.

Off

U Automatic headlight mode

C Parking lamps (including side marker lamps, tail lamps, license plate lamps, instrument panel lamps) Canada only: When the engine is running, the low beam lamps are also on.

B Parking lamps plus dipped or main beam (combination switch moved forward).

ˆ Pedestrian traffic light, right (turn left one stop)

Headlights left (turn left two stops)i

If you drive in countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road than the country where the vehicle is registered, you must modify your headlights to have symmetrical dipped beams. Information can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

iIf you remove the SmartKey and open the driver's door while the parking lights or low beams are on, the

warning sound

The $ symbol will appear on the multifunction display

� message Goes off! appears on the multifunction display

125

checks in detail

Turning on

headlight manual mode

The dipped and parking lights can be switched on and off with the exterior light switch (� page 124).

automatic light mode

The side lights, low beam and license plate lights turn on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

� Turn the exterior light switch to the U position.

iWith daytime running lights on and the engine running, the low beam cannot be switched off manually.

To activate the daytime running light mode, see "Setting the Daytime Running Light Mode (US Only)" (� page 151).

Warning! GRAM

If the exterior light switch is in the U position,

� The headlights may turn off unexpectedly when the system detects a bright ambient light, such as oncoming traffic.

� Headlights will not turn on automatically in fog.

To minimize risk to yourself and others, turn on your headlights by turning the exterior light switch to position B while driving or when road conditions or ambient lighting require it.

In low ambient light conditions, shift from U to B only when the vehicle is stationary. Changing from U to B will temporarily turn off the headlights. Doing this while driving in low ambient light conditions may result in an accident.

The automatic headlights function is only an aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle's lights at all times.

iWhen the daytime running light mode is activated, the low beam will not turn off automatically.

126

checks in detail

Turning on

Daytime running light mode

� Turn the exterior light switch to the M or U position.

When the engine is running, the dipped beam headlights turn on automatically. In low ambient light conditions, the parking lights will also turn on.

Canada only

When shifting from Drive to N or P, the dipped beam headlights turn off (with a three-minute delay).

When driving at night, set the exterior light switch to position B to allow the high beam to turn on.

solo EE. UU.

The high beam can also be turned on while driving with the daytime running lights on and the exterior light switch in the M position.

To activate the daytime running light mode, see "Setting the Daytime Running Light Mode" (� page 151).

Location lighting and night security lighting

Location Lighting and Security Night Lighting are described in the control system section of "Setting up the Location Lighting" (� page 152) and "Setting the Night Security Lighting" (� page 153).

Fog lights on

iThe front and rear fog lamps cannot be turned on manually when the exterior lamp switch is in the U position. To activate the fog lamps, turn the exterior lamp switch to position B and pull the exterior lamp switch all the way out. stop (� page 126).

iRefer to the notes on the exterior light switch (� page 124).

Warning! GRAM

In poor ambient light or fog, shift from U to B only when the vehicle is stationary. Changing from U to B will temporarily turn off the headlights. Doing this while driving in low ambient light conditions may result in an accident.

127

checks in detail

Turning on

Front fog lights on

� Make sure the dipped headlights are turned on.

� Pull out the exterior light switch as far as it will go.

The green light ‡ on the light switch will come on.

Rear fog lights on

� Make sure the dipped headlights are turned on.

� Pull out the exterior light switch to the second stop.

The yellow indicator light † on the light switch comes on.

combination switch

The combination switch is located on the left side of the steering column.

1 High beam2 High beam indicator

High beam on

� Set the exterior light switch to position B (� page 124).

� Move the combination switch towards 1.

The high beam indicator A in the instrument cluster is illuminated (� page 22).

iFog lights operate with the parking lights and/or low beams on. Fog lights should only be used in combination with dipped beam headlights. Check your state or regional motor vehicle laws regarding the permitted use of lamps.

128

checks in detail

Turning on

traffic light flasher

� Briefly pull the combination switch in direction 2.

Flashing beacon

The hazard lights can be turned on with the ignition on or off. It activates automatically when the airbag is deployed.

The switch is located on the center console.

1 x Warning Flasher Switch

Flashing beacon on

� Press the hazard flasher switch.

All turn signals will flash.

turn off the flashing emergency light

� Press the hazard flasher switch again.

inner light

1 Left-hand reading lamp switch 2 Rear lighting switch 3 Automatic function switch 4 Front interior lighting switch 5 Right-hand reading lamp switch 6 Ambiente lighting 7 Interior lighting 8 Reading lamps

i With the hazard flashers on and the combination switch set to left or right, the corresponding left or right turn signals will only operate when the SmartKey Starter Switch is in position 1 or 2 .

iIf the hazard lights have been turned on automatically, press switch 1 twice.

129

checks in detail

Turning on

The controls are located on the top control panel.

Activation of automatic control

� Press switch 3.

The interior light comes on in the dark when

� unlock the vehicle

open the door

� remove the SmartKey from the ignition

The interior lighting turns off after the set delay time (� page 154).

Turn off auto steering

� Press switch 3.

The interior lighting stays off even if

� central opening of the vehicle

open the door

� remove the SmartKey from the ignition

control manual

Turning the rear interior lights on and off

� Press button 2.

The back lights in the room turn on.

� Press button 2 again.

The back room lights go out.

Turns the left front reading light on/off

� Press button 1.

The left reading lamp comes on.

� Press button 1 again.

The left reading lamp goes off.

Turns the right front reading lamp on and off

� Press button 5.

The right reading lamp turns on.

� Press button 5 again.

The right reading lamp goes off. If the door is left open, the interior lighting will turn off automatically approximately five minutes after the SmartKey is removed or the ignition switch is turned to 0.

Manually switched on interior lighting does not switch off automatically.

130

checks in detail

Turning on

lamps at the door

The corresponding door light comes on when the door is opened in the dark and the interior lighting is switched to automatic mode.

Entrance lighting turns off automatically when the door is closed.

trunk lamp

The trunk light comes on when the trunk lid is open.

If the trunk is left open for an extended period of time, the trunk light will turn off automatically after approximately ten minutes.

iIf you turn the SmartKey to the 0 position or remove the SmartKey, the entrance door lights will stay on for approximately five minutes.

131

checks in detail

combination of instruments

� Instrument cluster For a complete illustration of the instrument cluster, refer to the “At a Glance” section of this manual (� page 22).

The instrument cluster turns on when

open the door

� turn on the ignition

press the restart button (page 22)

� turn on the exterior lights

The instrument cluster settings can be changed in the sub-menu of the instrument cluster of the control system (� page 146).

instrument cluster illumination

Use the reset button (� page 22) to adjust the brightness of the instrument cluster illumination.

To illuminate the lighting

� Turn the reset button on the instrument cluster clockwise (� page 22).

The illumination of the instrument cluster will increase.

To dim the lighting

� Turn the reset button on the instrument cluster counterclockwise (� page 22).

The instrument cluster illumination will dim.

The iInstrument's instrument cluster illumination automatically dims or brightens to match the ambient lighting conditions.

The instrument cluster lighting will also automatically adjust when the vehicle's exterior lights are turned on.

132

checks in detail

combination of instruments

coolant temperature gauge

Under severe operating conditions, such as stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature can rise to approximately 248°F (120°C).

Do not start the engine when the coolant temperature is above 248°F (120°C). This can cause severe engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

trip counter

Make sure you are viewing the odometer screen (� page 134).

� If not displayed, press è or ÿ repeatedly until odometer appears.

� Press and hold the reset button on the instrument cluster (� page 22) until the trip odometer is reset.

Warning! GRAM

� Driving with an overheated engine can ignite some fluids that have leaked into the engine compartment. You may suffer severe burns.

� Steam from an overheated engine can cause severe burns and can occur when the hood is open. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.

Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle, and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

iIf the coolant temperature is too high, a warning is displayed on the multifunction display (� page 316).

133

checks in detail

combination of instruments

Speedometer

A red mark on the tachometer indicates engine overspeed.

To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is shut off if the engine is running within the red mark.

E 55 AMG

The tachometer on the E 55 AMG does not have a red mark to indicate engine overspeed.

To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is shut off if the engine is running too fast.

Outside temperature indicator

The outside temperature is displayed on the instrument panel (� page 22). To select the temperature display unit, Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit (°F), see "Selecting the Temperature Display Mode" (� page 146).

The temperature sensor is located in the area of the front bumper. Due to its location, the sensor may be affected by road or engine heat when idling or driving slowly. This means that the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by comparison with a thermometer placed next to the sensor, and not by comparison with external displays (e.g. bank tables, etc.).

When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (for example, when leaving the garage), you may notice a delay before the lowest temperature is displayed.

There is also a delay when the ambient temperature rises. This prevents inaccurate temperature readings caused by engine heat when idling or driving slowly.

!Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds as this may cause severe engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Warning! GRAM

The outside temperature indicator does not serve as an ice warning device and is therefore not suitable for this purpose.

Temperatures listed just above freezing do not guarantee that the road surface is ice-free. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

134

checks in detail

Control system

� Control system The control system is activated as soon as the SmartKey in the ignition switch is turned to position 1 or when the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* is in position 1. The control system enables:

� request information about your vehicle

� change vehicle settings.

For example, you can use the control system to know when to service your vehicle, set the language for messages on the instrument cluster display, and much more.

The control system sends information to the multifunction display.

multifunction display

1 Segment ring 2 Standard display 3 Trip meter

iThe screens of the audio systems (radio, CD player) will be displayed in English, regardless of the selected language.

Warning! GRAM

The driver's attention to the road and road conditions should always be the main focus when driving.

For your own safety and the safety of others, the driver should only select functions using the multifunction steering wheel when road and traffic conditions allow it.

Keep in mind that at only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h) the vehicle travels 44 feet (approximately 14 m) in one second.

135

checks in detail

Control system

Multifunctional steering wheel

You can use the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to control the information on the multifunction display and the settings in the control system (� page 134).

Pressing any button on the multifunction steering wheel will change the information displayed on the multifunction screen.

The information available on the multifunction display is divided into menus, each containing a series of functions or submenus.

The individual functions are then found in the appropriate menu (for example, radio or Audio CD). These functions are used to retrieve relevant information or to adjust the configuration of the vehicle.

1 Multifunction display on the speedometer

Operation of the control system

2 Select a submenu or adjust the volume

æ raise / increase

ç down / down

3 Phone*

s to answer the call

t to end the call

4 menu systems

è for the next menu

ÿ for the previous menu

5 Navigating the menu

j until the next display

k for the previous screen

136

checks in detail

Control system

It's helpful to think of the menus and functions in each menu as arranged in a circular pattern.

� Pressing the è or ÿ button repeatedly will cycle through each menu in turn.

� If you press the k or j button repeatedly, you will cycle through the function screens in the current menu in sequence.

In the Settings menu, instead of functions, you will find a series of submenus to access and change settings. For instructions on using these sub-menus, see "Setup Menu" (� page 144).

The number of menus available in the system depends on the optional equipment installed in the vehicle.

The menu is described on the following pages.

137

checks in detail

Control system

Menu Here's what you'll see as you scroll through the menu.

The table on the next page gives an overview of the individual menus.

138

checks in detail

Control system

Menus, submenus and functions

Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6 Menu 7 Menu 8

standard display

AUDIO NAV* Distronic* Fault memory

Settings Trip computer Telephone

Come on

Man

ds/s

umm

well-informed person

digital speedometer

select a radio station

Activate route guidance

Access Settings

Connection failure messages

Reset to factory settings

Fuel consumption statistics after starting

Upload phonebook

Call FSS PLUS

CD player support

Close the Tool submenu

Fuel consumption statistics since last reset

Search for a name in the phone book

Check tire pressure*

Time/Date submenu

range of connections

Check the engine oil level

lighting submenu

vehicles submenu

convenience submenu

Dynamic seat submenu*

139

checks in detail

Control system

Standard display menu

You can select functions in the standard screen menu with the k or j button.

The following features are available:

show digital speedometer

� Press the j button twice.

The current vehicle speed is shown on the multifunction display.

SOUND menu

The functions in the Audio menu support the audio equipment you currently have.

If no audio equipment is currently turned on, AUDIO OFF will appear on the screen.

The following features are available:

select a radio station

� Turn on the radio. See separate instruction manual.

� Press the è or ÿ button until the currently received station appears on the display.

1 Frequency band setting 2 Station frequency

� Press the k or j button until you find the station you want.

i The headings used in the menu table are intended to facilitate navigation through the system and are not necessarily the same as those displayed on the screens of the control system.

The first function displayed in each menu will automatically show you where you are in the system.

function page

Call digital speedometer 139

Call FSS PLUS 299

Check tire pressure* 293

Check engine oil level 285

function page

Select radio station 139

Select a satellite radio station* 140

CD 140 player support

140

checks in detail

Control system

Select a satellite radio station*

Satellite radio is treated as a radio application.

� Select the SAT radio using the corresponding softkey in the radio menu.

1 SAT mode and preset number 2 Station selection setting with

memory3 Channel name or number

� Press the k or j button until you find the desired channel.

CD player support

� Turn on the radio and select the CD player. See separate instruction manual.

� Press the è or ÿ button until the settings for the CD currently playing appear in the display.

1 Current CD (for CD changer*) 2 Current track

� Press the k or j button until the desired track is selected.

iNew stations can only be stored using the corresponding function on the radio, see separate user manual.

The radio can also be operated normally.

The iFeature description is based on preliminary information available at the time of printing.

Use of satellite radio requires additional optional satellite radio equipment and a subscription to a satellite radio service provider. At the time of going to press, no date has been established for the availability of optional equipment necessary for the operation of the satellite radio. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details and availability of your vehicle.

For more information, see the separate COMAND manual.

iTo select a CD from the magazine, press the number on the COMAND SmartKey located in the center console.

141

checks in detail

Control system

navigation menu*

The Nav menu contains the functions necessary to operate the navigation system.

� Press the è or ÿ button until Nav appears on the screen.

� If the navigation system is turned off, the message Navigation Off is displayed on the screen.

� If the navigation system is turned on, Nav Active is displayed on the screen.

For instructions on activating the route guidance system, see the COMAND manual.

distribution menu*

Use the Distronic menu to view the current Distronic settings. The information displayed on the screen depends on whether the Distronic system is active or inactive.

Refer to the "Drive Systems" section of this manual (� page 218) for instructions on how to activate Distronic.

� Press the è or ÿ button until one of the following two images appears on the screen.

disabled dystronic

When Distronic is disabled, you will see the standard screen on the screen.

1 Vehicle ahead if detected 2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead 3 Preset threshold for vehicle distance

In front4 Your vehicle5 Distance warning symbol on

function

142

checks in detail

Control system

dystronic activated

When Distronic is on, Distronic and the set speed are shown on the screen.

1 Dystronic activated

Fault memory menu

Use the fault memory menu to scan for fault messages and warnings that may be stored in the system. The information displayed on the screen depends on whether there is actually a fault.

� Press the è or ÿ key repeatedly until the fault message memory appears on the display.

No error messages

If there are no failures, the screen will show: No failure

Faults have occurred

If there were failures, you will see the number of failures on the screen:

Warning! GRAM

Fault messages and warnings are only displayed on certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. Fault messages and warnings are merely reminders regarding the operation of certain systems and do not relieve the owner and/or driver of their responsibility to maintain the safe operation of the vehicle by performing all required safety checks and vehicle maintenance. the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop to rectify faults and warning messages (� page 321).

143

checks in detail

Control system

� Press the k or j button.

Stored messages will now be displayed in order. See the "Tips" section for warnings and error messages (� page 321).

If any faults occur while driving, the number of faults will reappear on the screen when the SmartKey is turned to 0 or removed from the switch.

settings menu

There are two functions in the Settings menu:

� Reset function: press the reset button for 3 seconds, which will restore all settings to the original factory settings.

� A set of sub-menus through which individual vehicle settings can be made.

� Press the è or ÿ button until the Settings menu appears on the screen.

Reset all settings

You can reset all functions in all submenus to factory settings.

� Press the reset button on the dashboard (� page 22) for approximately three seconds.

The screen will ask you to press the reset button again to confirm.

� Press the reset button again.

All sub-menu functions will be reset to factory settings.

iThe message memory will be cleared when the SmartKey is turned to position 1 or 2. Only high priority faults will then be visible. They are highlighted with a red background (� page 321).

i Changes to the settings will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing the reset button a second time.

144

checks in detail

Control system

A submenu in the Settings menu

� Press the k or j button.

You will see a set of submenus on the screen.

� Press the ç button.

The checkmark goes to the next submenu.

The submenus are arranged in a hierarchy. Scroll down with ç, scroll up with æ.

Use the k or j button to navigate through the submenu to access each function.

The adjustments themselves are made with the æ or ç button.

Resetting submenu functions

For each submenu, you can reset all functions to factory settings.

� Go to the function in the submenu.

� Press the reset button (� page 22) on the instrument cluster for approximately three seconds.

The screen will ask you to press the reset button again to confirm.

� Press the reset button again.

All submenu functions will be reset to factory settings.

145

checks in detail

Control system

The table below shows which settings can be changed in the different menus. Detailed instructions on how to make each setting are provided on the following pages.

INSTRUMENT Cluster TIME/DATE LIGHTING VEHICLE COMFORT DYNAMIC SEAT*

Select the temperature display mode

synchronization time

Set daytime running lights mode (US only)

set auto lock

Activate Easy Entry/Exit

Adjustment level of the dynamic driver's seat

Select the speedometer display mode

Set time (hours) Set tracker light Tailgate opening height limit*

Set SmartKey dependency

Passenger dynamic seat adjustment level

Select language Set time (minutes) Mood lighting Set parking position for outside rear view mirror

Select the display method (display of speed or outside temperature) for the status line

Set date (month) Delayed shutdown of exterior lights

Select the display (speed gauge or outside temperature gauge) for the primary screen

Set date (day) Delayed switch-off of interior lighting

Tire Pressure Units Screen*

Set date (year)

146

checks in detail

Control system

Instrument cluster submenu

Access the cluster submenu instructions through the Settings menu. Use the Cluster Submenu Instructions to change the instrument cluster display settings. The following features are available:

Temperature display mode selection

� Use the æ or ç button to move the check mark to Instr. cluster submenu.

� Press the j or k button until the screen shows: Temp. indicator.

The check mark is on the current configuration.

� Press æ or ç to set the temperature unit to Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit (°F).

Select the speedometer display mode

� Use the æ or ç button to move the check mark to Instr. cluster submenu.

� Press the j or k button until the following message appears on the screen: Speedometer/Odometer Display Unit.

The check mark is on the current configuration.

� Press æ or ç to set the speedometer unit to km or miles.

function page

Select the temperature display mode

146

Select the speedometer display mode

146

Select language 147

Select the display (speed display or outdoor temperature display) for status display

147

Select the display (speed gauge or outside temperature gauge) for the primary screen

148

Tire pressure indicator* 148

147

checks in detail

Control system

language selection

� Use the æ or ç button to move the check mark to Instr. cluster submenu.

� Press the j or k button until Language appears on the screen.

The check mark is on the current configuration.

� Press æ or ç to select the language for the multifunction display.

Available languages:

German

English

French

it's Italian

Spanish

Selection of display (speed indicator or outdoor temperature display) for status display

� Use the æ or ç button to move the check mark to Instr. cluster submenu.

� Press the j or k button until the following message appears on the screen: Status Line Display.

The check mark is on the current configuration.

� Press æ or ç to select the Fahrenheit (°F) or Miles status line.

iYou will see the status indicator when you go to a screen other than the standard screen.

148

checks in detail

Control system

Selection of the display (speed indicator or outside temperature display) for the primary display

� Use the æ or ç button to move the check mark to Instr. cluster submenu.

� Press the j or k button until the following message appears on the screen: Basic screen.

The check mark is on the current configuration.

� Press ć or ç to select a screen that is permanently shown on the multifunction display.

Tire Pressure Gauge*

Use this feature to set the device to display tire pressure.

� Move the checkmark with æ or ç to the Instr, cluster submenu.

� Press the j or k button until the following message appears on the screen: Display unit Tire pressure.

The check mark is on the current configuration.

� Press æ or ç to select the desired tire pressure unit.

Time/Date submenu

Access the Time/Date submenu through the Settings menu. Use the Time/Date submenu to change the time and date display settings. The following features are available:

function page

Time synchronization 149

Set time (hours) 149

Set time (minutes) 149

Set date (month) 150

Set date (day) 150

Set date (year) 150

iFor more information on setting the time, see the separate COMAND manual.

149

checks in detail

Control system

synchronization time

This function is only available on vehicles with COMAND and navigation module*.

� Use the æ or ç button to move the checkmark to the Time/Date submenu.

� Press the j or k button until the screen shows: Time Sync. with the main unit.

The check mark is on the current configuration.

� Press æ or ç to select the desired setting.

Set time (hours)

This feature is only visible when time synchronization is turned off.

� Use the æ or ç button to move the checkmark to the Time/Date submenu.

� Press the j or k button until the following message appears on the screen: Clock, hours.

The check mark is on the time setting.

� Press æ or ç to set the hour.

� Confirm by pressing the reset button.

Set time (minutes)

This feature is only visible when time synchronization is turned off.

� Use the æ or ç button to move the checkmark to the Time/Date submenu.

� Press the j or k button until the following message appears on the screen: Clock, Minutes.

The check mark is on the minute setting.

� Press æ or ç to set the minutes.

� Confirm by pressing the reset button.

150

checks in detail

Control system

Set date (month)

� Use the æ or ç button to move the checkmark to the Time/Date submenu.

� Press the j or k button until the following message appears on the screen: Set the month of the date.

The check mark is in the month setting.

� Press æ or ç to set the month.

Set date (day)

� Use the æ or ç button to move the checkmark to the Time/Date submenu.

� Press the j or k button until the screen shows: Set date, day.

The check mark is on the day setting.

� Press æ or ç to set the day.

Set date (year)

� Use the æ or ç button to move the checkmark to the Time/Date submenu.

� Press the j or k button until the screen shows: Set date and year.

The check mark is in the year setting.

� Press æ or ç to set the year.

151

checks in detail

Control system

lighting submenu

Access to the Lighting submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Lighting submenu to change the vehicle's lighting and lamp settings. The following features are available:

Setting the Daytime Running Lights Mode (US Only)

� Use the æ or ç button to move the checkmark to the Lighting submenu.

� Press the j or k button until the display shows Headlight Circuit.

The check mark is on the current configuration.

� Press æ or ç to select manual mode or daytime running lights (fixed). This feature is not available in countries that require daytime running lights.

When the daytime running light mode is selected and the exterior light switch is in the 0 position, the following lights will come on automatically when the engine is started:

� Parking lights and dipped lights

� License plate light (in low ambient light conditions)

function page

Set daytime running lights mode (US only)

151

Setting the Locator Lighting 152

Ambient light level 152

Delayed switching off of exterior lights 153

Delayed switch-off of interior lighting 154

iIf you move the exterior light switch to a different position, the corresponding lights will come on.

For safety reasons, restoring the Lighting submenu (� page 143) to factory settings while driving will not reset the daytime running lights mode.

The display will show: Lighting: Unable to fully reset to factory settings while driving.

152

checks in detail

Control system

Tracker lighting settings

In the dark, the following lights turn on when the exterior light switch is in the U position, the tracker light function is on, and the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey:

Parking lights

Rear lights

� License plate light

� Front fog lights

The locator light turns off when the driver's door is opened. It turns off automatically after about 40 seconds.

� Use the æ or ç button to move the checkmark to the Lighting submenu.

� Press the j or k button until Ambient Light Function appears on the screen.

The check mark is on the current configuration.

� Press æ or ç to select the desired setting.

The tracker backlight will turn on or off.

Ambient light level

With this function, you can adjust the brightness of the ambient light.

� Use the æ or ç button to move the checkmark to the Lighting submenu.

� Press the j or k button until Ambient Light Level appears on the screen.

The check mark is on the current configuration.

� Press æ or ç to select backlight brightness. 1 is the darkest setting and 5 is the lightest setting.

Ambient lighting is disabled when set to 0.

153

checks in detail

Control system

Setting the night security lighting (delayed shutdown of external lamps)

Use the headlight off delay feature to set whether the exterior lights turn on in the dark and for how long after all doors are closed. When the delayed shutdown feature is enabled and the exterior light switch is in the U position before the engine is turned off, the following lights will remain on when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition switch or, when using a KEYLESS-GO*, the driver's door is opened:

Parking lights

Rear lights

� License plate light

� Front fog lights

� Use the æ or ç button to move the checkmark to the Lighting submenu.

� Press the j or k button until the message: Delayed headlights off appears on the screen.

The check mark is on the current configuration.

� Press æ or ç to select the desired lamp-on period.

You can choose:

� 0 s, the delayed shutdown function is disabled.

� 15 s, 30 s, 45 s or 60 s the delayed shutdown function is activated.

� Before turning off the engine, turn the exterior light switch to the U position.

You can temporarily disable the delayed shutdown feature:

� Before leaving the vehicle, turn the SmartKey in the ignition to the 0 position.

� Then turn the SmartKey in the ignition switch to position 2 and back to position 0.

Delayed shutdown is disabled. It will turn back on as soon as you put the SmartKey back in the ignition.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:

� Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the shift lever (� page 33).

i You can reactivate this function within ten minutes by opening the door.

After removing the SmartKey, if you do not open the door, the lights will turn off automatically after 60 seconds.

154

checks in detail

Control system

Delayed switching off of the interior lighting

Use this feature to set if and how long the interior lights stay on in the dark after the SmartKey has been removed from the ignition switch.

� Use the æ or ç button to move the checkmark to the Lighting submenu.

� Press the j or k button until the screen shows: Delayed interior light off.

The check mark is on the current configuration.

� Press æ or ç to select the desired lamp on time period. You can choose:

� 0 s, the delayed shutdown function is disabled.

� 5 s, 10 s, 15 s or 20 s the delayed shutdown function is activated.

vehicles submenu

Access the Vehicle submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu to enter general vehicle settings. The following features are available:

Auto lock settings

This function is used to activate and deactivate the automatic central locking. With auto central locking engaged, the vehicle is centrally locked at a vehicle speed of approximately 15 km/h (9 mph).

� Use the æ or ç button to move the checkmark to the Vehicle submenu.

� Press the j or k button until Auto Door Lock appears on the screen.

The check mark is on the current configuration.

� Press æ or ç to enable or disable auto door lock.

function page

Set auto lock 154

Tailgate opening height limitation*

155

checks in detail

Control system

Tailgate opening height limitation*

Use this function to enable or disable the tailgate opening height limitation.

� Use the æ or ç button to move the checkmark to the Vehicle submenu.

� Press the j or k button until the message: Tailgate opening limiter appears on the screen.

The check mark is on the current configuration.

� Press æ or ç to activate or deactivate the tailgate opening limiter.

convenience submenu

Access to the Convenience submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Convenience submenu to change settings for a range of convenient features. The following features are available:

Enabling Easy Entry/Exit*

This function is used to enable or disable the Easy Entry/Exit function. When the feature is on, the steering wheel and driver's seat will move backwards to make getting out easier

� remove the SmartKey from the ignition

open the driver's door

However, the engine must be turned off.

When you enter the vehicle, the steering wheel and seat will move to the position stored in the memory when

the driver's door is closed

� put the SmartKey in the ignition or press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button*

function page

Enabling Easy Entry/Exit 155

Set SmartKey dependency 156

Set the parking position for the outside rearview mirror

157

Warning! GRAM

Make sure that no one is caught or injured by the moving steering wheel and driver's seat when easy in/out is enabled and the driver's door is open or the smart key is removed from the ignition switch. .

Do not leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children may open the driver's door and accidentally activate the easy entry/exit function, which may result in an accident and/or injury.

156

checks in detail

Control system

� Use the æ or ç button to move the checkmark to the Comfort submenu.

� Press the j or k button until the following message appears on the screen: Function Easy Input Function.

The check mark is on the current configuration.

� Press æ or ç to change the Easy Entry/Exit setting.

The following settings are available for Easy Entry/Exit

Configuration of SmartKey dependencies

This feature is used to select whether memory settings for seats, steering wheel, mirrors, and other steering system settings are saved separately for each SmartKey (� page 94).

� Use the æ or ç button to move the checkmark to the Comfort submenu.

� Press the j or k button until the following message appears on the screen: Depends on the key.

The check mark is on the current configuration.

� Press æ or ç to enable or disable SmartKey dependency.

iTo cancel seat/steering wheel movement, do one of the following:

� Press the seat adjustment switch (� page 35).

� Move the steering column lever (� page 37).

Press the memory button (page 122).

off Easy Entry/Exit is disabled

Steering column Only the steering column moves.

Steering column + seat

Both the steering column and the seat move.

157

checks in detail

Control system

Outside rear view mirror parking position adjustment

Use the park assist mirror adjustment function to select whether or not the passenger's side exterior rearview mirror should flip down during parking maneuvers when reverse gear R is engaged. For more information, see "Parking the exterior mirrors" (� page 172) ).

� Move the checkmark to the Comfort submenu with the æ or ç button.

� Press the j or k button until the following message appears on the screen: Adjusting the parking assist mirrors.

The check mark is on the current configuration.

� Press æ or ç to enable or disable the function.

Dynamic seat submenu*

Access the Dynamic Seat submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Dynamic Seating submenu to change settings for dynamic seats. The following features are available:

Dynamic seat adjustment

The dynamic seat adjustment function allows you to determine how the seat is adjusted while driving.

� Use the æ or ç button to move the checkmark to the Dynamic Seat submenu.

� Press the j or k button until the screen shows: Dyn. multi-cont. Driver's seat behind the driver's seat or Dyn. multi-cont. sit down brother approve. for the passenger seat.

The check mark is on the current configuration.

� Press æ or ç to change the Level 1 or Level 2 function.

function page

Driver seat adjustment 157

Passenger seat adjustment 157

158

checks in detail

Control system

on-board computer menu

Use the on-board computer menu to check your vehicle's statistics. The following information is available:

Fuel consumption statistics after starting

� Press the ÿ or è button repeatedly until the first function appears in the Trip computer menu.

� Press the j or k button until the following message appears on the left screen: After startup.

1 Distance traveled since start 2 Elapsed time since start 3 Average speed since start 4 Average fuel consumption since start

Fuel consumption since last reset

� Press the ÿ or è button repeatedly until the first function appears in the Trip computer menu.

� Press the j or k button until the following message appears on the screen: After reboot.

1 Distance traveled since last reset 2 Elapsed time since last reset 3 Average speed since last reset 4 Average fuel consumption since last reset

to the place

function page

Fuel consumption statistics after starting

158

Fuel consumption statistics since last reset

158

Call Range (Distance to Empty) 159iAll stats recorded since the last engine start will be reset approximately four hours after the SmartKey is turned to 0 or removed from the switch.

Reset will not occur if you turn the SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 during this time.

159

checks in detail

Control system

Resetting fuel consumption statistics

� Press the ÿ or è button repeatedly until the first function appears in the Trip computer menu.

� Press the j or k button until the display shows the reading you want to reset.

� Press and hold the reset button on the instrument cluster (� page 22) until the value is reset to 0.

Call range (distant to cancel)

� Press the ÿ or è button repeatedly until the first function appears in the Trip computer menu.

� Press the j or k button until the following message appears on the screen: Range:

On the screen you will see the calculated range based on the current fuel level in the tank.

PHONE* menu

You can use the functions in the TEL menu to operate your telephone as long as it is connected to the hands-free kit and switched on.

� Turn on the phone and command COMMAND.

� Repeatedly press the ÿ or è button on the steering wheel until the Tel menu appears on the screen.

Warning! GRAM

The driver's attention on the road should always be the main focus when driving. For your own safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you stop in a safe place and stop before making or answering a phone call. If you choose to use your phone while driving, use a hands-free kit and only use your phone when weather, road and traffic conditions permit.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving.

Keep in mind that at only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h) the vehicle travels 44 feet (approximately 14 m) in one second.

Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. not connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle when the engine is running. This may cause the vehicle's electronic system to fail, resulting in an accident and/or personal injury.

160

checks in detail

Control system

The messages that appear in the display field depend on whether the phone is switched on or off:

� If the phone is switched off, the message PHONE OFF appears on the multifunction screen.

� If the phone is turned on:

The phone will then search for a network. During this time the screen is blank.

As soon as the phone finds a network, READY appears on the screen.

This waiting message indicates that the phone is ready for use and can be operated by the control system.

Answer the phone

When the phone is ready to answer calls, you can answer the call at any time. You will see the following message on the screen:

� Press the s button.

You answered the call. The duration of the call is displayed on the screen.

end the call

� Press the t button.

You have ended the connection. The pending message will reappear on the screen.

Select a number from the phone book

If the phone is ready to receive calls, you can dial and select a number from the phone book at any time.

� Press the ÿ or è key until the Tel menu appears on the screen.

� Press the j or k button.

The control system reads the phone book stored in the phone. This may take up to 30 seconds. You will see the message Please wait on the screen.

When the message Please wait disappears, the phonebook has been loaded.

iIf you do not want to answer the call, press t.

161

checks in detail

Control system

� Press the j or k button until the desired name appears on the screen.

Stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order.

� Press the s button.

The system dials the selected phone number.

� If the call is successful, the name of the person you are calling and the duration of the call will appear on the screen.

� If the call fails, the control system will store the dialed number in the redial memory.

rellamada

The control system stores the last dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the need to search through the entire phone book.

� Press the ÿ or è key until the Tel menu appears on the screen.

� Press the s button.

The display shows the first number in the redial memory.

� Press the j or k button until the desired name appears on the screen.

� Press the s button.

The control system dials the selected telephone number.

iIf you hold down the j or k button for more than one second, the system will quickly scroll through the name list until you release the button again.

Cancel quick search mode by pressing t.

162

checks in detail

Automatic gearbox

� Automatic transmission For information on driving with the automatic transmission, see "Getting Started" (� page 43).

Your vehicle's transmission adapts the shifting process to your individual driving style by continuously adjusting the shift points up or down. These shift point adjustments are made based on current operating and driving conditions.

If operating conditions change, the automatic transmission responds by adjusting the shift schedule.

The automatic transmission automatically selects individual gears depending on:

� position D of the shift lever with gear ranges (� page 164)

selected shift program (C/S) (page 168)

(C/S/M) (E 55 AMG only) ( page 169)

� accelerator pedal position (� page 168)

vehicle speed

The current position of the shift lever and the shift program (C/S) or (C/S/M) appear on the multifunction display (� page 134).

An additional indication of the current position of the gear lever is located on the cover of the gearbox door. The indicators turn on when the switch is activated (for example, when unlocking the vehicle or opening a door) and turn off after approximately 15 minutes.

When the shift lever is in position D, gear shifting may be affected:

� limitation of the range of translations

� manual shifting

During short warm-up, upshifts are delayed. This allows the catalyst to heat up to operating temperature faster.

Warning! GRAM

163

checks in detail

Automatic gearbox

One-touch shifting

Even with an automatic transmission, you can shift gears manually when the shift lever is in position D.

downshift

� Briefly press the shift lever to the left in direction D.

The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear. This operation also limits the gear ratio range (� page 164).

upshift

� Briefly move the shift lever to the right in the direction of D+.

The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear according to the shift schedule. This action also increases the gear ratio range.

Gear range limitation cancel

� Press and hold the shift lever towards D+ until D reappears on the multifunction display.

The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D.

Switch to the optimal gear range

� Press and hold the shift lever in the direction of D.

The transmission will automatically select the appropriate gear range for optimal acceleration and deceleration. This involves downshifting one or more gears.

Warning! GRAM

On slippery surfaces, never downshift to brake. This can cause the drive wheels to slip and reduce vehicle control. Your vehicle's ABS system will not prevent this type of loss of control.

iTo avoid over-revving the engine when the shift lever is moved to D, the transmission will not downshift if the engine is running at full speed. The speed would be exceeded.

164

checks in detail

Automatic gearbox

gear ranges

When the shift lever is in position D, you can limit the transmission speed range by moving the shift lever to the left (D-) and reverse the speed range limitation by moving the shift lever to the right (D+).

The selected gear range appears in the multifunction display. If you press the accelerator pedal when the engine reaches the RPM limit, the transmission shifts up beyond the selected speed limit.

Effect

ï Transmission only shifts to 6th gear (only applies to vehicles with 7-speed automatic transmission).

î Transmission shifts to fifth gear only (only applies to vehicles with 7-speed automatic transmission).

é Transmission shifts to fourth gear only.

è The gearbox only shifts to third gear.

With this selection you can take advantage of the engine braking effect.

Effect

ç The gearbox only shifts to second gear.

Allows you to use engine braking while driving:

� on steep descents

� in mountainous regions

� in extreme working conditions

æ Transmission works only in first gear.

Make the most of the engine braking effect on very steep or long slopes.

165

checks in detail

Automatic gearbox

Gear lever position

Effect

ì Parking position

The position of the shift lever when the vehicle is parked. Move the shift lever to P only when the vehicle is stationary. Park does not serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked. Instead, the driver should always apply the parking brake, except when moving the shift lever to P, to protect the vehicle.

Effect

The SmartKey can only be removed from the ignition switch when the shift lever is in the P position. When the SmartKey is removed, the shift lever is locked in the P position.

If the vehicle's electrical system is not working properly, the shift lever may become stuck in the P position (� page 363).

in reverse order

Place the shift lever in the R position only when the vehicle is stationary.

Effect

Neutral

Power is not transferred from the engine to the drive axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can move freely (push or tow).

To avoid transmission damage, never engage N while driving.

If the ESP system is disabled or malfunctioning: Move the shift lever to N only when the vehicle is about to skid, such as on icy roads.

will strengthen

The transmission changes gears automatically. All forward gears are available.

166

checks in detail

Automatic gearbox

Gearshift control on the steering wheel (Speedshift) E 55 AMG

Gears can be shifted manually using the steering wheel or the shift lever (� page 163).

Allow the engine to warm up with a light load. Do not place a full load on the engine until it reaches operating temperature. Reverse gear should only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary.

!Coursing the vehicle or driving the vehicle for any other reason with the shift lever in the N position may cause transmission damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Warning! GRAM

It is dangerous to leave the vehicle with the shift lever not fully in the P position. In addition, the P position itself is neither intended nor intended to prevent the vehicle from moving, which could result in striking people or objects.

In addition to shifting into P (� page 51), always apply the parking brake.

When parking on a slope, turn the front wheels toward the curb.

Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay, or leaves can come into contact with a hot exhaust system, as these materials may ignite and cause a vehicle fire.

Warning! GRAM

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition, carry it with the KEYLESS-GO* and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children can move the shift lever out of the P position, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury.

!Avoid turning the drive wheel for a long time when driving on slippery roads. This can cause serious damage to the powertrain that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

167

checks in detail

Automatic gearbox

The steering wheel shift buttons are located to the left and right of the steering wheel.

1 Left button: downshift 2 Right button: upshift

downshift

� Press button 1 on the left side of the steering wheel.

The gear range is limited when you are not driving in manual programming mode (� page 164).

When driving in manual programming mode (� page 169), the transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear (� page 170).

upshift

� Press button 2 on the right side of the steering wheel.

The gear range is extended when you are not driving in manual programming mode (� page 164).

When driving in manual programming mode (� page 169), the transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear (� page 170).

Warning! GRAM

On slippery surfaces, never downshift to brake. This can cause the drive wheels to slip and reduce vehicle control. Your vehicle's ABS system will not prevent this type of loss of control.

iYou cannot shift gears with the shift buttons on the steering wheel when the shift lever is in the P, N, or R position.

168

checks in detail

Automatic gearbox

programming mode selection switch

The programming mode selection switch is located at the bottom of the center console.

1 Programming mode switch

S Sport For standard driving

C Comfort A comfortable ride

� Press the programming mode selection button 1 repeatedly until the letter of the desired program change appears on the multifunction display (� page 134).

Choose C for a comfortable ride:

� The vehicle starts in second gear (both forward and reverse) for smoother starting. This does not apply when full throttle is pressed or 1st gear is selected.

� Improved traction and driving stability on icy roads.

� Shifts up faster, even if you give it more gas. The engine then runs at a lower RPM and wheel spin is less likely.

� The power ratio for the R position of the shift lever changes depending on the selected program mode (S or C).

throttle position

Your driving style affects gear shifting:

Smaller throttle Shifts up earlier

More acceleration Rear gear up

shoot down

Use kickdown when you want maximum acceleration.

� Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance.

The gearbox downshifts.

� When you reach the desired speed, gently press the accelerator pedal.

The gearbox changes gears again. Never change the program mode when the shift lever is out of the P position. This may cause a change in driveability that you may not be prepared for.

169

checks in detail

Automatic gearbox

E 55 AMG manual transmission program

In manual program shift mode, you can shift gears manually (� page 166) on the steering wheel or with the shift lever (� page 163).

Allow the engine to warm up with a light load. Do not place a full load on the engine until it reaches operating temperature. Reverse gear should only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary.

programming mode selection switch

The programming mode selection switch is located at the bottom of the center console.

1 Programming mode switch

S Sport For standard driving

C Comfort A comfortable ride

M Manual For manual shifting

The selected shift program (C/S/M) is shown on the multifunction display (� page 134).

Manual transmission program activation

� Press the programming mode selector switch 1 until M appears on the multifunction display for manual program change.

Programming mode changes to manual programming mode M. Autochange is deactivated. Gear range is not limited.

Gears can be shifted manually when the shift lever is in position D. You can shift up or down in sequence.

The current position of the shift lever and the selected shift program (C/S/M) are displayed on the multifunction display (� page 134).

!Avoid turning the drive wheel for a long time when driving on slippery roads. This can cause serious damage to the powertrain that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

170

checks in detail

Automatic gearbox

downshift

� Briefly push the shift lever to the left in direction D (� page 163).

� Press button 1 on the left side of the steering wheel (� page 166).

The gearbox shifts to the next lower gear.

upshift

� Briefly press the shift lever to the right in the direction of D+ (� page 163).

� Press button 2 on the right side of the steering wheel (� page 166).

The gearbox shifts to the next higher gear.

shoot down

Kickdown can also be used to fully open the throttle while driving in manual program mode.

� Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance.

The gearbox downshifts.

� Shift up a gear when you reach the desired speed.

Warning! GRAM

On slippery surfaces, never downshift to brake. This can cause the drive wheels to slip and reduce vehicle control. Your vehicle's ABS system will not prevent this type of loss of control.

While driving at full speed, the transmission shifts to the next higher gear when full engine speed is reached.

When you brake or stop, the transmission shifts to a gear from which you can easily accelerate or take off.

171

checks in detail

Automatic gearbox

Manual transmission program deactivation

� Press the programming mode select switch until S or C appears on the multifunction display.

� Restart the engine.

The transmission will enter the last selected automatic shift program mode (S or C).

Program mode M is not saved.

Emergency Operation (Safe Mode)

If the acceleration of the vehicle deteriorates or the transmission does not shift, the transmission is most likely in limp mode (luck operation). Only second gear and reverse gear can be engaged in this mode.

� Stop the vehicle.

� Move the shift lever to the P position.

� Turn off the engine.

� Wait at least ten seconds before restarting.

� Restart the engine.

� Move the shift lever to D (second gear) or R.

� Have the gearbox checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz service center as soon as possible.

i The most recently selected Auto Program Mode (S or C) reactivates when the engine is restarted in Auto Program Mode.

172

checks in detail

good visibility

� Good visibility For windshield wipers (� page 47) and rearview mirror adjustment (� page 37), see "Getting Started".

Rearview mirror

Automatic rearview mirror with anti-glare coating

Glare from the driver's side exterior rearview mirror and interior rearview mirror will automatically respond to glare when:

the ignition is on and

� The light from the headlights hits the sensor in the interior rearview mirror

The rearview mirror will not respond if

reverse gear is engaged

� the interior light is on

Warning! GRAM

The automatic dimming function does not work unless the incoming light is directed directly at the sensors in the interior rearview mirror.

The interior and exterior mirrors on the driver's side do not react, for example, when the sun visor on the rear window is raised.

The glare can be dangerous to you and others.

Warning! GRAM

In the event of an accident, liquid electrolyte may leak from the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks.

Warning! GRAM

! Electrolyte droplets that come into contact with the paintwork of the vehicle can only be completely removed in the liquid state with plenty of water.

173

checks in detail

good visibility

Activation of the park position of the exterior mirror

Follow the steps below to activate the park mirror position so that the passenger side outside rearview mirror rotates down to its stored position.

� Make sure you have recorded the parking position for the passenger side door mirror (� page 123).

� Make sure the Parking assist mirror adjustment function in the Control system comfort submenu is turned on (� page 157).

� Turn on the ignition (if not already on).

� Press button 2 on the exterior mirror on the passenger side.

� Place the shift lever in reverse R.

The passenger side outside rear view mirror will flip down to the folded position.

1 Button for the exterior rearview mirror on the driver's side

2 Passenger side exterior rear view mirror button

The outside rearview mirror returns to the previously stored driving position:

� ten seconds after moving the shift lever out of R

� immediately after the vehicle exceeds a speed of approximately 10 km/h

� immediately after pressing button 1 on the driver's side mirror.

Sprinkler

For windshield wipers, see "Getting Started" (� page 47).

The rain sensor automatically controls the operation of the wipers depending on how wet the windshield is.

� Switch on the ignition.

� Set the wiper switch to position I (� page 48).

After the initial cleaning, the rain sensor automatically controls the intervals between cleanings.

iIntermittent wiping stops when the vehicle is stopped and the front door is opened.

174

checks in detail

good visibility

Headlight cleaning system*

The button is on the left side of the board.

1 Headlight washer button

� Switch on the ignition.

� Press button 1.

The headlights are cleaned with a high-pressure water jet.

To fill the windshield washer reservoir, refer to the "Maintenance" section (� page 289).

sun visors

Sun visors protect against the glare of the sun while driving.

� Lower the sun visors when you notice glare.

Warning! GRAM

Do not use a cosmetic mirror while driving.

When the vehicle is in motion, the mirrors in the sun visors should be closed. Reflected glare can be dangerous to you and others.

175

checks in detail

good visibility

1 Sun visor 2 Mount

� Slide the sun visor 1 down when you notice glare.

1 Sun visor 2 Mirror cover 3 Mirror lamp 4 Cosmetic mirror

� Make sure the sun visor is properly attached to the holder.

� Lift the mirror cover to access the mirror.

Lamp 3 lights up.

1 Mount 2 Additional sun visor*3 Sun visor

If sunlight comes in through a side window:

� Detach the sun visor from the holder 1.

� Fold the sun visor to the side.

Umbrellas are unfolded.

� Adjust the sun visors by pushing or pulling in the direction of the arrows.

176

checks in detail

good visibility

Rear window sunshade*

The switch is located on the center console.

� Switch on the ignition.

� Briefly press the switch to 1 to raise the sun visor.

� Briefly press the switch in step 1 to lower the sun visor.

Always raise the sun visor fully to rest against the window frame.

Blind* in the rear doors

� Pull out the blind using the hooks.

� Fasten the hooks at the top.

iIf sunlight enters through the side window, detach the sun visor from the holder 1 and turn it sideways.

The mirror light 3 will switch off.

Warning! GRAM

When operating the rear window sun visor, make sure that no one is endangered by raising or lowering it.

The lifting or lowering procedure can be stopped immediately by briefly pressing switch 1. To change the direction of movement, press switch 1 again.

Warning! GRAM

!Always guide the blind manually. Do not let it bounce back as this may damage the retractor.

177

checks in detail

good visibility

Rear window

The rear window defroster uses a lot of energy. To minimize battery wear, turn off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clean. The defroster turns off automatically after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of operation, depending on the outdoor temperature.

activation

� Press the F button on the air conditioning panel (� page 177) or the auto air conditioning panel (� page 180).

The button indicator light will come on.

Deactivate

� Press the F button again.

The button light goes out.

Warning! GRAM

Remove accumulated snow and ice from the rear window before driving. Otherwise, visibility may deteriorate, endangering you and others.

!If the rear window defroster turns off too quickly and the indicator light starts flashing, too many power consumers are operating simultaneously and the battery voltage is low. The system responds automatically by deactivating the rear window defroster.

As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the rear window defroster will turn on automatically.

178

checks in detail

Climate control

� Air conditioning

179

checks in detail

Climate control

rear vents

The storage compartment between the front seats can be ventilated, if equipped (� page 247).

1 air conditioning control panel

2 Air volume adjustment knob for the left center air outlet

3 Left central air outlet, adjustable

4 Central air outlet, fixed

5 Right center air outlet, adjustable

6 Air volume adjustment knob for the right center air outlet

7 Air volume adjustment knob for adding cool air

8 Air volume adjustment knob for side air outlet

9 Side defogger inlet, fixed

a Side air outlet, adjustable

iFor draught-free ventilation, move the sliders for the middle vents 3 and 5 to the middle position.

1 Left rear central air outlet, adjustable

2 Right rear central air outlet, adjustable

3 Air volume adjustment knob for the right rear center air outlet

4 Left rear center air outlet adjustment knob

180

checks in detail

Climate control

1 Temperature control on the left

2 windshield defrosters

3 Increase the amount of air

4 Air distribution

5 Rear window defroster

6 Temperature adjustment on the right

7 Residual heat/ventilation

8 AC cooling on/off (ACOFF)

9 Air distribution screen

Air conditioning on/off

b Air volume display

c Reduce the amount of air

d Air recirculation

e Air distribution and air volume (automatic, manual)

181

checks in detail

Climate control

The air conditioning works whenever the engine is running. The air conditioning can be operated in automatic or manual mode. The system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected indoor temperature and the current outdoor temperature.

Almost all dust particles, pollutants and odors are filtered before outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment through the air distribution system.

The air conditioner will not turn on (not cool) when ACOFF mode is selected (� page 186).

Warning! GRAM

When the automatic air conditioning is operating, the air entering the passenger compartment through the footwell vents can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate vicinity of the ventilation openings. Always keep a sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the ventilation openings in the footwell. If necessary, adjust the airflow using the air distribution controls (� page 180) to direct the air away from the footwell vents.

Warning! GRAM

Follow the recommended heating and cooling settings on the following pages. Otherwise, the windows may mist up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others.

i Severe conditions (e.g. heavy air pollution) may require filter replacement ahead of schedule. A clogged filter will reduce the volume of air inside.

If the interior of the vehicle is hot, ventilate it before driving.

Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield clear of snow and debris.

Do not block the air flow by placing objects in the air outlet slots under the rear window.

182

checks in detail

Climate control

temperature setting

Use temperature controls 1 and 6 to adjust the air temperature on each side of the cabin separately. The set temperature should be increased or decreased in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).

Development

� Turn the temperature regulator 1 or 6 slightly to the right.

The air conditioning system will adjust the interior air temperature accordingly.

Decreasing

� Turn the temperature regulator 1 or 6 slightly to the left.

The air conditioning system will adjust the interior air temperature accordingly.

Air distribution regulation

manual adjustment

Use the air distribution adjuster 4 (� page 180) to adjust the air distribution.

� Press the air distribution rocker switch 4 (� page 180) until the desired setting appears on the display.

The indicator light on the U button goes out and the air distribution screen 9 shows the current air distribution.

automatic adjustment

� Press the U button.

The button indicator light will come on. Air distribution and volume are regulated automatically.

Central air vents adjustment:

The knobs for the left 2 and right 6 center vents are automatically adjusted to ensure optimal air flow in the interior. In this position, the middle air inlet 4 and the left and right adjustable middle inlets 3 and 5 are fully open.

Symbol function

a Directs air through the center, side, and rear cab vents

Z Directs air to the windows

X Directs air to the entire interior of the vehicle

Y Directs air to your legs

183

checks in detail

Climate control

Heating:

Only in manual mode, it is possible to lower the temperature in the free space by adjusting the cold air supply with knob 7 (� page 178).

Fogged window outside

� Turn on the wipers (� page 48).

� Press the U button.

The button indicator light will come on.

Air volume adjustment

manual adjustment

Five blower speeds are available.

� Press � to decrease or Q to increase the air volume to the desired level.

The U button indicator light goes out. The selected fan speed is displayed on the screen.

automatic adjustment

� Press the U button.

The U button indicator light comes on. The air volume is adjusted automatically.

Antihelo

activation

� Press the P button.

The button indicator light will come on.

Deactivate

� Press the P button.

The button light goes out. Defrost is disabled.

i These settings should only be selected for short periods of time.

184

checks in detail

Climate control

air recirculation mode

Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant outside odors from entering the vehicle. This setting shuts off the outside air and recirculates the air in the cabin.

activation

� Press the O button.

The button indicator light will come on.

Warning! GRAM

When the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), switch to recirculated air mode only for short periods to prevent the windows from misting up.

iIf you hold down the O button, the side windows and the sliding/tilting roof* or panoramic sliding/tilting roof* will close.

Warning! GRAM

Never open windows and a sunroof/tilt* or panoramic/tilt* window if there is a possibility that the opening or closing procedure could cause injury.

Where the procedure poses a potential risk:

Vehicles with a sliding/tilting roof: The window opening procedure can be stopped immediately by pressing or pulling the appropriate window switch. The roof opening/tilting procedure can be stopped immediately by moving the roof/tilt switch in either direction.

Closing the side windows and sliding/tilting roof can be reversed by pressing and holding the O button again.

Vehicles with a panoramic sliding/tilting roof: The procedure for the windows and the panoramic sliding/tilting roof can be stopped immediately by releasing the O button.

185

checks in detail

Climate control

Deactivate

� Press the O button.

The button light goes out.

Air recirculation mode is automatically deactivated:

� after five minutes if the outside temperature drops below approximately 41°F (5°C)

� after five minutes if the air conditioner is turned off

� after 30 minutes if the outside temperature exceeds approximately 41°F (5°C)

At outside temperatures above 79°F (26°C), the system will not automatically return to outside air. After about 30 minutes, some outside air is added.

Deactivation of the air conditioning system

Deactivate

Press the M button (page 180).

reactivation

� Press the M button again (� page 180).

� Press any button on the air conditioning control panel (� page 180).

iAir air recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside temperatures.

If you have turned off the air conditioner (� page 186) or the outdoor temperature is below 41 °F (5 °C), the air recirculation mode will not automatically turn on.

iIf you hold down the O button, the side windows and the sliding/tilting* or panoramic sliding/tilting roof* will return to their previous position.

186

checks in detail

Climate control

Air conditioning

The air conditioning operates with the engine running and cools the interior air to the temperature set by the operator.

Deactivate

The air conditioning (cooling) function of the air conditioning system can be turned off. The air in the vehicle will no longer be cooled or dehumidified.

� Press the ± button (� page 180).

The indicator light in the ± button lights up.

activation

Moist air can mist up the windows. You can dehumidify the air with an air conditioner.

� Press ± again (� page 180).

The indicator on the ± button goes out.

The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant does not contain CFCs that are harmful to the ozone layer.

Residual heat and ventilation*

With the engine off, it is possible to continue heating or ventilating the interior for up to 30 minutes. This function uses the waste heat generated by the motor.

activation

� Turn the SmartKey starter switch to the 0 or 1 position or remove it from the switch.

Press the T button ( page 180).

The T button light comes on.

iCondensation may drip from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.

!If the air conditioner cannot be turned on again, the air conditioner is losing refrigerant. The compressor turned itself off.

Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop.

187

checks in detail

Climate control

Deactivate

Press the T button ( page 180).

The T button light turns off.

Residual heat switches off automatically:

� with the ignition on

� after about 30 minutes

� if the battery voltage drops

iThe time the system will provide heating depends on the temperature of the refrigerant and the temperature set by the operator. The blower will operate at speed setting 1 regardless of the air distribution control setting.

188

checks in detail

Automatic air conditioning*

� Automatic air conditioning*

189

checks in detail

Automatic air conditioning*

1 Automatic air conditioning box

2 Air volume adjustment knob for the left center air outlet

3 Left central air outlet, adjustable

4 Air outlet, fixed

5 Right center air outlet, adjustable

6 Air volume adjustment knob for the right center air outlet

7 Air volume adjustment knob for adding cool air

8 Air volume adjustment knob for side air outlet

9 Side defogger inlet, fixed

a Side air outlet, adjustable

1 knob to adjust the amount of air for the side air outlet

2 side air outlets, adjustable

1 Left rear central air outlet, adjustable

2 Right rear central air outlet, adjustable

3 Adjusting the amount of air for the right rear center air outlet

4 Temperature rocker switch, right

5 Display

6 Temperature rocker switch, left

7 Adjusting the air volume for the left rear center air outlet

190

checks in detail

Automatic air conditioning*

1 Air distribution, left

2 defrosting

3 Temperature rocker switch, left

4 Display

5 Temperature rocker switch, right

6 Rear window defroster

7 Air distribution, right

8 Air distribution and air volume, right (automatic, manual)

9 Activated carbon filter

a Remote control of the rear climate control

b Increase the amount of air

c Automatic air conditioning on/off

d Reduce the amount of air

e AC cooling on/off (ACOFF) Residual heat/ventilation (REST)

f Air recirculation

g Air distribution and air volume, left side (automatic, manual)

191

checks in detail

Automatic air conditioning*

Automatic air conditioning is a 4-zone intelligent air conditioning system. The interior of your vehicle is divided into 4 zones.

Using the sun sensor, the automatic climate control determines the ratio of sun exposure to the vehicle and automatically adjusts the interior temperature for each zone.

The temperature can be set for each of the 4 zones separately. These settings can be assigned to the SmartKey and stored in memory (� page 156).

The automatic air conditioning operates whenever the engine is running. It cools the vehicle cabin depending on the angle and intensity of the sun's rays, the outside temperature and the selected temperature. The air conditioning can be operated in automatic or manual mode.

Warning! GRAM

192

checks in detail

Automatic air conditioning*

Almost all dust particles, pollutants and odors are filtered before outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment through the air distribution system.

The air conditioner will not turn on (not cool) when ACOFF mode is selected (� page 190).

temperature setting

Use the temperature controller 3 for the left side or 5 for the right side to regulate the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment separately. The set temperature should be increased or decreased in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).

Warning! GRAM

Follow the recommended heating and cooling settings on the following pages. Otherwise, the windows may mist up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others.

i Severe conditions (e.g. heavy air pollution) may require filter replacement ahead of schedule. A clogged filter will reduce the volume of air inside.

If the interior of the vehicle is hot, ventilate it before driving.

Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield clear of snow and debris.

Do not block the air flow by placing objects in the air outlet slots under the rear window.

When using the air conditioning system in automatic mode, there is rarely a need to adjust the temperature, air volume and distribution.

193

checks in detail

Automatic air conditioning*

Development

� Press the top of the temperature rocker switch 3 and/or 5.

The automatic climate control system will adjust the interior temperature accordingly.

Decreasing

� Press the bottom of the temperature rocker switch 3 and/or 5.

The automatic climate control system will adjust the interior temperature accordingly.

Heating:

Only in the manual air distribution mode, it is possible to lower the temperature in the free space by bringing in outside air using knob 7 (� page 188) on the instrument panel.

Air distribution regulation

Use air distribution controls 1 and 7 (� page 180) to adjust the air distribution on each side of the passenger compartment separately. The following symbols are found on the controls:

manual adjustment

� Turn the air distribution knobs on both sides of the cabin to the desired symbol.

The U button lamp goes out.

automatic adjustment

� Press the left or right U button.

The U button indicator light comes on. The air distribution is adjusted automatically.

Fogged window outside

� Turn on the windshield wipers.

� Press the left or right U button.

Symbol function

a Directs air through the center, side, and rear cab vents

Z Directs air to the windows

X Directs air to the entire interior of the vehicle

Y Directs air to your legs

194

checks in detail

Automatic air conditioning*

Air volume adjustment

manual adjustment

Nine blower speeds are available.

� Press � to decrease or Q to increase the air volume to the desired level.

The AUTO screen will disappear and auto mode will be turned off. The selected fan speed is displayed on the screen.

automatic adjustment

� Press the left or right U button.

The air volume is adjusted automatically.

Maximum cooling MAX COOL

If the left and right air distribution controls and the air flow control are set to U and there is a high cooling demand, the "MAX COOL" screen will appear on the front and rear displays.

This ensures the fastest possible cooling of the vehicle interior (when the windows and the sliding/tilting roof* or panoramic sliding/tilting roof* are closed).

Antihelo

activation

� Press the P button.

The button indicator light will come on.

Deactivate

� Press the P button.

The button light goes out. Defrost is disabled.

air recirculation mode

Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant outside odors from entering the vehicle. This setting shuts off the outside air and recirculates the air in the cabin.

i These settings should only be selected for short periods of time.

Warning! GRAM

When the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), switch to recirculated air mode only for short periods to prevent the windows from misting up.

195

checks in detail

Automatic air conditioning*

activation

� Press the O button.

The button indicator light will come on.

Deactivate

� Press the O button.

The button light goes out.

iIf you hold down the O button, the side windows and the sliding/tilting roof* or panoramic sliding/tilting roof* will close.

Warning! GRAM

Never open windows and a sunroof/tilt* or panoramic/tilt* window if there is a possibility that the opening or closing procedure could cause injury.

Where the procedure poses a potential risk:

Closing the side windows and sliding/tilting roof can be reversed by pressing and holding the O button again.

Vehicles with a panoramic sliding/tilting roof: The procedure for the windows and the panoramic sliding/tilting roof can be stopped immediately by releasing the O button.

iAir recirculated air mode turns on automatically:

� at high outside temperatures

� if the concentration of carbon monoxide and nitrogen oxide in the outside air increases, for example in a tunnel (activated carbon filter (� page 196))

If you have turned off the air conditioner (� page 186) or the outdoor temperature is below 41 °F (5 °C), the air recirculation mode will not automatically turn on.

196

checks in detail

Automatic air conditioning*

Air recirculation mode is automatically deactivated:

� after five minutes if the outside temperature drops below approximately 41°F (5°C)

� after five minutes if the air conditioning is turned off (ACOFF)

� after 30 minutes if the outside temperature exceeds approximately 41°F (5°C)

At outside temperatures above 79°F (26°C), the system will not automatically return to outside air. After about 30 minutes, some outside air is added.

carbon filter

The active carbon filter significantly reduces unpleasant odors and removes pollutants from the air entering the cabin.

activation

� Press the e button.

The button indicator light will come on.

iIf you hold down the O button, the side windows and the sliding/tilting roof* or panoramic sliding/tilting roof* will return to their previous position.

iHolding the e button will close the side windows and the sliding/tilting roof* or panoramic sliding/tilting roof*.

Warning! GRAM

Never operate the side windows and the sliding/tilting roof* or the panoramic sliding/tilting roof* if there is a possibility that the opening or closing procedure could cause injury.

Closing the side windows and the sliding/tilting roof can be reversed by pressing and holding the e button again.

Vehicles with a panoramic sliding/tilting roof: The procedure for the windows and the panoramic sliding/tilting roof can be stopped immediately by releasing the e button.

197

checks in detail

Automatic air conditioning*

Deactivate

� Press the e button.

The button light goes out.

The system automatically switches to air recirculation mode if the concentration of carbon monoxide (CO) or nitrous oxide (NOX) in the outside air exceeds a certain level.

The automatic air recirculation mode does not operate if ACOFF mode is selected or if the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C).

The active carbon filter should be turned off if the windows fog up from the inside or if the cabin needs to be heated or cooled quickly.

Deactivation of the air conditioning system

Deactivate

It is possible to deactivate the automatic climate control system.

� Press the M button until the screen is cleared.

The air conditioning system is turned off.

reactivation

� Press the M button again.

iIf you hold down the e button, the side windows and the tilt/slide roof* will return to their previous position.

iWhen the air conditioning system is turned off, air flow and circulation are turned off. Select this setting only temporarily to prevent the windows from fogging up.

198

checks in detail

Automatic air conditioning*

Air conditioning

The air conditioning operates with the engine running and cools the interior air to the temperature set by the operator.

Deactivate

The air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic air conditioning system can be turned off. The air in the vehicle will no longer be cooled or dehumidified.

� Press the ° button.

ACOFF will light up on the display.

activation

Moist air can mist up the windows. You can dehumidify the air with an air conditioner.

� Press ° again.

ACOFF on the display goes out.

The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant does not contain CFCs that are harmful to the ozone layer.

Residual heat and ventilation.

With the engine off, it is possible to continue heating or ventilating the interior for up to 30 minutes. This function uses the waste heat generated by the motor.

activation

� Turn the SmartKey starter switch to the 0 or 1 position or remove it from the switch.

� Press the ° button.

REST on the screen lights up.

Deactivate

� Press the ° button.

REST on the screen goes out.

iCondensation may drip from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.

!If the air conditioner cannot be turned on again, the air conditioner is losing refrigerant. The compressor turned itself off.

Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop.

199

checks in detail

Automatic air conditioning*

Residual heat turns off automatically.

� with the ignition on

� after about 30 minutes

� if the battery voltage drops

rear air conditioning

1 Left rear center air outlet, adjustable 2 Right rear center air outlet, adjustable 3 Air volume adjustment knob for

rear right center air vent 4 Right temperature rocker switch 5 Display 6 Left temperature rocker switch 7 Air volume control knob

Left rear center air outlet

To show

1 Temperature, left 2 Temperature, right

basic settings

We recommend setting the temperature on the left and right sides to 72°F. This ensures a comfortable temperature in the rear of the vehicle.

The temperatures for the left and right sides can be adjusted using the temperature rocker switches 4 and 6.

200

checks in detail

Automatic air conditioning*

Adjusting the rear settings using the front control panel

To show

Press the TM button (page 190).

The screen changes.

The temperature of the left and right rear sides of the vehicle can be adjusted using the temperature rocker switches 3 and 5.

The temperature display disappears approximately five seconds after the last confirmation of the SmartKey and returns to normal display.

iThe rear air conditioner will not cool the air when ACOFF is selected on the front control panel.

i If you press the ™ button again, the normal screen will appear.

201

checks in detail

Electric windows

� Power windows Opening and closing the windows

The side windows can be opened and closed electrically. All side window switches are located on the driver's door. The corresponding window switches are located on the front passenger door and rear door.

1 Rear window master switch (� page 78)

2 Right front window 3 Right rear window 4 Left rear window 5 Left front window

Warning! GRAM

When closing windows, make sure that the closing procedure does not put anyone at risk.

Closing of the door windows can be stopped immediately by releasing the switch or, if the switch has been pulled past the point of resistance and released, by pressing or pulling the appropriate switch.

If the window encounters an obstacle blocking its movement when you have pulled the switch beyond the resistance point and released it to close the window, the auto reverse function will stop the window and open it slightly.

If the window encounters an obstacle blocking the way when you close the window by pulling and holding the switch, pressing and holding the ‹ button on the SmartKey, or pressing and holding the lock button (vehicles with KEYLESS -GO*) on the door handle,

the auto reverse function will not work.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition, carry it with the KEYLESS-GO* and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may result in an accident and/or serious injury.

iYou can also open or close windows with the following actions:

SmartKey (summer opening/convenience function) (page 203)

� O button on the climate control panel (� page 180)

� e button on the auto air conditioning panel (� page 190)

202

checks in detail

Electric windows

� Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 or press the KEY-LESS-GO* start/stop button once or twice.

opening windows

� Press the switch from 2 to 5 fully.

The corresponding window will scroll down until you release the switch.

closing windows

� Pull switch 2 to 5 to the point of resistance.

The corresponding window will move up until you release the switch.

Full opening of windows (Express-open)

� Move switch 2 to 5 past the point of resistance and release.

The corresponding window will open completely.

Completely close windows (Express-close)

� Pull switch 2 to 5 past the point of resistance and release.

The corresponding window closes completely.

If the upward movement of the window is blocked during the closing process, the window will stop and slightly tilt.

stopping windows

� Press or pull the appropriate switch again.

The windows can still be operated with the key in the ignition switch position 0 or removed:

� until the driver's or front passenger's door is opened

no longer than five minutes

G warning

If you pull and hold the switch up while closing the window and the upward movement of the window is blocked by an obstacle, including but not limited to hands, hands, fingers, etc., the auto reverse function will not function. .

Warning! GRAM

Driver's door only: If the switch is pulled past the resistance point and released again within five seconds, the auto reverse function will not operate.

203

checks in detail

Electric windows

Open and close windows with the SmartKey

The sliding/tilting roof* (� page 206) or panoramic sliding/tilting roof* (� page 212) also open or close when the power windows are operated with the SmartKey.

� Point the transmitter eye at the front door handle.

Opening (summer opening function)

If it's hot, you can ventilate the vehicle before driving off at the same time:

� open the sliding/tilting roof

� open the side windows

� activate the ventilation* of the driver's seat

To do this, follow the instructions below:

� Press and hold the Œ button after unlocking the vehicle.

The windows and sunroof/tilt or panoramic/tilt* will start to open after approximately one second.

� Release the Œ button to stop the procedure.

Closure (convenient function)

� Hold the ‹ button after locking the vehicle.

The windows and sunroof/tilt or panoramic/tilt* will start to close after approximately one second.

� Release the ‹ button to stop the procedure.

Before you get out of the vehicle, make sure that all side windows and the sunroof/tilt or panoramic/tilt window* are properly closed.

Warning! GRAM

Never open windows, sunroof/tilt or panoramic/tilt windows* if there is a possibility that someone could be injured as a result of the opening or closing procedure.

In the event that a procedure poses a potential hazard, the procedure can be stopped immediately by releasing the button on the SmartKey. To reverse the direction of movement, press Œ to open or ‹ to close.

The iSeat* ventilation for the driver's seat is automatically set to the highest level when activated with the summer opening function.

204

checks in detail

Electric windows

Closing the side windows with KEY-LESS-GO*

� Press and hold the door lock button (� page 54) until the side windows and the sliding/tilting roof or panoramic sliding/tilting roof* are closed.

Power window synchronization

The power window needs to be re-synchronized each time

� after disconnecting the battery.

� if the electric windows cannot be fully opened (Express-open) or closed (Ex-press-close).

Electric windows synchronization

� Switch on the ignition.

� Pull the power window switches until the side windows are closed.

Hold the switches for about a second.

The power windows are synchronized.

Warning! GRAM

When closing the windows and the sliding/tilting roof*, make sure that the closing procedure does not put anyone at risk.

If there is a potential threat, do the following:

� Release the lock button.

� Pull the door handle and hold it firmly. The side windows and sunroof/tilt window* will open when you hold the door handle, but the door will not open.

205

checks in detail

Sunroof/tilt*

� Sliding/tilting roof*Opening and closing the sliding/tilting roof

The sliding/tilting roof can be opened and closed electrically. The sunroof/tilt switch is located on the roof control panel.

1 Push backwards to open the sunroof 2 Push forwards to close the sunroof 3 Push upwards to raise the rear sunroof 4 Pull down to lower the rear sunroof

When the roof is closed or tilted, a mosquito net can be inserted into the roof opening to protect the roof from the sun's rays. When the roof is slid open, the screen will also hide.

Warning! GRAM

When closing the sliding/tilting roof, make sure that no one is in danger when closing.

The closing process of the sunroof/tilt window can be stopped immediately by releasing the switch or, if the switch has been moved past the point of resistance and released, by moving it in either direction.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition, carry it with the KEYLESS-GO* and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may result in an accident and/or serious injury.

!To avoid damage to the seals, do not carry sharp-edged objects that could protrude from the tilt/slide sunroof.

Only open the sunroof/tilt window when the roof is free of snow and ice.

In the event of a power failure, the sliding/tilting roof can be opened or closed manually (� page 364).

iYou can also open or close the sliding/tilting roof with:

� SmartKey, (� strona 206)

� Button on the air conditioning panel (� page 180) or automatic air conditioning (� page 190)

� e button on the auto air conditioning panel (� page 190)

206

checks in detail

Sunroof/tilt*

� Place the SmartKey in the ignition switch to position 1 or 2, or press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or twice.

Opening and closing the sliding/tilting roof

� To open, close, raise or lower the sunroof/tilt window, move the switch to the point of resistance in the required direction from 1 to 4.

Release the switch when the roof reaches the desired position.

Full opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) of the sliding/tilting roof

� To open, close, raise or lower the sunroof/tilt window, move the switch past the resistance point in the required direction 1 to 4 and release it.

The roof/tilt window opens or closes fully.

Stopping the sliding/tilting roof

� Slide the switch in any direction.

Opening and closing the tilt/slide roof with the SmartKey

The power windows (� page 203) will also open or close when operating the tilt/slide moonroof with the SmartKey.

� Point the transmitter eye at the front door handle.

iIf the movement of the tilt and slide sunroof becomes blocked during the closing process, the sunroof will stop and open slightly again.

Warning! GRAM

Never operate the windows or the sliding/tilting roof if there is a possibility that someone could be injured as a result of the opening or closing procedure.

In the event that the procedure poses a potential hazard, the procedure can be stopped immediately by releasing the button on the remote control. To reverse the direction of movement, press Œ to open or ‹ to close.

207

checks in detail

Sunroof/tilt*

Opening (summer opening function)

If it's hot, you can ventilate the vehicle before driving off at the same time:

� open the sliding/tilting roof

� open the side windows

� connect seat ventilation*

To do this, follow the instructions below:

� Press and hold the Œ button after unlocking the vehicle.

The windows and sunroof/tilt window start to open after approximately one second.

� Release the transmit button to abort the procedure.

Closure (convenient function)

� Hold the ‹ button after locking the vehicle.

The windows and sunroof/tilt window start to close after approximately one second.

� Release the ‹ button to stop the procedure.

Before getting out of the vehicle, make sure that all side windows and the moonroof/tilt roof are properly closed.

Closing the tilt and slide roof window with KEYLESS-GO*

The power windows (� page 204) will also close when the tilt and slide roof window is operated with the KEYLESS-GO.

� Press and hold the door lock button (� page 54) until the side windows and the sliding/tilting roof are closed.

Warning! GRAM

When closing the windows and the sliding/tilting roof, make sure that the closing procedure does not endanger anyone.

The tilt/slide roof will not reopen automatically if it is blocked during comfort closing.

If there is a potential threat, do the following:

� Release the lock button.

� Pull the door handle and hold it firmly. The side windows and tilt/slide sunroof open as long as the door handle is held, but the door is not opened.

208

checks in detail

Sunroof/tilt*

Tilt and slide sunroof synchronization

The moonroof/tilting roof must be synchronized again each time

� after disconnecting the battery

� the sliding/tilting roof has been closed manually (� page 364)

� the tilt and slide roof window does not open smoothly

fault

synchronization

� Remove the fuse from the main fuse box (� page 389).

� Replace the fuse in the main fuse box.

� Make contact.

� Press and hold the switch in direction 3 until the rear sunroof is fully raised.

Hold the switch for about one second.

The sliding/tilting roof is synchronized.

209

checks in detail

Panoramic moonroof/tilting roof*

� Panoramic sliding/tilting roof* Opening and closing the blinds

The blinds can only be opened or closed when the panoramic tilt/slide roof is closed. The front and rear blinds cannot be controlled separately.

Lift/panoramic moonroof switch

1 Open2 Close

Rear blinds switch

1 Open2 Close

� Place the SmartKey in the ignition switch to position 1 or 2 or press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button.

Opening and closing the blinds

� To open or close the blinds, move the panoramic/tilting roof switch or the rear blind switch to the point of resistance in the required direction 1 or 2.

Warning! GRAM

When opening or closing the panoramic sliding/tilting roof, make sure that no one is endangered during the opening or closing procedure.

If the panoramic moonroof/tilt roof is closed with convenience close and locked, it will not open automatically. In this case, press and hold the Œ button on the SmartKey; the panoramic moonroof/tilt roof will reopen.

The panoramic roof is made of glass. In the event of an accident, the glass may break. This may cause an opening in the roof.

When the vehicle rolls over, passengers who are not wearing their seat belts properly may be thrown through the opening. Such an opening also creates the possibility of injury to passengers properly fastened with seat belts, as parts of the whole body or parts of the body may protrude from the passenger compartment.

��

210

checks in detail

Panoramic moonroof/tilting roof*

Release the switch when the blinds reach the desired position.

Complete opening of the blinds (Express-open)

� Move the panoramic/tilting sunroof switch or the rear blind switch past the point of resistance in direction 1 and release it.

The blinds open fully.

Shutters stop

� Slide the switch in any direction.

Opening and closing the panoramic sliding/tilting roof

The panoramic sliding/tilting roof can be opened and closed electrically. The electric/sliding moonroof switch is located on the roof control panel.

The panoramic tilt and slide roof window only works with the blinds open.

1 Push backward to open sunroof 2 Push forward to close sunroof 3 Push up to raise sunroof 4 Pull down to lower sunroof

Warning! GRAM

When closing the blinds, make sure that no one is at risk of injury as a result of the closing procedure. Closing the blinds can be stopped immediately by releasing the switch.

Warning! GRAM

When opening or closing the panoramic sliding/tilting roof, make sure that no one is endangered during the opening or closing procedure.

The opening process of the panoramic tilt/slide roof can be stopped immediately by releasing the switch or, if the switch has been moved past the point of resistance and released, by moving it in either direction.

The closing process of the panoramic moonroof can be stopped immediately by releasing the switch.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition, carry it with the KEYLESS-GO* and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may result in an accident and/or serious injury.

��

211

checks in detail

Panoramic moonroof/tilting roof*

� Place the SmartKey in the ignition switch to position 1 or 2, or press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or twice.

Opening and closing the panoramic sliding/tilting roof

� To open or close the panoramic sunroof/tilt, move the switch to the point of resistance in the required direction from 1 to 4.

Release the switch when the roof reaches the desired position.

Full opening panoramic tilt/slide roof (Express-open)

� Move the switch past the resistance point in direction 1 and release it.

The panoramic tilt and slide roof window opens completely.

Panoramic moonroof / tilting roof

� Slide the switch in any direction.

!Do not carry any objects protruding from the panoramic tilt/slide roof as this may damage the seals.

Do not open the panoramic tilt/slide roof if there is snow or ice on the roof, as this may cause a malfunction.

The panoramic sliding/tilting roof can be opened or closed manually in the event of a power failure (� page 364).

i The panoramic tilt and slide roof window can also be opened using:

� SmartKey (summer opening/future comfort) (� page 203)

� button on the automatic climate control panel (� page 190)

� e button on the auto air conditioning panel (� page 196)

i The panoramic sliding roof cannot be fully closed (express closing)

212

checks in detail

Panoramic moonroof/tilting roof*

Opening and closing the panoramic tilt/slide roof with the SmartKey

The power windows (� page 201) also open or close when the panoramic sunroof/tilt is operated with the SmartKey.

� Point the eye of the transmitter at the driver's door handle.

Opening (summer opening function)

If it's hot, you can ventilate the vehicle before driving off at the same time:

� open the sliding/tilting roof

� open the side windows

� connect seat ventilation*

If the blinds are closed:

� Press and hold the Œ button after unlocking the vehicle.

The windows and blinds begin to open after about a second.

� Press and hold the Œ button again.

The panoramic tilt and slide moonroof tilts and opens.

If the blinds are already open:

� Press and hold the Œ button after unlocking the vehicle.

The windows roll down and the panoramic moonroof/tilt roof swings open after approximately one second.

� Release the transmit button to stop the procedure.

Closure (convenient function)

� Hold the ‹ button after locking the vehicle.

The windows and panoramic moonroof/tilt roof start to close after approximately one second.

� Release the ‹ button to stop the procedure.

Make sure all side windows and panoramic tilt/slide sunroof are properly closed before leaving the vehicle.

Warning! GRAM

Never open windows or the panoramic tilt/slide roof if there is a possibility that someone could be injured as a result of the opening or closing procedure.

213

checks in detail

Panoramic moonroof/tilting roof*

Closing the panoramic sunroof/tilting window with KEYLESS-GO*

The power windows (� page 201) will also close when the panoramic moonroof/tilting roof is operated with the KEYLESS-GO.

� Press and hold the driver's door lock button (� page 54) until the side windows and the panoramic tilt/slide roof are closed.

Panoramic moonroof/tilt sync

Panoramic tilt and slide sunroof needs re-syncing

power failure due to a disconnected or discharged battery

the roof has been closed manually

The roof was opened with a sudden movement

fault.

� Remove the fuse from the main fuse box (� page 389).

� Replace the fuse in the main fuse box.

� Switch on the ignition.

� Slide the switch towards 2 (� page 210).

Warning! GRAM

When closing the windows and panoramic tilt/slide sunroof, ensure that the closing procedure does not pose a risk of injury to anyone.

If there is a potential threat, do the following:

� Release the lock button.

� Pull the door handle and hold it firmly. The side windows and panoramic moonroof/tilting roof will open when you hold the door handle, but the door will not open.

��

214

checks in detail

Panoramic moonroof/tilting roof*

� Wait for the blinds to close, then press and hold the power button for about one second.

� Slide the switch towards 1 (� page 210).

� Wait for the blinds to open.

� Slide the switch towards 3 (� page 210).

� Wait until the panoramic tilt and slide sunroof is raised, then press and hold the switch for approximately one second.

� Slide the switch towards 2 (� page 210).

� Wait for the panoramic moonroof/tilting sunroof to close, then press and hold the switch for approximately one second.

The panoramic sliding/tilting roof is synchronized.

The synchronization must be repeated if the panoramic sliding roof cannot be fully opened (express opening).

Solar panels*

The solar panel is available in combination with the panoramic tilt and slide roof. Solar cells convert natural light into electricity. When the engine is off, the generated energy automatically turns on the fan. The constant flow of air causes a lower temperature in cars parked in the sun.

The airflow depends on the intensity of solar radiation. Ventilation starts two minutes after the engine is turned off.

��

215

checks in detail

drive systems

� Drivetrains The following drivetrains are explained on the following pages:

� Cruise control and Distronic*, thanks to which the vehicle can maintain the set speed

� Airmatic* automatically adjusts vehicle suspension characteristics and controls vehicle level

� Parktronic* to assist the driver during parking manoeuvres

BAS, ABS, ESP and SBC are described in the chapter "Safety and protection" (� page 80).

cruise control

Cruise control automatically maintains the speed set for the vehicle.

When driving at a constant speed for a long period of time, it is recommended to use cruise control. You can set any speed above 30 km/h.

The cruise control function is operated using the cruise control lever.

The cruise control lever is the upper lever located on the left side of the steering column (� page 20).

Warning! GRAM

Cruise control is a convenient system designed to assist the driver while driving. The driver is and should always be responsible for the speed of the vehicle and the safe operation of the brakes.

Cruise control should only be used when road, road and weather conditions recommend driving at a constant speed.

� It can be dangerous to use cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic because the conditions do not allow you to safely drive at a constant speed.

� Using cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Sudden changes in tire grip can cause wheels to spin and loss of control.

� Disable cruise control when driving in fog.

The "Resume" function should only be used when the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wants to resume that specified speed.

216

checks in detail

drive systems

1 Set current speed or higher 2 Set current speed or lower 3 Cancel cruise control 4 Resume at previously set speed

Save your current speed

� Accelerate or decelerate to your desired speed.

� Lift 1 or briefly press 2 on the cruise control lever.

The current speed is set.

� Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Cruise control is on.

Canceling cruise control

There are several ways to cancel cruise control:

� Depress the brake pedal.

� Briefly push the cruise control lever to position 3.

Cruise control will be cancelled. The last set speed will be saved for later use.

i On uphill or downhill gradients, cruise control may not be able to maintain the set speed. Once the incline decreases, the set speed will be restored.

!Moving the shift lever to N while driving also cancels cruise control. However, the shift lever should not be moved to N while driving, except when shifting when the vehicle is at risk of skidding (for example, on an icy road).

i The last stored speed is canceled when the engine is turned off.

217

checks in detail

drive systems

Memorized speed setting ("Resume" function)

� Briefly move the cruise control lever to position 4.

The cruise control will return to the last set speed.

� Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Higher speed setting

� Raise the cruise control lever to position 1 and hold it until the desired speed is reached.

� Release the cruise control lever.

The new speed is set.

Lower speed setting

� Move the cruise control lever to position 2 and hold it until the desired speed is reached.

� Release the cruise control lever.

The new speed is set.

Fine-tuning in 1 mph increments (Canada: 1 km/h)

Faster

� Briefly tilt the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 1.

Slower

� Briefly tilt the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 2.

Warning! GRAM

The stored speed should only be reset when road conditions allow it. Any differences in acceleration or deceleration that occur when returning to the set speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.

iPressing the accelerator pedal does not disengage cruise control. After a short acceleration (for example, to overtake), cruise control will return to the last set speed.

iWhen you use the cruise control lever to reduce speed, the transmission will automatically downshift if engine braking is not sufficient to bring the vehicle to a stop.

218

checks in detail

drive systems

dystronic*

When activated, Distronic adaptive cruise control enhances the driving comfort offered by cruise control when driving on motorways and other major roads.

� If the Distronic distance sensor detects a slower-moving vehicle directly ahead, your vehicle's speed will be reduced to follow that vehicle at a set distance.

� If there is no vehicle directly in front of you, Distronic will operate in the same way as cruise control (� page 222).

Warning! GRAM

Distronic adaptive cruise control is not a substitute for active participation in driving. It does not react to stationary objects, does not recognize or predict the curvature and layout of the lanes or the movement of vehicles ahead. Distronic can apply a maximum of 20% of the vehicle's braking force.

It is the driver's responsibility to keep an eye on traffic and road conditions and to steer, brake and perform other actions necessary to maintain control of the vehicle.

Warning! GRAM

Distronic is a convenience system. Its RPM reduction function is designed to increase the effectiveness and usability of cruise control in the event of fluctuating traffic speeds. However, it is not intended to replace the need for special care. Responsibility for the speed of the vehicle and the distance from the vehicle in front, including primarily the operation of the brakes to ensure a safe stopping distance, always rests with the driver.

Distronic cannot take road and traffic conditions into account.

Warning! GRAM

Distronic requires knowledge of its operational features. We strongly recommend that you read the following information carefully before starting your system.

iFor US Use Only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. The operation is subject to the following two conditions:

� this device may not cause harmful interference, and

� This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

219

checks in detail

drive systems

Warning! GRAM

Distronic cannot take road and traffic conditions into account. Only use Distronic when road, weather and road conditions recommend driving at a constant speed.

Warning! GRAM

Using Distronic can be dangerous on slippery roads. Sudden changes in tire grip can cause wheels to spin and loss of control.

Distronic does not work in conditions of unfavorable visual distance. Do not use Distronic in fog and heavy rain, snow or sleet conditions.

Warning! GRAM

Pay close attention to road and traffic conditions at all times, whether Distronic is on or off.

Using the Distronic can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic as the conditions do not allow safe driving at a constant speed.

Distronic will not react to stationary objects on the road (e.g. a vehicle stuck in a traffic jam or a damaged vehicle). Distronic will also not react to oncoming vehicles.

Disable Distronic:

� when changing lanes from the left to the right, if vehicles are moving slower in the left lane

� when entering a turn lane or highway exit

� in complex traffic situations, for example in road construction zones

In these situations, Distronic will continue to maintain the set speed unless disabled.

The Distronic is designed and intended solely to maintain a set speed and maintain a set distance from objects moving in front of it.

Warning! GRAM

The "Resume" function should only be used when the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wants to resume that specified speed.

220

checks in detail

drive systems

Distronic displays on the speedometer dial

1 speed set

If Distronic is on, one or two segments light up around the set speed.

1 segments

If Distronic detects a vehicle immediately ahead, the segments from the speed of the vehicle ahead to the set speed will light up.

If Distronic calculates that there is a risk of collision:

� The DTR warning light l on the instrument panel is red.

� An intermittent warning tone sounds.

� Brake the vehicle immediately to avoid a collision.

Under no circumstances should the driver wait for the intermittent warning sound before starting to brake. See the following warning.

The intermittent warning tone stops and the red DTR l warning lamp goes out when the required distance to the vehicle ahead has been restored.

iThe vehicle speed displayed on the speedometer may temporarily differ from the speed set in the Distronic system.

221

checks in detail

drive systems

Distronic menu in the control system

In the Distronic menu you can read the current Distronic settings. What appears on the screen depends on whether Distronic and Distance Alert are turned on or off.

� Press the è or ÿ button until one of the following screens appears.

Warning! GRAM

An intermittent warning chime sounds and the DTR warning light in the instrument cluster illuminates if the Distronic system calculates that the distance to the vehicle ahead and your vehicle's current speed indicate that Distronic will not be able to slow down the vehicle sufficiently to maintain the previous speed. -set the following distance that poses a collision risk.

Apply the brakes immediately to increase the distance to the vehicle in front of you. The warning sound is intended to serve as a final warning that you have not interfered with the braking yourself to avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Don't wait for the warning horn to interfere with your own braking as this will result in potentially dangerous emergency braking which will not always prevent a collision.

Following carefully increases the risk of an accident.

Warning! GRAM

Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maximum deceleration of 2 m/s2 (6.5 ft/s2). This corresponds to approximately 20% of your vehicle's maximum braking capacity.

Distronic brakes the vehicle to restore the set distance or maintain speed. In this case, the brake pedal is automatically pressed, causing the brake pedal to move.

The driver's legroom must be kept clear at all times, including the area under the brake pedal. Objects stored in this area may affect the movement of the pedals, which may interfere with the braking ability of the Distronic system.

Do not put your foot under the brake pedal as it may get stuck.

222

checks in detail

drive systems

disabled dystronic

If Distronic is disabled, you can see the standard Distronic display on the multifunction display.

1 Vehicle ahead if detected 2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead 3 Preset threshold for vehicle distance

In front4 Your vehicle5 Distance warning symbol on

function

dystronic activated

If you turn Distronic on, you will see the set speed on the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. If Distronic is enabled, you may see the following screen on the multifunction display.

1 Dystronic activated

cruise control lever

The Distronic system is operated via the cruise control lever.

The cruise control lever is the upper lever located on the left side of the steering column.

1 Set current speed or higher 2 Set current speed or lower 3 Disable Distronic 4 Resume at previously set speed

223

checks in detail

drive systems

Dystronic activation

You can activate Distronic if:

travels at speeds from 25 mph (40 km/h) to 110 mph (180 km/h)

� ESP is on (� page 82)

If Distronic has not been engaged when the cruise control lever is pressed, --- will appear in the multifunction display.

You will not be able to activate Distronic in the following cases:

� Up to two minutes after starting the engine

� When braking

� If you have applied the parking brake

� If the shift lever is in the P, R or N position

� If ESP is turned off

Current speed setting

� Accelerate or decelerate to your desired speed.

� Raise or briefly press the cruise control lever.

Distronic is on and the current speed is set.

� Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Higher speed setting

� Briefly tilt the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 1 (� page 222) to increase vehicle speed in 5 mph increments (Canada: 10 km/h).

The new speed is set.

The stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds (� page 222) and the speedometer shows one or two segments around the stored speed (� page 220).

iIf you do not take your foot off the accelerator pedal completely, the following message will appear in the multifunction display: Distronic override. The distance to slower moving vehicles in front of you will not be set. The vehicle speed will then be determined solely by the position of the accelerator pedal.

Pressing the accelerator pedal does not disable Distronic. After a short acceleration (for example, to overtake), cruise control will return to the last set speed.

224

checks in detail

drive systems

Lower speed setting

� Briefly tilt the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 2 (� page 222) to reduce vehicle speed in 5 mph increments (Canada: 10 km/h).

The new speed is set.

The stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds (� page 222) and the speedometer shows one or two segments around the stored speed (� page 220).

Fine-tuning in 1 mph increments (Canada: 1 km/h)

Faster

� Briefly tilt the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 4 (� page 222).

Memorized speed setting ("Resume" function)

� Briefly tilt the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 4 (� page 222).

Distronic is activated and adapts to the last stored speed.

� Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

iWhen you use the cruise control lever to decelerate, the transmission will automatically downshift if the deceleration speed is too slow.

Warning! GRAM

225

checks in detail

drive systems

Disable Distronic

There are several ways to deactivate the Distronic system:

� Briefly tilt the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 3 (� page 222).

� Depress the brake pedal.

Distronic will be disabled. The last set speed will be stored in memory.

Distronic turns off automatically when:

you applied the parking brake

drive less than 25 miles per hour (40 km/h)

� ESP is active (� page 82) or you disable ESP

� move the shift lever to position N

A signal will sound. Distronic off appears on the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.

Setting the following distance in Distronic

You can set a specific distance for Distronic by changing the time setting from 1.0 to 2.0 seconds. Using this time setting and the current vehicle speed, Distronic calculates and sets the required distance to the vehicle in front. The set distance will be displayed in the multifunction display field.

The dial for setting the time is located at the bottom of the center console.

i The following message appears in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds: Distronic off.

The last stored speed is deleted when the engine is turned off.

Warning! GRAM

Distronic disengages and releases the brakes when the vehicle slows down below a minimum speed of approximately 40 km/h (25 mph) due to system operation. At this point, the driver must apply the brakes to slow down or stop the vehicle even further.

Warning! GRAM

It is up to the driver to use discretion to select the appropriate setting based on road conditions, traffic volume, preferred driver's driving style, and applicable safety distance regulations and recommendations.

226

checks in detail

drive systems

1 Distance Alert On/Off switch

2 Indicator lamp 3 Knob for setting the distance

increasing distance

Increasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in front.

� Turn knob 3 in the direction of ¯ .

decreasing distance

Decreasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a shorter distance to the vehicle in front.

� Turn knob 3 in the direction of ® .

distance alert function

When Distronic is turned off, this feature will continue to alert you when it detects a stationary obstacle or a slower moving vehicle in the vehicle's path and there is a risk of collision:

� The distance warning light l on the instrument panel comes on.

� An intermittent warning tone sounds.

If these warnings are displayed, brake manually to maintain a safe distance and avoid a collision with the vehicle ahead.

When the brake pedal is pressed, the warning sound stops. The warning sound also stops when the distance to the vehicle is reached

the front is again enough without pressing the brake pedal. In this case, the distance warning lamp also goes out.

Warning! GRAM

If the DTR l warning light on the instrument cluster comes on while driving and/or an intermittent warning chime sounds, immediate driver attention is required.

If the traffic situation requires it, use the brakes and avoid a potential obstacle. However, do not rely on the distance warning function as this will trigger emergency braking. Particularly depending on the condition of the road surface and the driver's reaction, it may not always be possible to avoid a collision.

iComplex traffic situations are not always fully recognized by Distronic. This may result in incorrect or missing distance warnings.

227

checks in detail

drive systems

activation

� Press button 1.

Indicator light 2 on the button comes on. The loudspeaker symbol appears on the multifunction display (� page 222).

Deactivate

� Press button 1.

The indicator light 2 on the button goes out. No loudspeaker symbol appears on the multifunction display.

Drive with Distronic

This section describes a number of driving situations that require the driver to take special precautions. Be prepared to brake in these situations. This will deactivate the Distronic system.

Warning! GRAM

Distronic works to maintain the speed selected by the driver, unless a moving obstacle is detected moving directly ahead in the same direction of travel (for example, following another vehicle ahead at a distance specified by Distronic). It means that:

� Your vehicle may overtake another vehicle after changing lanes

� On a sharp curve, or if the vehicle in front is on a sharp curve, Distronic may lose sight of the vehicle ahead, and your vehicle may accelerate to a preselected speed.

Distronic only regulates the distance between your vehicle and vehicles directly in front of it, but does not register stationary objects on the road, e.g.:

� The vehicle is stuck in a traffic jam

� Damaged vehicle

� Oncoming vehicle

The driver must always be alert, watch the traffic and intervene if necessary to steer or stop the vehicle.

Warning! GRAM

Distronic should not be used on snowy or icy roads.

228

checks in detail

drive systems

The most likely cause of system malfunction is a dirty sensor (located behind the bonnet), especially during snow and ice or heavy rain. In this case, Distronic will shut down and the message Currently unavailable for viewing will appear. the instruction manual will appear on the multifunction display.

For cleaning and care of the Distronic sensor, see "Cleaning the Distronic Sensor" (� page 307).

bends and turns

When cornering or cornering, Distronic may fail to detect the vehicle in front or detect it too early. This may cause the vehicle to stop late or unexpectedly.

If the message "Distronic - clean the sensor!" see op. the instruction disappears while driving and the last stored speed flashes for about five seconds, the dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved; Distronic works again.

229

checks in detail

drive systems

compensating driving

A vehicle moving in your lane but out of alignment with your direct line of traffic may not be detected by Distronic. The distance to the vehicle in front will be insufficient.

lane change

Distronic has not detected the vehicle's lane change yet. The distance to the vehicle changing lane will be insufficient.

narrow vehicles

Due to the narrow profile, Distronic has not yet detected a vehicle driving close to the edge of the road. The distance to the vehicle in front will be insufficient.

230

checks in detail

drive systems

Airmatic DC (dual controls)*

Airmatic automatically selects the optimum suspension setting and ride height for your vehicle. Airmatic consists of two elements:

� Adaptive Damping System (ADS)

� Vehicle level check

ADS automatically selects the optimal damping for given driving conditions. At the same time, the suspension is set to sports or comfort.

suspension adjustment

Suspension tuning is set by:

your driving style

� Road surface conditions

Your choice of "Sport I", "Sport II" or "Comfort" suspension style, which you choose with the damper button.

The following suspension styles are available:

� comfortable

Both lights 2 are off.

� Deportivo I

Indicator light 2 is on.

Sport II

Both lights 2 are on.

1 Damping button 2 Indicator lights

� Start the engine.

� Press the damper button 1 until the desired suspension style is set.

iThe selected suspension type is stored in memory even when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition switch.

iIn the sports suspension, the vehicle is lowered to 0.6 inches (15 mm).

231

checks in detail

drive systems

Vehicle level check

Your vehicle automatically adjusts the ride height to

� reduce fuel consumption

� increase vehicle safety

The following vehicle chassis ride heights can be selected:

normal

� Created

The ride height of the vehicle chassis increases or decreases depending on the vehicle level and speed setting selected:

� At speeds above approximately 110 km/h and sport suspension style selected (� page 230), the ground clearance is automatically lowered to approximately 0.6 in (15 mm).

� As the speed decreases, the ride height increases back to the "Normal" level.

The "High" level should only be selected if the current driving conditions require it. Otherwise

fuel consumption may increase

� this may affect operation

iThese height adjustments are so small that you may not notice any change.

Warning! GRAM

To avoid personal injury, keep your hands and feet away from the wheel arch area and away from the vehicle when lowering the vehicle frame.

232

checks in detail

drive systems

The following vehicle level settings can be selected when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running:

The button is located at the bottom of the center console.

1 Vehicle level control button 2 Indicator lamp

Short press button 1 to switch from "Normal" to "High". When the vehicle is at the "raised" level, pressing the switch will return the vehicle to the "normal" level.

Vehicle level when parked

Used to increase ride height above normal

Auto Descent Indicator Light (� page 232)

Normal Normal operation None Max approx. 15 mm (0.6 in.) Lamp off

High Driving with snow chains or very uneven road surface

about. 20 mm (0.8 inch) Max approx. 35 mm (1.4 in.) Lamp on

iAt approximately 75 mph (120 km/h) or if the speed increases to between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h)

for about five minutes, the "Up" setting will be canceled. Level selection message. canceled appears on the multifunction display.

If you are not driving in this speed range, the "Enhanced" level remains stored even when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition.

233

checks in detail

drive systems

Parktronic* (parking aid)

The Parktronic system is an electronic aid designed to assist the driver during parking manoeuvres. It visually and audibly indicates the relative distance between the vehicle and the obstacle.

Parktronic is activated automatically when the ignition is switched on and the parking brake is released. Parktronic is deactivated above 18 km/h (11 mph). At lower speeds, Parktronic is reactivated.

Parktronic monitors your vehicle's surroundings using six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper.

1 Sensors in the front bumper

Warning! GRAM

The Parktronic system is a complementary system. This is not intended nor does it replace the need for extra care. Responsibility for parking and other critical maneuvers always rests with the driver.

Particular attention should be paid to objects with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes (for example, trailer hitches, painted bollards or curbs). Such objects may not be detected by the system and may damage the vehicle.

Dirty sensors can affect the operation of the Parktronic system, especially in snow and ice conditions. See "Cleaning the Parktronic Sensors" (� page 307).

Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. air hammers or truck air brakes) may cause the system to give erroneous readings and should be considered.

Warning! GRAM

Make sure there are no people or animals in the area where you are manoeuvring. Otherwise, you may hurt them.

234

checks in detail

drive systems

Sensor range

For the sensors to function properly, they must be free of dirt, ice, snow and sleet. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them.

front sensors

rear sensors

Minimum distance

If the system detects an obstacle within this range, all warning lamps will illuminate and a warning chime will sound. If the obstacle is closer than the minimum distance, the system may not indicate the actual distance.

Center approx. 40 inches (100 cm)

corners approx. 48 inches (120 cm)

Center approx. 48 inches (120 cm)

corners approx. 32 inches (80 cm)

!When parking, pay special attention to objects above or below the height of the sensors (e.g. flower boxes or trailer hitches). The Parktronic system will not detect such objects at close range and may damage the vehicle or object.

Ultrasonic signals from external sources (e.g. truck air brakes or jackhammers) may affect the operation of the Parktronic system.

Center approx. 8 inches (20 cm)

corners approx. 15 cm (6 in)

235

checks in detail

drive systems

warning indicators

Visual cues inform the driver of the relative distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning lamp for the front area is located above the center vents on the dashboard. A warning indicator for the rear area is integrated into the rear trim.

Front area warning indicator

1 Left side of the vehicle 2 Right side of the vehicle

Each warning indicator is divided into six yellow and two red segments on each side of the vehicle. Parktronic is ready when the frame around the indicator lights up.

The position of the shift lever determines which warning lamps will illuminate.

As the vehicle approaches an object, one or more segments will light up depending on the distance. When the eighth segment lights up, you have reached the minimum distance.

� Front Zone: An intermittent audible warning will sound when the first red segment is illuminated and a continuous audible warning of up to three seconds for the second red segment. The signal is canceled when the shift lever is moved to P and the parking brake is applied.

� Rear area: An intermittent warning tone will sound with the first red segment illuminated and a continuous audible warning of up to three seconds with the second red segment. The signal is canceled when the shift lever is moved to D or P and the parking brake is applied.

gear lever position

warning indicator

D Front zone activated

R or N Front and rear zone active

Q Not activated

236

checks in detail

drive systems

Activating/deactivating the Parktronic system

The Parktronic system can be deactivated manually.

The Parktronic switch is located at the bottom of the center console.

1 Parktronic2 on/off Indicator light

Turn off the Parktronic system

� Press button 1.

Indicator light 2 comes on.

Parktronic ignition

� Press button 1 again.

Indicator light 2 goes out.

Parktronic system failure

There is a fault in the Parktronic system if the red segments of the Parktronic warning indicator illuminate and the warning tone sounds. The Parktronic system will deactivate after 30 seconds and the indicator light on the Parktronic switch will illuminate.

� Have the Parktronic system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

If only the red segments of the Parktronic warning indicator light up and no warning beeps are heard, the Parktronic sensors are dirty or not working properly. Failure can also be caused by interference from other radio or ultrasonic signals. Parktronic will automatically turn off after 20 seconds.

� Clean the Parktronic sensors (� page 307).

� Make contact.

� Check the operation of the Parktronic system elsewhere to rule out interference from external ultrasonic or radio signals.

237

checks in detail

Landing

� Cargo rack*

1 slice

Preparation for mounting the roof rack

� Open the panels 1 on the battens of the roof panels.

� Install the roof rack in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.

ski bag*

unfold and load

� Lower the armrest (arrow).

� Rotate cover 1 down.

Warning! GRAM

Only use roof racks approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to prevent damage to your vehicle. Follow the manufacturer's installation instructions.

!Load the roof rack in such a way that the vehicle is not damaged while driving.

Make sure

� you can fully lift the sunroof/tilt* or panoramic sunroof/tilt*

Can you fully open the trunk?

238

checks in detail

Landing

� Open the Velcro strap 1.

� Put the ski bag in the passenger compartment and unfold it.

� From the boot, slide the skis into the ski bag. � Wrap the strap around the ski bag and armrest.

� Close the buckle (arrows) and pull the strap to fasten the skis firmly.

Warning! GRAM

The ski bag is designed for up to four pairs of skis. Do not load the ski bag with other items.

Always hold your ski bag securely. In the event of an accident, an unfastened ski bag may cause injury to vehicle occupants.

��

239

checks in detail

Landing

� Connect the carabiner 1 of the front strap to the eyelet 2 located on the central tunnel in front of the rear seat.

download and submit

� Loosen the strap, open the clasp by pressing the tabs (arrows).

� Ski unloading.

� Close the boot lid.

� Fold and flatten the ski bag lengthwise and place the folded ski bag in the recess of the backrest.

� Close the ski compartment lid.

240

checks in detail

Landing

Ski bag removal

To remove the ski bag, we recommend that you go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Split rear seat*

You can fold down the left and right rear seat backrests to enlarge the trunk.

The two sections can be folded separately to enlarge the luggage compartment.

Fold the seat back forward

1 release handle

� Pull the release handle 1.

The seat cushion automatically rises slightly.

Warning! GRAM

Never drive with the trunk open when removing the ski bag. Lethal carbon monoxide (CO) can enter a vehicle and cause unconsciousness and death.

iTo prevent unauthorized access to the boot, always keep the lid closed.

Warning! GRAM

Always fold the seat cushions as far forward as possible when unfolding the trunk.

Unless you are carrying a load, the seatbacks must remain properly locked in the upright position.

In the event of an accident, sudden stop or sudden manoeuvre, loose objects will be thrown into the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless they are properly secured in the vehicle.

Always use load lashing rings (� page 244).

! Always unfasten the seat cushion and fold it down before folding the seatback forward. Otherwise, the seat back upholstery may be damaged.

iIf the driver and front passenger seats are occupied by tall people, it may be necessary to move the seats forward slightly to fold the rear seatbacks forward.

241

checks in detail

Landing

1 Seat cushion 2 Seat back

� Grasp the back of the seat cushion 1 and fold it forward.

� Push the rear seat head restraints all the way in.

� Pull the handle on the trunk.

The seatback is released and the head restraints tilt back.

� Tilt the seat back to front.

Return the seat back to its original position

1 Seat cushion 2 Seat back

� Rotate the seatback 2 backwards until it locks.

� Rotate the seat cushion 1 backwards and press the center front of the cushion until it clicks into place.

iIf the rear center seat is to be occupied while driving, the seat belt buckle may need to be folded back.

!Make sure the head restraints are fully inserted into the seat pockets. This will prevent your backups from getting corrupted during transfer.

��

242

checks in detail

Landing

� Rotate the head restraint forwards by hand until it locks into place.

Cargo extension*

Removing the rear seat cushions will provide a larger, flatter cargo area.

� Tilt the seat and back cushions forward.

� Remove the head restraints (� page 116).

� Fold the seat back to the upright position.

1 release lever

� Pull the seat cushion release lever 1 and remove the seat cushion by pulling it upwards.

Warning! GRAM

Always lock the seatback in the upright position when the rear seat is occupied or the extended luggage carrier is not in use. Check the secure lock by pressing and pulling the backrest.

In the event of an accident, sudden stop or sudden manoeuvre, loose objects will be thrown into the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless they are properly secured in the vehicle.

To avoid personal injury in a sudden collision or maneuver, use caution when carrying a load.

��

243

checks in detail

Landing

� Tilt the seat back to front.

charging instructions

The total weight of the load, including vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo, must not exceed the vehicle weight limit shown on the certification label located on the left door pillar.

The driveability of a fully laden vehicle is highly dependent on the load distribution. It is therefore recommended to load the vehicle as shown in the illustrations, placing the heaviest items towards the front of the vehicle.

Always place your items on the backs of the front or rear seats and secure them as securely as possible.

The heaviest part of the load should always be as low as possible, as this affects the vehicle's driveability.

!Leave the seat hinge in this position. Bending the hinge backwards may damage the upholstery.

244

checks in detail

Landing

Lashing eyes*

There are four rings on the trunk 1.

� Carefully secure the load by evenly loading all rings with a rope strong enough to hold the load.

Always follow the charging instructions (� page 243).

Back seat

There are lashing rings on both sides of the footwell under the rear seat.

Warning! GRAM

Always secure transported items as securely as possible.

In the event of an accident, sudden stop or sudden manoeuvre, loose objects will be thrown into the vehicle and may cause injury to vehicle occupants unless they are properly secured in the vehicle.

To avoid personal injury in a sudden collision or maneuver, use caution when carrying a load. If possible, put your luggage or car in the trunk. Do not stack luggage or cargo over the seatbacks. Do not put anything on the rear window shelf.

Never drive a vehicle with the trunk open. Lethal carbon monoxide (CO) can enter a vehicle and cause unconsciousness and death.

245

checks in detail

useful functions

� Useful features Storage Net for storage in the front passenger footwell

There is a small grid of comfort packs in the front passenger footwell. Used to store small, lightweight items such as road maps, mail, etc.

glove box

1 Glove compartment lid release 2 Mobile phone compartment

phone/glasses

opening the clipboard

� Press the cover release button 1.

The glove box lid opens downwards.

Close the storage

� Push the cover up to close it.

Warning! GRAM

To avoid personal injury in a crash or sudden manoeuvre, be careful when storing items in the vehicle. If possible, place luggage or cargo in the trunk. Do not stack luggage or cargo over the seatbacks. Do not put anything on the shelf under the rear window.

Luggage nets do not secure hard or heavy items.

Compartment covers should be closed. This will help prevent stored items from being thrown and injuring vehicle occupants in a crash.

Warning! GRAM

The Parcel Net is designed to hold lightweight parcels only.

Heavy objects, sharp-edged objects or breakable objects cannot be transported on the packet network.

The parcel net does not protect the transported goods in the event of an accident.

246

checks in detail

useful functions

Center console storage box (without CD changer installed*)

1 Open/close button

� Press button 1 to open.

The control panel swings up and the storage compartment slides out.

� Press button 1 to close.

Cup holders in the center console

� Briefly press the mark on the back of the cover.

The lid opens.

� Briefly press the mark on the cup holder.

The cup holder pops out automatically.

iBefore closing the glove compartment, please close the glasses compartment first.

iNever put any medication in the glove box. In the event of a power failure, the storage compartment cannot be opened.

i The cup holder can be removed for cleaning. Only clean the cup holder with clean, lukewarm water. Be sure to insert the cup holder into the guides when reinstalling it.

247

checks in detail

useful functions

1 Left cup holder 2 Right cup holder

Storage under the armrest

1 Storage compartment 2 Storage compartment

Storage hole

� Pull the handle 2.

A storage box that opens

� Pull handle 1.

Ventilated storage compartment in the front center console

The storage compartment in the front center console under the armrest in your vehicle may have its own vent. The air temperature is approximately the same as the temperature of the dashboard vents.

If your vehicle's front center console storage box has its own air vent, the lever is located on the front center air intake.

1 lever

� To open the ventilation grille, move the lever up.

� To close the air outlet, move the lever down.

Warning! GRAM

When not in use, keep the cup holder closed when traveling. To avoid spillage, only place containers that will fit in the cup holder. Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents, especially hot liquids, may spill out during vehicle maneuvering.

��

248

checks in detail

useful functions

Storage compartment in the rear center console

� Briefly press the top of the chamber.

It extends automatically.

Ruffled storage bags

Folded storage bags are located in the backrests of the front seats.

Storage compartment in the rear armrest

� Push the handle up and fold down the armrest.

i The chamber can become very hot due to the small space. When storing heat-sensitive items (e.g. groceries) in the glove compartment, close the air vent when heating the cabin.

Warning! GRAM

The Ruffle storage bag is designed to hold lightweight items only.

Heavy items, sharp-edged items or breakable items must not be transported in a crinkle storage bag.

The corrugated storage bag does not protect the goods being transported in the event of an accident.

��

249

checks in detail

useful functions

cup holder on the back

� Briefly press the front part of the center armrest.

The cup holder pops out automatically.

ashtrays

ashtray in the center console

open ashtray

� Briefly press the mark on the underside of cover 1.

The ashtray opens automatically.

Warning! GRAM

There is a small rubber mat in the storage compartment. If you want to store coins/tokens, remove the ashtray insert and replace it with a rubber mat. Empty the ashtray and place it in a convenient place in the vehicle.

Warning! GRAM

Only use the rubber mat in conjunction with the coin/token compartment. Always remove the rubber mat and/or all other contents and re-insert the ashtray before placing hot cigarettes or other hot smoking materials in this compartment.

250

checks in detail

useful functions

Remove the ashtray insert

� Secure the vehicle against movement by applying the parking brake. Move the shift lever to position N.

You now have more room to remove the insert.

� Move slider 2 to the right and hold it.

� Grasp and remove the ashtray frame insert.

Reassembly of the ashtray insert

� Install the insert by pushing it back into the frame until it clicks into place.

rear ashtray

Ashtray opening at the back

� Briefly press the top of the ashtray.

The ashtray opens.

Lighter

The cigarette lighter is located in the storage compartment in the center console in front of the armrest (� page 26).

1 lighter

� Switch on the ignition.

� Press the lighter 1.

The lighter will turn off automatically when hot.

Warning! GRAM

Only remove the front ashtray when the vehicle is stationary. Apply the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the shift lever to the N position. With the shift lever in the N position, turn off the engine.

251

checks in detail

useful functions

12V socket*

The plug is located on the back of the center console storage compartment.

The socket can be used for accessories with a maximum power of 180 W.

heated steering wheel*

The steering wheel heater heats the leather part of the steering wheel.

The heated steering wheel switch lever is located in the lower left corner of the steering wheel.

1 Light 2 Off 3 On

Warning! GRAM

Never touch the heating element or sides of the lighter; they are very hot. Just hold the knob.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition, carry it with the KEYLESS-GO* and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may result in an accident and/or serious injury.

iThe cigarette lighter socket can be used to connect electrical accessories with a maximum power of 85 W.

252

checks in detail

useful functions

activated

� Switch on the ignition.

All indicator lights in the instrument cluster come on.

� Turn the switch at the end of the lever in the direction of arrow 3.

The steering wheel gets hot. Indicator light 1 comes on.

erasing

� Turn the switch at the end of the lever in the direction of arrow 2.

The heated steering wheel is turned off. Indicator light 1 goes out.

Phone*

Radio transmitters such as mobile phones or CB units should only be used inside a vehicle when connected to an antenna mounted outside the vehicle.

The external antenna must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a Mercedes-Benz Authorized Center for information on installing an approved external aerial. Refer to the instruction manual of the radio transmitter regarding the use of an external antenna.

The heated steering wheel does not switch off automatically.

Warning! GRAM

Don't forget that your main responsibility is to drive the vehicle. The driver's attention on the road should always be the main focus when driving. For your own safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you stop in a safe place and stop before making or answering a phone call.

If you choose to use your phone1 while driving, use a hands-free kit and only use your phone when road and weather conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving.

Only use COMAND (Cockpit Data and Management System) when road, weather and traffic conditions allow it.

1 Comply with all legal requirements.

253

checks in detail

useful functions

You can answer and make phone calls using the s and t buttons on the steering wheel. To perform other phone functions, use the control system (� page 134).

Instructions for using the phone are provided in a separate user manual.

Telepomoc* System telepomocy

(Telematic identification of alarms on demand)

The Tele Aid system consists of three types of responses:

� automatic and manual emergency

roadside assistance i

information

The Tele Aid system works as long as the vehicle's battery is charged, properly connected, undamaged and there is cellular and GPS coverage.

The volume of the Tele Aid call loudspeaker can be adjusted using the volume control on the multifunction steering wheel. To go up, press the æ button and to go down, press the ç button.

� To activate, press the SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button • or the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required.

Keep in mind that at only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h) the vehicle travels 44 feet (approximately 14 m) in one second.

Warning! GRAM

Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving. Whether or not prohibited by law, for safety reasons, the driver must not use a mobile phone while the vehicle is in motion.

Stop your vehicle in a safe place before answering or making a call.

!Initial activation of the Tele Aid system can only be done by completing the subscription agreement and making a known call using the SOS button. If any of these steps are not followed, the system will not be activated. If the system is not turned on, the indicator light on the SOS button stays on after turning the SmartKey in the ignition switch to position 2 or pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button twice to position 2. Tele Aid - Not Enabled will be displayed on the multifunction display for approximately 10 seconds.

If you have any questions about activation, please call the Customer Service Center at 1-800-756-9018 (US) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada).

254

checks in detail

useful functions

Shortly after your contact conversation ends, you will receive your user ID and password via email with your first conversation. Visit www.mbusa.com and select "Tele Aid" (US only) to access your account information, remote door release and more.

System Self Test

Initially, when switched on, faults are detected and signaled (SOS button, roadside assistance button • and information button ¡ lights on for more than ten seconds or off at all). TELEHELP message - WELCOME TO THE WORKSHOP! appears for about 10 seconds on the multifunction display.

i The SOS button is located above the interior rearview mirror.

The roadside assistance button • and the information button ¡ are located under the center armrest cover.

!Tele Aid uses the cellular network for communication and GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If any of these signals are not available, the Tele Aid system may not work, and if so, help must be sought elsewhere.

Warning! GRAM

If the indicators on the SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button and/or the Information button are still red and/or the message TELHELP - VISIT THE WORKSHOP! appears on the multifunction display after the system self-test, a fault has been detected in the system.

If a failure is indicated as described above, the system may not function as expected. Have the system checked by the nearest Mercedes-Benz Dealership as soon as possible.

255

checks in detail

useful functions

Emergency calls

An emergency call is initiated automatically:

� after an accident in which the emergency pretensioning devices (ETD) or airbags deployed

� if the burglar alarm or trailer alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds. See alarm system (� page 89) and trailer alarm (� page 90)

An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover next to the interior mirror with the word SOS and then briefly pressing the button located under the cover. Below are instructions on how to initiate an emergency call manually.

When an emergency call is in progress, the indicator on the SOS button will flash. The message EMERGENCY CALL - CALL NOW appears on the multifunction screen. When the connection is established, the message EMERGENCY CALL - CONNECTED appears on the all-in-one.

screen. All information relevant to the emergency situation is generated, such as vehicle location (determined by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification number and color.

A voice connection between the response center and vehicle occupants will be established automatically shortly after an emergency call is initiated. When a voice call is established, the audio system is muted and the message TELE AUX - EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE appears on the multifunction display. The response center will attempt to further determine the nature of the accident if able to speak to the occupant of the vehicle.

Tele Aid is available if:

� has been activated and is working. Activation requires subscription to monitoring, connectivity and cellular airtime services

the appropriate mobile network and GPS signals are available and transmit information to the Response Centre

i Locating the vehicle on the map is only possible if the vehicle can receive signals from the GPS satellite network and send information to the Response Center.

256

checks in detail

useful functions

Manually start an emergency call

1 SOS button on the housing 2

� Briefly press cover 1.

The lid will open.

� Short press the SOS button 2.

The indicator on the SOS button 2 will flash until the emergency call ends.

� Wait for a voice call from the response center.

� Close the cover after the emergency call is ended.

Warning! GRAM

If the SOS button indicator light is on solid and the voice connection to the response center has not been established, this means that the Tele Aid system was unable to initiate an emergency call (for example, the appropriate mobile network is unavailable). The message EMERGENCY CALL - CALL FAILED appears on the multifunction display for approximately 10 seconds.

In this case, you should seek help in another way.

Warning! GRAM

If you feel that you are in any danger while in the vehicle (for example, smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous place on the road), do not wait for voice contact after pressing the emergency button. Carefully exit the vehicle and move to a safe place. The response center will automatically contact local emergency services and provide the vehicle's approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS and are unable to communicate with vehicle occupants by voice.

257

checks in detail

useful functions

Roadside assistance button •

There is a roadside assistance button under the center armrest cover •.

� Press and hold the button (more than 2 seconds).

A connection to the Mercedes-Benz roadside assistance dispatcher will be established. The button will flash when a call is in progress. The message ROAD ASSISTANCE - CONNECTING A CALL appears on the multifunction screen.

When the connection is established, the message ASSISTANCE CONNECTED appears on the multifunction screen. The Tele Aid system will send data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to the availability of cellular and GPS signals).

A voice connection will be established between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the passengers of the vehicle. When a voice call is established, the audio system is muted and a message appears

The text HELP - ROAD ASSISTANCE ACTIVE appears on the multifunction screen.

� Describe the nature of the need for help.

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will dispatch a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange for the vehicle to be towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz station. Charges for services such as labor and/or towing may apply. More information can be found in the roadside assistance manual.

These programs are only available in the United States:

� Sign and Drive Services: You can take advantage of services such as starting, filling up with a few gallons of fuel or replacing a punctured tire with a vehicle spare tire.

� Remote Vehicle Diagnosis: This feature allows the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher to download fault codes and current data from the vehicle.

iRoadside button indicator light • illuminates red for approximately 10 seconds during the system self-test when the ignition is turned on (along with the SOS button and the information button ¡).

Use the system self-test (� page 254) if the indicator light does not turn red or stays on for more than 10 seconds.

If the indicator light on the Roadside Assistance button is • on steadily and the voice connection to the response center has not been established, this means that the Tele Aid system was unable to initiate a roadside assistance call (for example, the corresponding mobile phone number in the network is not available) . available). The message ROAD ASSISTANCE - CALL FAILED appears on the multifunction screen.

258

checks in detail

useful functions

information button

The information button ¡ is located under the center armrest cover.

� Press and hold the button (more than 2 seconds).

A connection to the Customer Service Center will be initiated. The button will flash when a call is in progress. The message INFO - CONNECTING A CALL will appear on the multifunction display.

When the connection is established, the message INFO - CONNECTED appears on the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will send data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to the availability of cellular and GPS signals).

A voice connection will be established between the BOK representative and the passengers of the vehicle.

When a voice call is established, the audio system is muted and the message TELE HELP - INFO CALL ACTIVE appears on the multifunction display. Information about the operation of your vehicle, the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products and services is available.

For more information on Tele Aid, visit www.mbusa.com and use your ID and password (sent separately) to learn more (US only).

Roadside assistance calls can be ended with the t button on the multifunction steering wheel.

iThe information button ¡ indicator light remains red for approximately 10 seconds during the system self-test when the SmartKey is turned to the ignition switch position 2 (along with the SOS button and the roadside assistance button •) .

Use the system self-test (� page 254) if the indicator light does not turn red or stays on for more than about ten seconds.

If the info button indicator ¡ is on solid and the voice call to the response center has not been established, Tele Aid was unable to initiate an info call (for example, the appropriate mobile network is not available) . The message INFO - CONNECTION FAILED appears on the multifunction screen.

Information calls can be ended with the t button on the multifunction steering wheel.

259

checks in detail

useful functions

update signals

The Tele Aid system processes requests with the following priority:

� Automatic failure - first priority

� Manual Failover - Second Priority

� Roadside assistance - third priority

� Information - Fourth priority

If a higher priority call is initiated during a call, you will hear an update tone (alternating) and the corresponding indicator will flash. If certain information, such as vehicle identification number or customer information, is not available, the operator may need to resend it.

During this time, you will hear a beep and the voice contact will be interrupted. Voice contact will resume after the transfer is complete. When the call is ended, a beep will sound and the corresponding indicator light will stop flashing. COMAND will resume operation.

!If the lights do not start flashing when you press one of the buttons, or stay on (red) all the time, either the Tele Aid system has detected a fault or the service is not currently active and may not start. call. Visit a Mercedes-Benz Authorized Center as soon as possible and have your system checked or contact the helpdesk at 1-800-756-9018 (USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada).

!If the indicator light continues to flash or the system does not restart, contact the Customer Service Center at 1-800-756-9018 (USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada) or contact your Mercedes customer -Benz . Help at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) in the US or Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada.

iThe indicator light on the corresponding button flashes until the connection is ended. Calls can only be ended by a representative of the Helpdesk or Customer Service, with the exception of Information and Roadside Assistance calls, which can also be ended by pressing the t button on the multifunction steering wheel.

260

checks in detail

useful functions

remote door opening

If you inadvertently lock your vehicle (for example, a SmartKey in a vehicle) and you don't have a spare SmartKey on hand:

� Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada).

You will be asked to enter the password you provided when concluding the subscription agreement.

� Then return to the vehicle and pull the recessed trunk handle for at least 20 seconds until the SOS button flashes.

The message EMERGENCY CALL - CONNECTED appears on the multifunction screen.

Alternatively, you can unlock your vehicle online using your ID and password, which you will receive shortly after the phone call is over.

The response center will then unlock the vehicle using the remote door opener.

iWhen a Tele Aid call is initiated, the COMAND audio is muted and the selected mode (radio or CD) is stopped. The optional mobile phone (if equipped) is turned off. If you must use this phone, your vehicle must be parked. Disconnect the spiral cable and make the connection. The COMAND* navigation system (if active) will continue to function. The instrument cluster display is available for use and voice commands are only available by pressing the RPT button on COMAND. A pop-up window will appear on the COMAND screen indicating that a Tele Aid call is in progress.

i Remote door opener is available if a suitable mobile network is available.

The SOS button will flash and the multifunction display will show EMERGENCY CALL - CONNECTED, indicating that you have received a command to open the door.

After unlocking the vehicle, a specialist from the Response Center will attempt to make voice contact with the passengers of the vehicle.

If the recessed tailgate handle was pulled for more than 20 seconds before the response center was authorized to unlock the doors, wait 15 minutes before pulling the recessed tailgate handle again.

261

checks in detail

useful functions

Stolen vehicle tracking services

In case of vehicle theft:

� Report the incident to the police.

The police will draw up a numbered incident report.

� Please send this number to the Mercedes-Benz Service Center together with the password you received when subscribing to the service.

The response center will then attempt to secretly communicate with the vehicle's teleassistance system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact the local police and you. The location of the vehicle will only be provided to law enforcement authorities.

garage door opener

The built-in remote control can operate up to three independently controlled devices, for example garage door openers, gate openers or other HomeLink® compatible devices or some other systems.

You can program the buttons of the signal transmitter.

123 Signal transmitter button

4 Indicator lamp

5 Hand transmitter button

6 Handheld remote control (not included in the vehicle's equipment)

Warning! GRAM

Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure that people and objects are away from the device to avoid possible damage.

When programming the garage door opener, the door moves up or down. When programming the gate drive, the gate opens or closes.

Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that does not have the safety stop and reverse functions required by US Federal Safety Regulations (this applies to all models of garage door openers manufactured before April 1, 1982). . A garage door that cannot detect an object by pointing the door to stop and reverse does not meet current US federal safety standards.

262

checks in detail

useful functions

Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote

Paso 1:

� Switch on the ignition.

Paso 2:

� If you have previously programmed the built-in beeper button and want to keep the programming, go to step 3. Otherwise, press and hold both external beeper buttons 1 and 3 and release them only when the indicator light comes on. flash after about 20 seconds (do not hold down the button for more than 30 seconds). This procedure clears all previous settings for all three channels and initializes the memory. If you later want to program a second and/or third transmitter to the remaining two buttons of the signal transmitter, skip this step and start directly from step 3.

Some types of garage door openers are not compatible with the built-in drive. If you have difficulty programming your transmitter, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Care Center (US only) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes or Customer Service (Canada) at 1- 800-387-0100.

iFor US Use Only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. The operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

263

checks in detail

useful functions

Paso 3:

� Hold the end of the handheld remote control 6 of the device you want to train about 5 to 12 cm (2 to 5 inches) from the surface of the integrated remote control located on the inside rearview mirror, keeping the indicator light 4 in your sight.

Etap 4:

� With both hands, simultaneously press the button on the handheld transmitter 5 and the desired button on the integrated signal transmitter (1, 2 or 3). Do not release the buttons until you complete step 5.

Indicator light 4 on the integrated remote control will flash, slowly at first and then quickly.

Paso 5:

� When indicator light 4 starts flashing quickly, release both buttons.

Paso 6:

� Press and hold the button on the newly trained integrated signal transmitter and watch the indicator light 4.

If indicator light 4 is on solid, programming is complete and the device should turn on when the button on the integrated signal transmitter is pressed and released.

Paso 7:

� To program the other two buttons, repeat the steps above, starting with step 3.

iThe indicator light 4 flashes when the signal transmitter button is programmed for the first time. If this button has already been programmed, the indicator light will only start flashing after 20 seconds.

iIf indicator light 4 flashes quickly for about two seconds and then turns solid, continue programming steps 8 through 12 as your garage door opener may have a rolling code feature.

264

checks in detail

useful functions

variable code programming

To train a rolling code garage door opener (or other rolling code device) with rolling code capability, follow these instructions after completing the Programming section (steps 1-6) of this text. (A second person can speed up and facilitate the following training procedures.)

Paso 8:

� Locate the “train” button on the main motor unit of the garage door opener.

The exact location and color of the button may vary depending on the brand of garage door opener. Depending on the manufacturer, the "training" button may also be referred to as the "learn" or "smart" button. If you have difficulty locating the drive button, refer to the garage door opener manual.

Paso 9:

� Press the "train" button on the main motor unit of the garage door opener.

"Training light" is on.

You have 30 seconds to start the next step.

Paso 10:

� Press firmly, hold for two seconds, and release the programmed integrated signal transmitter button (1, 2 or 3).

Paso 11:

� Press and hold for two seconds, then release the same button a second time to complete the training process.

Some garage door openers (or other rolling code devices) may require you to perform this procedure a third time to complete the training.

Paso 12:

� Confirm the operation of the garage door by pressing the button of the programmed integrated signal transmitter (1, 2 or 3).

Paso 13:

� To program the other two buttons, repeat the steps above, starting with step 3.

Canadian gate developer/operator

Canadian radio frequency regulations require the transmitter signal to time out (or drop out) after a few seconds of transmission, which may not be enough for the built-in signal transmitter to pick up a signal during programming. As with Canadian law, some gate operators in the US are supposed to "rest" in the same way.

265

checks in detail

useful functions

If you live in Canada or have difficulty programming your gate drive (no matter where you live) using the programming procedures, replace step 4 with the following:

Etap 4:

� Continue to press and hold the built-in signal transmitter button (1, 2, or 3) while pressing and pressing again ("cycling") the handheld remote control 6 every two seconds until the frequency signal disappears. learned After a successful training, the indicator light 4 will flash slowly and after a few seconds quickly.

Continue programming step 5 and step 6 to complete.

Integrated remote control

� Switch on the ignition.

� Select and press the appropriate integrated signal transmitter button (1, 2 or 3) to activate the remote control.

The integrated remote control continues to send a signal as long as the button is pressed, up to 20 seconds.

Clearing the memory of the integrated remote control

� Switch on the ignition.

� Simultaneously press and hold the signal transmitter buttons 1 and 3 for about 20 seconds until the indicator light 4 flashes quickly. Don't hold it for more than 30 seconds.

The codes of the three channels will be erased.

One-button reprogramming of the built-in signal transmitter

To program your device using a programmed push button transmitter, follow these steps:

� Press and hold the desired signal transmitter button (1, 2 or 3). Do not release the button again.

� The indicator light will flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the button on the integrated signal transmitter, continue programming from step 3.

If you are selling your vehicle, clear the codes for all three channels.

266

267

Operation

First 1,000 miles (1,500 km)

driving instructions

At the gas station

engine compartment

tires and wheels

driving in winter

Maintenance

vehicle care

268

Operation

First 1,000 miles (1,500 km)

�In the "Maintenance" section, you will find detailed information on the operation, maintenance and care of your vehicle.

First 1,000 miles (1,500 km) The more you take care of your vehicle during the break-in period, the better you'll be satisfied with its performance afterward.

� Drive the vehicle for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km) at variable but moderate vehicle and engine speeds.

� During this period, avoid heavy loads (driving at full speed) and excessive engine speeds (no more than 2⁄3 maximum RPM in any gear).

� Avoid kick-down acceleration.

� Do not try to slow down the vehicle by downshifting with the shift lever.

� Select positions 3, 2, or 1 only when driving at moderate speeds (for driving uphill).

After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), the vehicle and engine speed may be gradually increased up to the maximum speed allowed.

All of the above information, depending on the vehicle type, also applies to the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km) after an engine or rear differential replacement.

!Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:

� For the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), do not exceed 85 miles per hour (140 km/h).

� Avoid engine speeds above 4,500 rpm in any gear during this period.

Always obey the applicable speed limits.

269

Operation

driving instructions

� Driving instructions Drive carefully: save fuel

Fuel consumption is highly dependent on driving style and operating conditions.

To save fuel:

� Maintain the recommended tire pressure.

� Remove unnecessary loads.

� Remove the roof rack when not in use.

� Allow the engine to warm up at low load.

� Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration.

� All maintenance must be performed at the intervals specified in the Service Booklet and in accordance with FSS requirements. Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in cyclical traffic, on short journeys and in hilly terrain.

Drink and drive fags

Warning! GRAM

Drinking and driving and/or drug use and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perception and judgment.

The risk of a serious or even fatal accident increases significantly when driving under the influence of alcohol or drugs.

Don't drink or use drugs, and don't drive or let anyone drive who has been drinking or using drugs.

Warning! GRAM

The driver's legroom must always be kept clear. Objects stored in this area may affect pedal movement.

270

Operation

driving instructions

power brakes

Warning! GRAM

The braking system requires electrical power to function.

There is no electric power steering or braking when the engine is switched off. In this case, remember that braking and turning the vehicle requires much more effort.

Warning! GRAM

After riding in heavy rain for a period of time without using the brakes, or after driving through water deep enough to wet the brake components, initial braking may be slightly reduced and it may be necessary to increase pedal pressure to achieve the desired braking effect. Keep a safe distance from vehicles ahead.

Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads.

It can also cause the brakes to overheat, greatly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in time to avoid an accident.

271

Operation

driving instructions

To prevent corrosion of the brake discs after driving on wet (especially salty) surfaces, it is recommended that you brake the vehicle very hard before parking it. The heat generated is used to dry the brakes.

If the braking system is normally subjected to only moderate loads, check the effectiveness of the brakes from time to time by applying higher than normal brake pressure at higher speeds. This will also improve the grip of the brake pads.

If the parking brake is released and the brake warning light in the instrument cluster remains on, the SBC brake system has failed (� page 85) or the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low .

Brake pad wear or a leak in the system can cause a low level of brake fluid in the reservoir.

Have a qualified technician check the brake system immediately. Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

All inspections and service work on the brake system should be performed by qualified technicians only. Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

Only fit brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

After a hard stop, it is advisable to continue driving for a while instead of parking immediately so that the airflow cools the brakes more quickly.

!Be very careful not to endanger other road users when braking.

See Brake Assist System (BAS) description (� page 82).

Warning! GRAM

If non-recommended brake pads are fitted or non-recommended brake fluid is used, the braking performance of the vehicle may be impaired to such an extent that safe braking is significantly affected. It may cause an accident.

Read and follow the brake pad replacement warnings (� page 329).

!When descending long, steep hills, reduce the load on the brakes by downshifting to take advantage of engine braking power. This helps prevent brake overheating and reduces brake pad wear.

272

Operation

driving instructions

driving

Apply the brakes to test them briefly after starting. Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of traffic.

Gently warm up the engine. Do not place a full load on the engine until it reaches operating temperature.

When starting on a slippery surface, do not allow the drive wheel to spin for a long time with the ESP system turned off. This can cause serious damage to the powertrain that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Parking

Tires

!Simultaneously pressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brakes reduces engine performance and causes premature wear of the brakes and transmission.

!Apply the parking brake whenever you park or leave the vehicle. Also put the shift lever in the P position. When parking on a hill, always apply the parking brake and point the front wheel towards the curb.

Warning! GRAM

Do not park this vehicle in areas where flammable materials such as grass, hay, or leaves can come into contact with a hot exhaust system, as these materials may ignite and cause a vehicle fire.

To reduce the risk of personal injury due to vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and exiting the vehicle, always:

� Keep your right foot on the brake pedal.

� Depress the parking brake pedal firmly.

� Move the shift lever to the P position.

� Slowly release the brake pedal.

� When parking on a hill, turn the front wheel toward the curb.

� Turn the SmartKey to ignition position 0 and remove it, or press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).

� Take your SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock your vehicle before leaving.

Warning! GRAM

If you feel sudden severe vibrations or disturbances to your journey, or if you suspect damage to your vehicle, turn on your hazard lights, slow down carefully, and carefully drive into an area that is a safe distance from the road.

273

Operation

driving instructions

Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These indicators are located in six locations around the circumference of the tread and become visible at approximately 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread depth, at which point the tire is considered fully worn and needs to be replaced.

The tread wear indicator appears as a continuous bar across the tread.

The recommended tire pressure must be maintained. This is especially true for tires exposed to heavy loads (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temperatures).

hydroplaneo

Depending on the depth of the layer of water on the road, aquaplaning can occur even at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce your vehicle speed, avoid road ruts and brake carefully in the rain.

Inspect the tires and chassis of the vehicle for damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, take them to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire retailer for repair.

Warning! GRAM

Although the applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations state that the tire should be worn when the tread wear indicators (TWIs) become visible to about 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow the tires to wear out. come down to this level. As the tread depth approaches 1/8 inch (3 mm), wet grip decreases drastically.

Depending on the weather and/or road surface (conditions), tire grip varies greatly.

Warning! GRAM

Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects your ability to steer or brake your vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continuing to drive with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will overheat and possibly cause a fire.

274

Operation

driving instructions

tire grip

The safe speed on a wet, snowy or icy road is always lower than on a dry one.

Pay particular attention to the condition of the road when outside temperatures are approaching freezing.

Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated radial tires with a minimum tread depth of approximately 1/6 inch (4 mm) on all four wheels during the winter season to ensure normal balanced driving characteristics. On packed snow, they can shorten the braking distance compared to summer tires. However, the braking distance is still there

much higher than when the road is not covered with snow or ice. Be careful.

Tire Speed Index

Regardless of the tire speed rating, local speed limits must be respected. Use a prudent driving speed appropriate to the prevailing conditions.

E 320, E 320 4MATICE 500, E 500 4MATICE 320 4MATIC (Appearance Pack*) E 500 4MATIC (Appearance Pack*)

Your vehicle is factory fitted with "H" marked tires rated at 130 miles per hour (210 km/h).

E 320 (Appearance Pack*) E 500 (Appearance Pack*)

Your vehicle is factory fitted with "W" tires with a speed rating of 270 km/h.

The electronic speed limiter prevents the vehicle from exceeding 210 km/h (130 mph).

Warning! GRAM

If ice has formed on the road, tire grip will deteriorate significantly. Drive, turn and brake with extreme caution in these weather conditions.

Warning! GRAM

Even where permitted by law, never drive faster than the maximum tire speed rating.

Exceeding the maximum speed for which the tires are rated can cause sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and potentially leading to an accident and/or personal injury and possible death to you and others.

275

Operation

driving instructions

E 320 (Sport Pack*), E 500 (Sport Pack*)

Your vehicle is factory fitted with "Z" marked tires that have a speed rating greater than 149 miles per hour (240 km/h).

The electronic speed limiter prevents the vehicle from exceeding 250 km/h (155 mph).

E 320 4MATIC (Sport Package*) E 500 4MATIC (Sport Package*)

Your vehicle is factory-fitted with min. Tires marked "Y" that have a speed rating greater than 186 miles per hour (300 km/h).

The electronic speed limiter prevents the vehicle from exceeding 250 km/h (155 mph).

E 55 AMG

Your vehicle is factory fitted with "Z" marked tires that have a speed rating greater than 149 miles per hour (240 km/h).

The electronic speed limiter prevents the vehicle from exceeding 250 km/h (155 mph).

Winter Driving Manual

The most important rule of thumb for slippery or icy roads is to drive sensibly and avoid sudden acceleration, braking and steering manoeuvres. Do not use cruise control in these conditions.

When the vehicle is about to skid, move the shift lever to N. Try to maintain control of the vehicle by corrective steering actions.

iFor information on speed ratings for winter tyres, see "Driving in Winter" (� page 297). Hiya

For more information on riding with snow chains, see "Snow Chains" (� page 298).

Warning! GRAM

On slippery surfaces, never downshift to brake. This can cause the drive wheels to slip and reduce vehicle control. Your vehicle's ABS system will not prevent this type of loss of control.

276

Operation

driving instructions

Road salt and chemicals can adversely affect brake performance. It may be necessary to increase the pedal force to obtain the normal braking effect.

Periodic application of the brake pedal during intensive driving on salty roads can restore normal braking performance, which is affected by road salt.

If the vehicle is parked after driving on salty roads, the effectiveness of the brakes should be checked as soon as possible after driving again.

See "Driving in Winter" (� page 297) for more information.

Stagnant water

Warning! GRAM

Do not put other road users at risk when performing these braking manoeuvres.

Warning! GRAM

If the vehicle is stuck in snow, make sure there is no snow in the exhaust pipe or around the vehicle with the engine running. Otherwise, the deadly carbon monoxide (CO) could enter the interior of the vehicle and cause unconsciousness and death.

To ensure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open the window slightly on the side of the vehicle that is not facing the wind.

Warning! GRAM

The outside temperature indicator does not serve as an ice warning device and is therefore not suitable for this purpose. Temperatures listed just above freezing do not guarantee that the road surface is ice-free.

!Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth. Before driving through water, determine its depth. Never accelerate before driving on water. The bow wave can force water in and damage the engine and accessories.

If you must drive through standing water, drive slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or engine compartment. Water in these areas can damage engine or transmission electrical components or wiring, or can cause the engine to suck water through the air intake and cause severe internal engine damage. Any such damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

277

Operation

driving instructions

passenger compartment

driving abroad

Abroad, you have the extensive Mercedes-Benz service network at your disposal. If you plan to drive in areas that are not listed in the Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you should request the relevant information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Radio transmitter control and operation

COMMAND, radio and phone*

Two-way radios and telephones

Radio transmitters such as mobile phones or CB units should only be used inside a vehicle when connected to an antenna mounted outside the vehicle.

Refer to the instruction manual of the radio transmitter regarding the use of an external antenna.

Warning! GRAM

Always secure transported items as securely as possible.

In the event of an accident, sudden stop or sudden manoeuvre, loose objects will be thrown into the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless they are properly secured in the vehicle.

The trunk is the preferred place to carry items.

Warning! GRAM

Remember that your primary responsibility is to drive safely. Use COMAND (Cockpit Data and Management System), radio or telephone1 only when road, weather and traffic conditions permit.

Keep in mind that at only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h) the vehicle travels 44 feet (approximately 14 m) in one second.

1 Comply with all legal requirements

Warning! GRAM

278

Operation

driving instructions

catalyst

Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with monolithic catalytic converters which, together with oxygen sensors, are an important element in achieving significant control of pollutants in the exhaust gases. Keep your vehicle in good working order by following the recommended maintenance instructions in the Service Manual.

emission control

Some engine systems are designed to keep toxic exhaust components within legal limits.

These systems, of course, will only function properly if they are strictly maintained to factory specifications. Therefore, any engine adjustments should only be carried out by qualified technicians authorized by the Mercedes-Benz Centre. The engine settings must not be altered in any way. In addition, the required service work must be carried out regularly in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. More information can be found in the service booklet.

!To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle.

Any noticeable abnormalities in engine operation must be rectified immediately. Otherwise, excess unburnt fuel may enter the catalytic converter and cause it to overheat, possibly leading to a fire.

Warning! GRAM

As with any vehicle, it should not be idled, parked or operated in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves could come into contact with a hot exhaust system as these materials may ignite and cause the vehicle to stop. beginning. fire.

279

Operation

driving instructions

refreshing temperature

Under severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature can rise to approximately 248°F (120°C).

Do not operate the engine when the coolant temperature exceeds 248°F (120°C). This can cause severe engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Warning! GRAM

Inhalation of exhaust fumes is dangerous to health. All exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide and inhalation can cause unconsciousness and death.

Warning! GRAM

� Driving with a severely overheated engine can ignite some fluids that may have entered the engine compartment. You may suffer severe burns.

� Steam from an overheated engine can cause severe burns and can occur simply by opening the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.

Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle, and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

280

Operation

At the gas station

� At a petrol station Refueling

The fuel filler cap is located on the rear right side of the vehicle. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the remote control automatically locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.

� Turn off the engine

� by turning the SmartKey to position 0.

� by pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button. Open the driver's door (when the driver's door is open, the starter switch is now in the 0 position, the same as the SmartKey removed from the switch).

� Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

� Open the fuel filler cap by pressing where indicated by the arrow.

The fuel tank door opens.

� Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and hold it until any pressure is released.

� Remove the cap and place it in the hole in the fuel tank cap.

To prevent fuel vapors from escaping, push the filler nozzle all the way in.

� Only fill the tank until the filler nozzle is disconnected; do not fill or overfill.

Warning! GRAM

Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are near gasoline, avoid inhalation of fumes and skin contact, extinguish all tobacco materials. Never allow sparks, flames or smoking materials near gasoline!

Warning! GRAM

Overfilling the fuel tank can create pressure in the system which can cause gas to leak out. This may cause gas to spray when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which may result in personal injury.

281

Operation

At the gas station

� Replace the fuel filler cap by turning it clockwise.

You will hear when the fuel cap is tightened.

� Close the fuel tank flap.

Check regularly and before a long trip

1 Windshield and headlight washer system*For more information on tank filling (� page 289).

2 Brake fluid More information on brake fluid can be found in the "Technical Data" chapter (� page 409).

3 Coolant level More information on the coolant level (� page 287).

iUse only high-quality unleaded gasoline with a minimum published octane rating of 91 (96 RON/86 MON average). Gasoline quality information can usually be found on the fuel pump.

For more information on gasoline, refer to the Manufacturer Approved Service Products brochure.

Leaving the engine running with the fuel cap open may cause the yellow fuel tank reserve warning light to flash and display ? lamp for illumination

See also the "Practical Hints" section (� page 317).

282

Operation

At the gas station

engine oil level

More information on engine oil (� page 284).

See also "Opening the hood" (� page 283).

vehicle lighting

Check operation and cleanliness. For more information on replacing the bulb, see "Tips" (� page 365).

See also the Exterior Light Switch section (� page 124).

Tire pressure

Read more about tire pressure (� page 292).

!If you find that the brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir has dropped to or below the minimum mark, have the brake system checked immediately for leaks and brake lining thickness. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the problem. See “Useful Hints” (� page 314) for more information.

283

Operation

engine compartment

� Engine compartment Bonnet

Openly

1 hood release

� Pull lever 1 down.

The bonnet is unlocked and the handle 2 will come out of the radiator grille.

2 Hood opening handle

� Pull handle 2 out of the radiator cover as far as it will go.

� Pull the hood (do not pull the handle) and then let it go.

The mask will be automatically held open at shoulder height by gas struts.

Warning! GRAM

Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the hood could be opened by the air flow.

!To avoid damaging the windshield wipers or hood, never open the hood with the wiper arms folded forward, away from the windshield.

Warning! GRAM

To avoid personal injury, stay away from moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running. Make sure the hood is properly closed before driving. When closing the bonnet, be careful not to pinch your hands or fingers.

The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine is turned off. Stay away from fan blades.

284

Operation

engine compartment

� Drop the hood from a height of about 30 cm.

The hood locks audibly.

� Check that the lid is completely closed.

If you can lift the hood to a point above the headlights, it is not properly closed. Open it again and drop it with a little more force.

Engine oil

The amount of oil needed for an engine depends on many factors, including driving style. Increased oil consumption may occur when

the vehicle is new

� the vehicle is often driven at higher engine speeds

Engine oil consumption should only be checked after the vehicle has been run-in.

Warning! GRAM

If you notice flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is overheating, do not open the hood. Stand clear of the vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled down. Call the fire brigade if necessary.

Warning! GRAM

The engine is equipped with a transistor ignition system. Due to the high voltage, touching any components (ignition coils, spark plug caps, diagnostic sockets) of the ignition system is dangerous.

with the engine running

when starting the engine

� if the ignition is on and the engine is turned over by hand

Warning! GRAM

Be careful not to close the mask to anyone.

iDo not use special lubricant additives as they may damage the drive units. The use of special additives not approved by Mercedes-Benz limits your warranty rights.

More information is available at any Mercedes-Benz Centre.

285

Operation

engine compartment

Checking the engine oil level

When checking the oil level, the vehicle should

� park on level ground

be at normal operating temperature

� has been stationary for at least five minutes with the engine switched off

To check the engine oil level in the multifunction display, do the following:

� Switch on the ignition.

The standard screen should appear on the multifunction screen (� page 139).

� Press the k or j button on the steering wheel until the following message appears on the multifunction screen:

Engine Oil Level - Measure Now! Correct measurement only when veh. level

Then one of the following messages will appear on the display:

� Correct engine oil level

� Add 1.0 qt. to reach max. oil level!

(Canada: 1.0 liter)

� Add 1.5 quarts. to reach max. oil level!

(Canada: 1.5 liters)

� Add 2.0 quarts. to reach max. oil level!

(Canada: 2.0 liters)

� Add engine oil if necessary.

To add engine oil, see (� page 286).

More information on engine oil can be found in the "Technical Data" chapter (� page 406) and (� page 409).

Other display messages

If the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop* button is not in position 2, the following message will appear:

Turn on the ignition to see the engine oil level!

� Make contact.

If you see the message:

Respect the waiting period

iIf you want to cancel the checking procedure, press the k or j button on the multifunction steering wheel.

286

Operation

engine compartment

� If the engine is at normal operating temperature, wait five minutes before repeating the verification procedure.

� If the engine still has not reached normal operating temperature, wait 30 minutes before repeating the verification procedure.

If you see the message:

Engine oil level not with the engine running!

� Turn off the engine.

� If the engine is at normal operating temperature, wait five minutes before checking the oil.

� If the engine is still not up to normal operating temperature, wait 30 minutes before checking the oil.

If there is excess engine oil at normal engine operating temperature, the following message will appear:

Engine oil level Reduce the oil level!

� Have excess oil drained or sucked out. Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

For more information on engine oil-related display messages, see "Tips" (� page 336).

Engine oil additive

!Excess oil must be sucked off or drained. This may cause engine and catalytic converter damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

!Use only approved engine oils. A list of approved engine oils can be found in the Manufacturer Approved Service Products brochure in the vehicle documentation folder.

Also check the oil filler cap for important information regarding the engine oil that must meet a specific Mercedes-Benz specification (MB 229.5, for example). If this information is printed on the oil filler cap, use only engine oil from the list of approved engine oils in the manufacturer's approved service product booklet that meets the specifications on the oil filler cap. Using engine oils with other specifications may cause FSS to incorrectly determine the next service interval and cause engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

287

Operation

engine compartment

1 filler cap

� Unscrew the filler plug 1 from the filler neck.

� Top up engine oil if necessary. Be careful not to spill the oil.

Be careful not to spill the oil when adding. Avoid environmental damage caused by oil getting into the ground or water.

� Screw the filler cap 1 back into the filler neck.

More information on engine oil can be found in the "Technical Data" chapter (� page 406) and (� page 409).

transmission fluid level

It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. If you notice a transmission fluid leak or if the gearshift mechanism does not function properly, have the transmission checked by a Mercedes-Benz Dealership.

coolant level

Engine coolant is a mixture of water and anti-corrosion/antifreeze. To check the coolant level, the vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine must be cold.

The coolant expansion tank is located in the engine compartment on the driver's side.

!Excess oil must be sucked off or drained. This may cause engine and catalytic converter damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

288

Operation

engine compartment

1 coolant expansion tank

� Using a cloth, slowly turn the cap about half a turn counterclockwise to release excess pressure.

� Continue to rotate the cover counterclockwise and remove it.

The coolant level is correct if the level:

� for cold coolant: reaches the top of the black part of the tank

� for warm refrigerant: it is approximately 0.6 inches (1.5 cm) higher

� Top up coolant if necessary.

� Install and tighten the cap.

More information on the coolant can be found in the "Technical data" chapter (� page 411).

Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries:

� Auxiliary battery (located in the engine compartment).

� Main battery (starter and electrical consumers; located in the trunk).

These batteries must always be sufficiently charged to reach their rated life. Refer to the Service Booklet for battery maintenance intervals.

If you mainly use your vehicle for short trips, you need to check the battery level more often.

Warning! GRAM

To avoid possible severe burns:

� Use extreme caution when opening the bonnet if steam or coolant is coming from the cooling system, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated.

� Do not remove the coolant pressure tank cap if the engine temperature exceeds 194°F (90°C). Allow the engine to cool before removing the cover. The coolant reservoir contains hot liquid and is under pressure.

� Using a cloth, slowly open the lid about 1/2 turn to release excess pressure. Immediate opening will release steam and boiling liquid under pressure.

� Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may ignite when in contact with hot engine parts.

289

Operation

engine compartment

Always use batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz when replacing the batteries.

If you do not intend to use the vehicle for a long period of time, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Retailer about the steps to be taken.

Batteries contain materials that may harm the environment if not disposed of correctly. The preferred method of disposal is battery recycling. Many states require battery retailers to accept used batteries for recycling.

Windshield washer system and headlight cleaning system*

The windshield washer reservoir is located in the engine compartment.

1 washer fluid reservoir

Windshield washer fluid and headlamp cleaning system fluid is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir. It has a capacity:

� Vehicles without headlight cleaning system: Approximately 4.8 US qt. (4.5L).

� Vehicles with headlight cleaning system: Approximately 7.4 US qt. (7L).

G Follow all instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries.

Explosion hazard

D Keep naked flames and sparks away from the battery. Do not smoke.

B Battery acid is corrosive. Do not allow contact with skin, eyes or clothing.

In this case, immediately wash the affected area with clean water and seek medical attention if necessary.

E Wear safety glasses.

C Keep children away.

F Follow the instructions in this user manual.

290

Operation

engine compartment

During all seasons, add MB Windshield Washer Concentrate "S" to the water. Pre-mix the washer fluid in a suitable container.

� Top up the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water (or a commercially available mixed solvent/windshield washer fluid, depending on ambient temperature).

Always use solvent/washer fluid when the temperature may drop below freezing. Failure to do so may result in damage to the washer/tank system.

For more information, see "Mixing ratios for windshield washer fluid and headlamp washer fluid" (� page 413).

iIf you are driving a vehicle where the temperature may drop below freezing:

� Vehicles without heated windshield washer system:

Use a fluid mixture (MB Windshield “S” screenwash concentrate and commercially available solvent/antifreeze) that will provide sufficient antifreeze protection for the area where the vehicle is used.

� Vehicles with heated windshield washer*:

A fluid mixture (MB Windshield “S” screenwash concentrate and commercially available solvent/antifreeze) will suffice to resist freezing at approximately 14°F (-10°C).

To determine if your vehicle is equipped with a heated windshield washer system*, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Retailer.

Warning! GRAM

Antifreeze/washing machine solvent is highly flammable. Do not spill solvent/washer fluid on hot engine parts as it may ignite and burn. You may suffer severe burns.

!Use only plastic lens cleaner. Unsuitable washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the headlights.

291

Operation

tires and wheels

� Tires and wheels Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Retailer for information on wheels and tires that have been tested and recommended for summer and winter driving. They can also advise you on servicing and buying tires.

Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, as pre-existing damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. Therefore, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee the safe operation of the vehicle with such tyres.

Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on tested and recommended wheels and tires for summer and winter use.

important tips

� Only use sets of tires and rims of the same type and brand.

� Tires must be the correct size for the rim.

� New tires cover about 100 km at moderate speeds.

� Periodically check tires and rims for damage. Dented or bent rims can cause loss of tire pressure and tire bead damage.

� If the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tire pressure and adjust it if necessary.

� Do not let the tires wear out too much. Wet grip is significantly reduced with less than 3mm (1/8 inch) tread depth.

� When replacing single tires, put new tires on the front wheels first (on vehicles with wheels of the same size).

Warning! GRAM

Replace wheels or tires with the same designation, make and type as shown on the original part. More information is available from a Mercedes-Benz Authorized Centre. If the wrong size wheels and tires are fitted:

� Wheel locks or suspension components may be damaged

� Proper working play of wheels and tires is no longer guaranteed

Warning! GRAM

Old and worn tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is badly worn or if the tires have been damaged, replace them.

When replacing rims, only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts that are specified for the rim type. Failure to do so may result in screws loosening and an accident.

292

Operation

tires and wheels

tire life

Tire life depends on several factors, including but not limited to:

� Driving style

� Tire pressure

� Distance traveled

turning direction

Unidirectional tires offer additional benefits such as better aquaplaning resistance. However, to reap the benefits, make sure your tires rotate in a certain direction.

The arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of rotation of the tyre.

Checking tire pressure

Check tire pressure regularly at intervals of no more than 14 days.

The tire pressure should only be adjusted when the tires are cold.

If the tires are hot, adjust the tire pressure only if it is too low for the current operating conditions.

The graph on the fuel cap shows the specific tire pressures for hot and cold tires as well as various operating conditions.

Warning! GRAM

Tires and spare wheel must be replaced after six years, regardless of remaining tread.

!Store disassembled tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Keep your tires away from oil, grease and gasoline.

Warning! GRAM

If tire pressure drops repeatedly:

� Check that the tires are not punctured by foreign objects.

� Check for air leaks from the valves or around the tire.

iPressures indicated for light loads are minimum values ensuring high driving comfort.

The increased pumping pressures listed for heavier loads may also be used for lighter loads. These higher pressures provide favorable handling properties. However, the march of the vehicle will be a bit more difficult. Never exceed the maximum values or inflate tires below the minimum values indicated on the fuel cap.

293

Operation

tires and wheels

Tire pressure changes approximately 0.1 bar (1.5 psi) for every 10°C (18°F) change in air temperature. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure when the temperature is different from the outside temperature.

Tire temperature and pressure also increase while driving, depending on driving speed and tire load.

Periodically check the condition and pressure of the spare wheel. Replacement tires age and wear out over time, even if they are never used, so they should be checked and replaced as necessary.

Electronic tire pressure control*

The tire pressure monitor only works on wheels equipped with the appropriate electronic sensors. It monitors the tire pressure selected by the driver in all four tires. The warning is issued to alert you to a drop in pressure in one or more tires.

Tire pressure prompts are displayed on the multifunction display (� page 134). The current inflation pressure is only displayed after a few minutes of driving.

The unit of measurement used for tire pressure measurement can be selected by changing the setting in the control system (� page 148).

� Switch on the ignition.

� Press the k button until the current pressure for each tire appears in the multifunction display.

Warning! GRAM

Follow recommended inflation pressures.

Do not over-inflate the tires. Over-inflated tires may cause sudden deflation (explosion) as they are more likely to be punctured or damaged by road debris, holes, etc.

Do not over-inflate the tires. Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail due to overheating.

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the permissible weight of the vehicle (indicated on the label on the pillar in the driver's door opening). Overloading the tires can cause them to overheat, which could cause an explosion.

iPossible differences between the pressure gauge and the air hose, e.g. gas station equipment and vehicle control system. Readings issued by the control system are more accurate.

294

Operation

tires and wheels

Tire pressure sensor activation

The tire pressure monitor must be activated in the following cases:

� If the tire pressure has changed

� If you have replaced the wheels or tires

� If you have fitted new wheels or tires

� Make sure the tire pressure is set correctly.

� Press the è or ÿ button on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display menu appears on the multifunction display (� page 139).

� Press the j or k button until the display shows the current pressure for each tire, or the following message appears in the tire pressure display after driving. few minutes. Activate with the R button again

Warning! GRAM

The tire pressure monitor does not warn of incorrect tire pressure. Always adjust the tire pressure according to the label on the fuel cap.

The tire pressure sensor cannot generate a warning due to a sudden and drastic loss of pressure (e.g. punctured by a foreign object). In this case, stop the vehicle by carefully braking and avoiding sudden steering manoeuvres.

iUse of radio transmitting devices (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or around the vehicle may cause the tire pressure sensor to malfunction.

iIf you are carrying a flat road tire or extra wheel sensors on your vehicle, do not reactivate the tire pressure sensor until the flat tire or extra wheel sensors have been removed from the vehicle. Otherwise, a punctured tire or additional sensors may cause the tire pressure monitoring system to malfunction.

295

Operation

tires and wheels

� Press the reset button (� page 22).

The message will appear on the multifunction display: Check current tire pressure?

� Press the ć button.

The following message will appear in the multifunction display field: Tire pressure sensor activated

The tire pressure monitor will now monitor the pressure values of all four tires.

The following message will appear in the multifunction display field: Tire pressure display after driving. few minutes. Activate with the R button again

This screen appears until the individual tire pressure values match the tires. The individual values are shown below (� page 343).

If you want to cancel activation:

� Press the ç button.

If the following message appears in the multifunction display field: Reactivate the tire pressure monitor or tire pressure. Check your tires!

� Check the tire pressure and correct it if necessary.

� Reactivate the tire pressure sensor.

rotating wheels

On vehicles with wheels of the same size, the wheels may be replaced every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), or more often if necessary, depending on tire wear. Keep the same direction of tire rotation.

Spin the wheels before the telltale tire wear is visible (wear on the shoulder of the front wheels and center tread on the rear wheels).

Thoroughly clean the inside of the wheels after each rotation. Check and make sure the tire pressure is correct.

Warning! GRAM

Turn the front and rear wheels only if they are the same size.

296

Operation

tires and wheels

For information on changing wheels, refer to the chapter "Tips" (� page 356) and (� page 372).

!If your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure sensor*, electronic components are built into the wheel. Do not use assembly tools in the valve area as they may damage the electronic components. To avoid damage or incorrect fitting, have the tires replaced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Retailer.

Warning! GRAM

Check the torque after changing the wheel. Wheels can come loose if not tightened to 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts intended for your vehicle's rims.

297

Operation

driving in winter

� Winter driving Before the onset of winter, have your vehicle prepared for winter at an Authorized Mercedes-Benz Retailer. This service includes:

� Check the concentration of anti-corrosion and anti-freeze agents.

� Adding a cleaning concentrate to the water of the window and headlamp cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate "S" to pre-mixed antifreeze/windshield washer solvent that is rated for sub-zero temperatures (� page 412).

Battery test. The capacity of the battery decreases as the ambient temperature decreases. A well-charged battery allows the engine to start and the full functionality of the SBC braking system, even at low ambient temperatures.

� Tire change. For the winter season, Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S radial tires with a minimum tread depth of approximately 1/6 inch (4 mm) on all four wheels.

winter tyres

Always use winter tires in temperatures below 45°F (7°C) and whenever winter road conditions prevail. Using winter tires is the only way to achieve maximum ABS, ESP and 4MATIC performance in winter conditions.

To ensure safe driving, make sure that all winter tires fitted are of the same brand and tread pattern.

Always respect the speed rating of the winter tires fitted to your vehicle. If the maximum speed for which your tires are designed is lower than the speed rating of your vehicle, you must post a notice in a place visible to the driver. Such notifications are available from your tire dealer or any authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

Warning! GRAM

Winter tires with less than 1/6 inch (4 mm) tread depth should be replaced. They are no longer suitable for winter work.

Warning! GRAM

If you use the spare wheel with winter tires on other wheels, be aware that the difference in tire characteristics can greatly affect cornering stability and overall driving stability. Adjust your driving style accordingly.

Have the spare wheel replaced with a winter one at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Dealership.

298

Operation

driving in winter

Block heater* (Canada only)

The motor is equipped with a block heater.

The electric cable can be installed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop.

snow chains

Snow chains should only be driven on snow-covered roads at a speed not exceeding 30 miles per hour (50 km/h). Remove the chains as soon as possible when driving on snow-free roads.

Keep the following tips in mind when using snow chains:

� Snow chains are not allowed on all wheel/tyre combinations.

� Snow chains should only be fitted to the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer's installation instructions.

� Only use snow chains approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be happy to help you with this.

� The use of snow chains may be prohibited depending on your location. Always check local and state regulations before installing snow chains.

!When driving with snow chains, always select the high level of the Airmatic* level control system (� page 231). Other settings may damage the vehicle.

When driving with snow chains, it is a good idea to turn off ESP before driving (� page 84). This will improve the vehicle's grip.

!Even on four-wheel drive vehicles, only fit snow chains to the rear wheels.

The use of snow chains with a spare wheel (mini spare tire or folding tyre) and tires of size 265/35 ZR18 (� page 398) is not allowed.

299

Operation

Maintenance

� Maintenance Flexible Service System PLUS (FSS PLUS)

We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle checked at a Mercedes-Benz Authorized Centre, according to the Service Booklet, within the time limits required by FSS PLUS (Flexible Service System PLUS).

Failure to maintain the vehicle according to the Service Booklet at the scheduled intervals/mileage required by FSS PLUS may result in damage to the vehicle that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

FSS PLUS will notify you about the date of the next service.

Approximately one month before the next service appointment, one of the following messages will appear in the multifunction display while driving or when the ignition is switched on (service example A):

Service A in XXXX miles (km) Service A in XX days Service A in X days Service A expired!

The type of service required is indicated in the speedometer display field:

service A

(minor service)

on the h

(senior site)

An additional + after the service type indicates the wear of the brake pads.

Brake pads may reach their wear limit by the next service interval.

During your next service visit, have the brake pads checked and, if necessary, replaced by a Mercedes-Benz Dealership.

i Service interval depends on driving style. A relaxed driving style, moderate engine rpm and avoiding short trips will extend service intervals.

300

Operation

Maintenance

Clear the service indicator

You can clear the service indicator

� Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The service indicator will disappear and the multifunction display will return to the standard screen.

Service period exceeded

If the suggested service window is exceeded, the following message will appear on the MFD display:

Service A exceeded in XXXXX miles (km) Service A service exceeded in XXX days Service A service exceeded in X days

Each authorized Mercedes-Benz center will reset the service indicator after a complete service.

Service call indicator

� Switch on the ignition.

The standard screen of the control system appears (� page 134).

� Press the k or j button on the multifunction steering wheel until FSS PLUS appears in the multifunction display.

Resetting the service indicator

In the event that an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center does not service your vehicle, you can reset the service indicator yourself.

� Switch on the ignition.

The standard screen of the control system appears (� page 139).

� Press the k or j button on the multifunction steering wheel until FSS PLUS appears in the multifunction display.

� Press the reset button (� page 22) for approximately five seconds.

iIf the battery is disconnected, the days of disconnection will not count towards the counter indicated by the service indicator. To determine the actual service due date, subtract these days from the days shown on the service indicator.

Do not confuse the service indicator with the engine oil level indicator:.

301

Operation

Maintenance

The service menu appears on the multifunction display.

� Select the Acknowledge menu using the + or - button.

� Press the ÿ button.

The service indicator now shows the confirmation menu.

The check mark is set to full support.

� Press the ÿ button.

The service indicator now shows the full service menu.

� Press the ÿ button.

Na wyświetlaczu wielofunkcyjnym pojawi się komunikat serwis potwierdzony.

The service indicator is reset.

� Press the è button on the multifunction steering wheel until the standard display appears in the multifunction display.

FSS PLUS now recalculates the values. During this time, the service screen or service menu cannot be called up.

iIf the service indicator has been accidentally reset, have it repaired by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center.

Restart only when proper service has been performed. Resetting the system without performing proper service as requested by FSS PLUS will cause FSS PLUS to incorrectly determine the next service interval, resulting in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

302

Operation

Maintenance

Determining the date of special works

On FSS PLUS, you can enter exhaust gas analysis and general inspection dates.

� Switch on the ignition.

The standard screen of the control system appears (� page 134).

� Press the k or j button on the multifunction steering wheel until FSS PLUS appears in the multifunction display.

� Press the reset button (� page 22) for approximately five seconds.

The service menu appears on the multifunction display.

� Select a plug. Working menu with the + or - button.

� Press the ÿ button.

The service prompt now shows Addit. work menu.

� Select the Exhaust Analysis or General Check menu using the + or - button.

� Press the ÿ button.

The service indicator now shows the next appointment menu.

� Select the month and year using the + or - button.

� Press the k or j button on the multifunction steering wheel to set the month and year.

� Select Confirm using the + or - button.

� Press the ÿ button.

The new date is fixed.

303

Operation

Maintenance

� Press the è button on the multifunction steering wheel until the standard display appears in the multifunction display.

FSS PLUS now recalculates the values. During this time, the service screen or service menu cannot be called up.

Link to service data information

FSS PLUS displays the type of service (letters A-H) on the multifunction display approximately one month before the service appointment in miles (distance) or days (time). This type of service is based on service elements to be performed. The service items are described in the service booklet.

The service steps that need to be performed for the appropriate type of service can be displayed on the multifunction display.

Access to the menu of service items

� Switch on the ignition.

The standard screen of the control system appears (� page 139).

� Press the k or j button on the multifunction steering wheel until FSS PLUS appears in the multifunction display.

� Press the reset button (� page 22) for approximately five seconds.

The service menu appears on the multifunction display (� page 139).

� Select the Items menu using the + or - button.

� Press the ÿ button.

The service indicator now shows the Items menu.

� Press the è button on the multifunction steering wheel until the standard display appears in the multifunction display.

This menu displays the iService items to be performed.

Please refer to the Service Booklet for a description of each service item.

304

Operation

vehicle care

� Vehicle careCleaning and care of the vehicle

During operation, even when stationary, the vehicle is exposed to various external factors that, left unchecked, can attack the paintwork and chassis and cause permanent damage.

Such damage is caused not only by extreme and changeable weather conditions, but also by:

Air pollution

� Road salt

� tar

� Crushing of gravel and stones

To prevent paint damage, remove immediately:

� Grease and oil

Palne

soda

Brake fluid

� Bird droppings

� Insects

� Wood resins, etc.

Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and strength of these adverse influences.

More frequent washing is necessary to cope with adverse conditions:

� Near the sea

� In industrial areas (smoke, exhaust emissions)

� During operation in winter

Check the vehicle from time to time for stone chips or other damage. Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent corrosion.

The chassis of the vehicle should not be neglected. The condition for a thorough inspection is washing the chassis, followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas should be recoated.

Your vehicle has been factory treated with a wax-based anti-corrosion agent in the body compartments that will last the life of the vehicle. Post-production machining is not required or recommended by Mercedes-Benz due to the possibility of incompatibility of materials used in the production process with others used later.

Warning! GRAM

Many cleaning agents can be dangerous. Some are poisonous, others flammable. Always follow the instructions on the package. Always open the vehicle doors or windows when cleaning the interior.

Never use fluids or solvents that are not intended for cleaning the vehicle.

305

Operation

vehicle care

We have selected car care products and developed recommendations that are specifically tailored to our vehicles and always reflect the latest technology. Car care products approved by Mercedes-Benz can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or damage caused by neglect or improper care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car care products recommended here. In such cases, it is best to contact a Mercedes-Benz Authorized Center for assistance.

The following topics provide an overview of vehicle cleaning and care, important procedure information and links to Mercedes-Benz approved car care products.

Additional information can be found in the "Vehicle Care Guide" booklet.

Pressure washer

Always follow the manufacturer's instructions when using a pressure washer to clean your vehicle.

tar stains

Quickly removes tar stains before they dry out and become harder to remove. Tar remover is recommended.

Lacquer, painted body parts

The paint care approved by Mercedes-Benz should be applied when water droplets do not accumulate on the paint surface, usually every three to five months, depending on the climate and the detergent used.

If traces of dried dirt are visible on the paint surface (e.g. loss of gloss), use a paint cleaner approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Do not apply any of these products or wax if the vehicle is parked in the sun or the hood is still hot.

Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for quick, temporary repairs of minor paint damage (e.g. stone chips, vehicle doors, etc.).

iVehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: If a strong jet of water hits the door handle and the SmartKey with KEY-LESS-GO* is very close, which is approximately 3 feet (approximately 1 m), the vehicle may accidentally lock or unlocked.

!Never use the round nozzle to pressure wash tires. The intense stream of water can damage the tyre.

Always replace a damaged tire.

Always keep the water stream moving across the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals or other rubber parts.

306

Operation

vehicle care

engine cleaning

Before cleaning the engine compartment, protect the electrical components and connectors from contact with water and cleaning agents.

After each engine cleaning, an anti-corrosion agent such as MB Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the engine compartment. Before application, all bushings and joints of control rods should be lubricated. The V-ribbed belt and all pulleys must be protected against waxing.

washing the vehicle

Do not use hot water or wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Only use a mild car wash detergent, such as a Mercedes-Benz approved car shampoo.

Spray the vehicle thoroughly with a spray of water. Direct only a very light stream towards the ventilation inlet. Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois often.

Rinse with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish.

Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in the outside rearview mirrors before taking the vehicle to an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors.

In winter, all traces of road salt should be thoroughly removed as soon as possible.

When washing the chassis, do not forget to clean the insides of the wheels.

decorative strips

For regular cleaning and care of heavily soiled chrome elements, a chrome cleaner should be used.

Headlights, Taillights, Side Markers, Turn Signal Lenses

Use a mild car wash detergent, such as a Mercedes-Benz approved car shampoo, with plenty of water.

To avoid scratching, never use excessive force and only use a soft, non-scratch cloth to clean the lenses. Do not try to clean dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge.

307

Operation

vehicle care

Cleaning the Distronic sensor cover*

1 Distronic sensor cover

Use a mild car wash detergent, such as a Mercedes-Benz approved car shampoo, with plenty of water to clean the sensor cover 1.

To avoid scratching, never use strong force and only use a soft, non-abrasive cloth to clean the sensor cover. Do not try to clean dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge.

Cleaning the Parktronic sensors*

1 Parktronic sensor*

Use a mild car wash detergent, such as a Mercedes-Benz approved car shampoo, with plenty of water.

When using a steam cleaner or pressure washer, point the nozzle only briefly from a minimum distance of 11.8 inches (30 cm) at sensors 1.

To avoid scratching, never use strong force and only use a soft, non-abrasive cloth to clean the sensor. Do not try to clean dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge.

Sprinkler

� Turn on the windshield wipers and set them to the vertical position.

Refer to "Replacing the Wiper Blades" (� page 370) for information on adjusting the wipers to the upright position.

i Restart the engine after cleaning the sensor cover 1.

!Move the wiper arms away from the windshield to the vertical position only. Otherwise, they may damage the mask.

��

308

Operation

vehicle care

� Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean cloth and detergent solution.

window cleaning

� Turn on the windshield wipers and set them to the vertical position.

Refer to "Replacing the Wiper Blades" (� page 370) for information on adjusting the wipers to the upright position.

Use the window cleaning solution on all glass surfaces. Car window cleaner is recommended.

Warning! GRAM

For safety reasons, turn off the wipers and remove the SmartKey from the ignition before cleaning the wiper blades, otherwise the wiper motor may start suddenly and cause injury.

!Before turning the SmartKey in the ignition, fold the wiper arms back to the windshield.

Hold the wiper while folding the wiper arm. If released, the impact force of the tensioner spring may cause the windshield to shatter.

!Move the wiper arms away from the windshield to the vertical position only. Otherwise, they may damage the mask.

Warning! GRAM

For safety reasons, turn off the wipers and remove the SmartKey from the ignition before cleaning the windshield, otherwise the wiper motor may start suddenly and cause injury.

!Before turning the SmartKey in the ignition, fold the wiper arms back to the windshield.

Hold the wiper while folding the wiper arm. If released, the impact force of the tensioner spring may cause the windshield to shatter.

��

309

Operation

vehicle care

light alloy wheels

For regular cleaning of alloy wheels, use the Wheel Care program approved by Mercedes-Benz.

If possible, clean the wheels once a week with a Mercedes-Benz approved wheel care product, using a soft-bristle brush and a powerful jet of water.

Follow the instructions on the package.

combination of instruments

Use a mild dishwashing detergent or a mild detergent for delicate fabrics as the washing solution. Wipe with a cloth dampened in a warm solution. Do not use abrasives.

Steering wheel and gear lever

Wipe clean with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or spot clean with a leather care product approved by Mercedes-Benz.

coasters

Use a mild dishwashing detergent or a mild detergent for delicate fabrics as the washing solution. Wipe with a cloth dampened in a warm solution. Do not use abrasives.

Hard plastic trim

Pour the Mercedes-Benz approved interior care product onto a soft, lint-free cloth and press gently.

Headliner and shelf under the rear window

Clean with a soft brush or use dry shampoo to clean if excessively dirty.

Seatbelts

The belt must not be cleaned with chemical cleaning agents. Use only clean, warm water and soap. Do not dry the strap above 80°C (176°F) or in direct sunlight.

iUse only acid-free cleaners. The acid can lead to corrosion.

Warning! GRAM

Do not bleach or dye the seat belts as this can seriously weaken them. In the event of an accident, they may not be able to provide adequate protection.

310

Operation

vehicle care

Leather Seats

Using non-genuine seat covers or wearing clothing that tends to fade (for example, when wet, etc.) may cause permanent discoloration of the upholstery. By covering the seats with a suitable intermediate cover, discoloration on contact will be avoided.

Wipe the leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or spot-clean with a leather care product approved by Mercedes-Benz. Be especially careful when cleaning perforated leather, as the underside should not get wet.

Nobuck leather upholstery (E 55 AMG)

The nubuck leather upholstery is covered with a protective coating. Wipe the nubuck leather upholstery with a damp microfiber cloth to remove dust and other light stains. Gently wipe the nubuck leather upholstery with a microfiber cloth to remove any oil stains.

MB Tex upholstery

Pour the Mercedes-Benz approved interior care product onto a soft, lint-free cloth and press gently.

Plastic and rubber elements

Do not use oil or wax on these parts.

wooden ornaments

Moisten the cloth with water and use the damp cloth to clean the wood trim of the vehicle. Do not use solvents such as tar removers, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes as they may be abrasive.

!Do not use leather care products approved by Mercedes-Benz or any other solvents to clean nubuck leather upholstery.

Avoid hard scrubbing of nubuck leather upholstery.

311

Practical tips

What to do if…

Where can I find...?

Unlock/Lock in case of emergency

Opening/closing in emergency situations

change of a light bulb

Replacing wiper blades

flat tire

battery

shoe jump

tow away the vehicle

fuses

312

Practical tips

What to do if…

� What to do if... Instrument panel lamps General information:

If the bulb in the instrument cluster does not come on during the bulb self-test, when

turn the SmartKey in the ignition switch to position 2, have it checked and replace it if necessary.

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

- The yellow ABS failure warning light comes on while driving.

The ABS detected a fault and turned off. BAS and ESP are also disabled (see on-screen messages).

The SBC brake system continues to function normally but without ABS available.

If the ABS control unit is not working properly, it is possible that other systems such as Parktronic*, Distronic* or the automatic transmission are also malfunctioning.

Continue driving with more care. The wheels may lock under heavy braking, reducing steering ability.

� Have the system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

� Read and observe the on-screen messages (� page 321).

The charging voltage has dropped below 10 volts. ABS has been disabled.

When the voltage exceeds this value again, the ABS will start working again.

� Have the generator and battery checked if necessary.

313

Practical tips

What to do if…

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

v While driving, the yellow ABS/ESP warning light comes on.

ESP is off. Risk of accident! Adjust your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

� Turn ESP back on (� page 85).

If ESP cannot be reactivated, have the system checked by a Mercedes-Benz Dealership as soon as possible.

v The yellow ABS/ESP warning light flashes while driving.

The ABS, ESP or traction control system has tripped due to a loss of traction detected in one or more tires. Distronic* is disabled.

Distronic* is disabled.

� When moving off, accelerate as little as possible.

� While driving, release the accelerator pedal.

� Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions.

� Do not disable ESP. Exceptions: (� page 85).

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accidents.

314

Practical tips

What to do if…

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

3 (Canada only)

; (solo EE. UU.)

The red brake warning light comes on while driving and a warning tone sounds.

You are driving with the parking brake on. � Release the parking brake.

� Note the additional message on the screen.

The red brake warning light comes on while driving.

� There is a fault in the SBC brake system.

� There is not enough brake fluid in the reservoir.

� Risk of accident! Don't go any further. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Dealership. Under no circumstances should the brake fluid be topped up. This won't solve the problem.

Warning! GRAM

Driving with the brake warning light on may cause an accident. If the brake warning light remains on, have the brake system checked immediately. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system.

Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can cause brake fluid to spill onto hot engine parts and ignite the brake fluid. You can get seriously burned.

!If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has dropped to or below the minimum mark, have the brake system checked for leaks and brake pad thickness.

315

Practical tips

What to do if…

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

? The yellow "CHECK ENGINE" fault light comes on while driving.

A fault has occurred in:

� Fuel management system

� Ignition system

� Emission control system

� Systems that affect emissions

Such failures may result in excessive emission values and may put the engine into limp mode (happy running).

� Have the vehicle checked at an Authorized Mercedes-Benz Retailer as soon as possible. The service station uses the on-board diagnostic connector to connect the vehicle to the workshop's diagnostic system. Allows you to accurately identify system faults by reading diagnostic trouble codes. It is located in the left front footwell area next to the parking brake.

The fuel filler cap is not properly closed. � Check the fuel filler cap.

Your fuel tank is empty. � After refueling, start the engine three or four times in a row.

Safe mode is canceled. You don't have to search your vehicle.

316

Practical tips

What to do if…

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

D The red coolant warning lamp comes on when the engine is running.

There is not enough refrigerant in the tank.

If this warning light comes on frequently, there is a leak in the cooling system.

If the coolant level is correct, the radiator electric fan may be faulty.

� Top up coolant immediately to prevent engine overheating (� page 287).

� Have the cooling system checked.

� If the coolant temperature is below 257 °F (125 °C), you can continue driving to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Authorized Retailer.

� Avoid heavy engine loads (e.g. driving uphill) and stop and start driving.

D The red coolant warning lamp comes on while driving and a warning sound is heard.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 257°F (125°C).

� Stop as soon as possible and wait for the engine and coolant to cool down.

Warning! GRAM

Driving with a severely overheated engine may spill some fluids that have leaked into the engine compartment.

ignite. You may suffer severe burns.

Steam from an overheated engine can cause severe burns and can occur when the engine hood is open. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.

Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle, and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

317

Practical tips

What to do if…

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

l While driving, the red DTR warning light comes on.

You are too close to the vehicle in front to maintain the selected speed.

� Apply the brakes immediately to increase the distance.

l The red DTR warning lamp comes on while driving and a warning sound is heard.

You are overtaking the vehicle in front of you too fast.

� The distance warning system has detected a stationary obstacle in the likely trajectory.

� Apply the brakes immediately.

� Watch the road conditions carefully. You may need to brake or swerve to avoid hitting an obstacle.

W While driving, the yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp comes on.

The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.

� Fill up at the nearest petrol station (� page 280).

< The red seat belt indicator will illuminate briefly and a warning chime will sound when the engine starts.

The indicator reminds you to fasten your seat belts. � Fasten your seat belt.

318

Practical tips

What to do if…

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

1 The red SRS light comes on while driving.

There is a fault in the restraint systems. Airbags or emergency pre-tensioning devices (ETDs) may deploy unexpectedly or fail to deploy in the event of an accident.

� Drive with greater care to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Authorized Retailer.

Warning! GRAM

If an SRS fault is indicated as described above, the SRS may not function. For safety reasons, we strongly recommend that you go to an Authorized Mercedes-Benz Retailer immediately to have the system checked; Otherwise, the SRS may not activate as required in the event of an accident, resulting in death or serious injury, or it may operate unexpectedly and unnecessarily, which may also result in an accident and/or injury to you or others.

319

Practical tips

What to do if…

lamp in the center console

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

AVOID THE AIRBAG

The indicator light comes on and stays on at the weight of a typical adult or more than a short person in the front passenger seat.

The system is not working properly. Have the system checked by an Authorized Mercedes-Benz Retailer as soon as possible.

� Also note any messages on the multifunction display and follow the corrective steps (� page 350).

Warning! GRAM

If the PASS AIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on for a typical adult weight or person greater than a short person in the front passenger seat, do not allow any passenger to use the front passenger seat until the system is disabled. reset. paired

320

Practical tips

What to do if…

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

AVOID THE AIRBAG

The indicator light does not come on and/or stays on for the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child seat or smaller in the front passenger seat.

The system is malfunctioning. � Make sure there is nothing between the seat and the child seat and check the installation of the child seat.

� Make sure that no objects add weight to the seat.

� Make sure that no objects are pressing against the seat (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases, etc. are stuck behind or around the seat, head restraints are pressing against the ceiling, etc.). The system can recognize such forces as extra weight.

� If the lamp does not go out, have the system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer as soon as possible. Do not carry a child in the front passenger seat until the system is repaired.

� Also note any messages on the multifunction display and follow the corrective steps (� page 350).

Warning! GRAM

If the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator does not come on or remains off

weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child seat or less in the front passenger seat, the child should not be transported in the front passenger seat until the system is repaired.

321

Practical tips

What to do if…

On-screen messages

The control system displays warnings and fault messages on the multifunction display.

Some warning and fault messages are accompanied by an audible signal.

Address these messages appropriately and follow the additional instructions in this manual.

When the fault memory menu is selected on the control system (� page 134), cleared and non-cleared messages are displayed.

High priority messages appear in red on the multifunction display.

Some high priority messages cannot be cleared from the multifunction display with the reset button.

Other high-priority messages and lower-priority messages can be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button (� page 22) and stored in the fault message memory (� page 142).

On the following pages you will find a summary of the most important warnings and fault messages that may appear on the screen. High priority messages are displayed with a red background.

Warning! GRAM

All message categories contain important information that should be taken into account and, if a fault is detected, contact a Mercedes-Benz Authorized Service Center immediately.

Failure to repair under these conditions may result in damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or result in property damage or personal injury.

Warning! GRAM

No messages will be displayed if the instrument cluster or multifunction display is inoperative.

Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Authorized Centre.

iWhen the SmartKey is turned to position 2 or the Start/Stop button KEYLESS-GO* is pressed twice to position 2, all lights and the multifunction display come on. Make sure everything is in working order before you start your journey.

322

Practical tips

What to do if…

SMS messages

Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution

Broken ABS! Visit the workshop!

The ABS detected a fault and turned off. ESP and BAS are also disabled. The SBC brake system continues to function normally but without ABS available.

Continue driving with more care. The wheels lock up under heavy braking, reducing steering ability.

� Have the system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

Display failure Visit the workshop!

ABS or ABS display not working properly.

Continue driving with more care.

� Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

323

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution

battery protection

summon FeaturesTemporarily unavailable

The battery has insufficient voltage and can no longer operate comfort functions such as rear window defroster.

As soon as the on-board voltage is sufficient, the loads will switch back on.

Note: Conv. Features available again

On-board voltage is sufficient; consumers will turn back on.

Cruise control Visit the workshop! Cruise control or Distronic* are not working properly.

� Have cruise control or Distronic* checked by a Mercedes-Benz Dealership.

Distronic External interferenceReactivate!

Distronic* is disabled and temporarily unavailable.

� Try reactivating Distronic* later.

Visit the workshop! Distronic* is not working properly or the screen is not working properly.

� Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

324

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution

Distronic Currently unavailableview activity. Coursebook

DISTRONIC* turns off when:

� the DISTRONIC cover near the radiator cover is dirty

� functionality is affected by heavy rain or heavy fog

� If necessary, clean the DISTRONIC cover in the area of the radiator cover.

� Restart the vehicle.

DISTRONIC* reactivates without restarting the engine when:

� Dirt falls off the grill while driving (e.g. sleet or snow)

� the system recognizes the full availability of the sensor (due to a decrease in precipitation or drying of the surface)

� the message on the multifunction display disappears

� the last stored speed flashes on the display for five seconds.

You can use DISTRONIC* again as usual.

325

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution

ENG Failure! Visit the workshop!

ESP detected a fault and turned off.

The SBC brake system continues to function normally. ABS may still work.

Continue driving with more care.

� Have the system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

not available See User Manual

ESP is disabled due to a fault or power outage.

The SBC brake system continues to function normally.

� Synchronize ESP. With the vehicle stationary, turn the steering wheel all the way to the left and then all the way to the right to synchronize the ESP.

If the ESP message does not appear:

Continue driving with more care.

� Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

!Make sure you can turn the steering wheel when synchronizing ESP

in both directions as far as possible so that the wheels do not hit anything, such as a road curb.

326

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution

ESP Display Failure Visit the workshop!

The ESP or ESP screen is not working properly.

Continue driving with more care.

� Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

P Selector lever in P position An attempt was made to stop the engine with the KEYLESS-GO* Start/Stop button without the selector lever in P position.

The driver's door has been opened when the shift lever is not in the P position.

� Place the shift lever in the P position.

P/N Switch to N or P You tried to start the engine with the KEYLESS-GO* Start/Stop button while the shift lever was in the R or D position.

� Put the shift lever in P or N. Make sure the brake pedal is depressed.

327

Practical tips

What to do if…

symbolic messages

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

# Low voltage Switch off loads

The battery has insufficient voltage. � Turn off unnecessary power consumers.

Visit the workshop! The battery has been charged with the charger or started.

� Have the battery checked by the service.

The battery is no longer charging. Possible causes:

alternator failure

broken poly V-belt

Do not forget that the braking system requires electrical power and can operate with limited efficiency. Significantly more brake pedal force is required and the braking distance is longer.

� Stop immediately and check the poly ribbed belt.

If it is damaged:

� Stop driving. Otherwise, the engine will overheat due to the inoperative water pump, which may damage the engine. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

If intact:

� Go immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop. Adjust your ride to be consistent with reduced braking response.

328

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

# Battery/alternator Stop the vehicle!

The battery is malfunctioning.

The SBC brake system requires electrical power and therefore has limited functionality. Significantly more brake pedal force is required and the braking distance is longer.

� Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Adjust your ride to be consistent with reduced braking response.

� Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

Low voltage Charge the battery

The battery has insufficient voltage. � Start the engine (� page 43).

Error Electrical consumers disconnected

The receiver battery has insufficient voltage and can no longer operate comfort functions such as seat ventilation*.

Electricity consumers will come back online as soon as the on-board voltage is sufficient.

(Right rear seat backrest not locked

The rear seat backrest is not engaged. � Adjust the rear seat backrest until it is fully locked.

Left rear seat backrest not locked

The rear seat backrest is not engaged. � Adjust the rear seat backrest until it is fully locked.

329

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

2 Brake wear Visit a workshop!

The brake pads have reached their wear limit.

� The thickness of the brake lining should be visually inspected at the intervals specified in the Service Booklet.

� Replace the brake pads as soon as possible.

T Brake fault Stop the vehicle

The SBC brake system is in emergency mode. Significantly more brake pedal force is required and the braking distance is longer.

Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).

� Don't drive anymore.

� Stop the vehicle and notify your Mercedes-Benz Authorized Retailer.

� Apply much more force to the brake pedal.

� Ask for roadside assistance.

Except Canada:;Canada only:3

Reduced braking performance Start the engine!

Longer braking distance. Start the engine!

The battery has insufficient voltage and cannot supply enough power to the SBC brake system.

� Start the engine.

The message disappears when sufficient voltage is available

330

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

Except Canada:;Canada only:3

Reduced braking performance Visit a workshop!

Longerstopping dist.Visit el taller!

The SBC brake system is in emergency mode. A lot of brake pedal force is required and the braking distance increases.

Continue driving with more care.

� Adjust your ride to be consistent with reduced braking response.

Working brake! Visit the workshop!

Faults occur, but the SBC brake system operates normally.

� Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

Overheated brake! Drive carefully!

The brake system is overheating due to excessive brake load.

� Relieve the brake system.

� Drive smoother and think ahead to avoid unnecessary braking.

� When traveling downhill, shift down a gear to take advantage of engine braking power (� page 163).

Continue driving carefully to allow the airflow to cool the brakes.

Slow down the park. ¡freno!

You are driving with the parking brake on.

� Release the parking brake (� page 45).

331

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

Except Canada:;Canada only:3

Brake fluid Visit the workshop!

There is not enough brake fluid in the reservoir.

� Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle and notify an Authorized Mercedes-Benz Retailer. Do not add brake fluid! This won't solve the problem.

Warning! GRAM

Driving while these messages are displayed may result in an accident. Have the brake system checked immediately.

If there is a fault with the SBC braking system, we recommend transporting the vehicle with all wheels off the ground using a flatbed or a suitable wheel trolley/lifter.

A tow bar should be used if circumstances do not allow the recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground.

Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is only permitted up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not exceeding 30 miles per hour (50 km/h). See "Towing Your Vehicle" (� page 385) for more information.

If the SBC braking system enters limp mode, the driver must apply much more pressure to the brake pedal and depress it much more than usual to obtain a braking effect. Depress the brake pedal fully if necessary. The brakes only work on the front wheels. The braking distance is increased!

A low level of brake fluid in the reservoir can cause brake system failure!

Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can cause brake fluid to spill onto hot engine parts and ignite the brake fluid. You can get seriously burned.

iIf you find that the brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir has dropped to or below the minimum mark, have the brake system checked for leaks and brake pad thickness.

!The thickness of the brake pads must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervals specified in the service booklet.

332

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

? Visit the workshop! A failure may occur:

fuel injection system

ignition system

exhaust system

fuel system

� Have the measuring system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop.

B Coolant Check the level

The coolant level is too low. � Top up coolant (� page 287).

� If the coolant is topped up frequently, have the cooling system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Retailer.

Warning! GRAM

Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may ignite when in contact with hot engine parts. You can get seriously burned.

!Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Prolonged driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Do not drive without sufficient coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat causing further engine damage.

333

Practical tips

What to do if…

Under severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature can rise to approximately 248°F (120°C).

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

Ï CoolantStop, engine off!

The coolant is too hot. � Stop the vehicle.

� Restart the engine only after the message disappears. Otherwise you may damage the engine.

Warning! GRAM

Driving with a severely overheated engine can ignite some fluids that may have entered the engine compartment. You may suffer severe burns.

Steam from an overheated engine can cause severe burns and can occur when the engine hood is open. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.

Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle, and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

!The engine should not be started when the coolant temperature exceeds 248°F (120°C). This can cause serious damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

334

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

Ï CoolantStop, engine off!

The V-ribbed belt may be damaged. � Stop immediately and check the poly ribbed belt.

If it is damaged:

� Stop driving. Otherwise, the engine will overheat due to the inoperative water pump, which may damage the engine. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

If intact:

� Do not continue driving after this message is displayed. This can cause serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.

CoolantVisit the workshop!

The cooling fan is not working properly.

� Observe the coolant temperature display.

� Replace the fan as soon as possible.

335

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

G Display failure The instrument cluster display is not working properly.

Continue driving with more care.

� Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

Display failure Visit the workshop!

The screens of various systems failed. Some systems may also have crashed.

� Have the electronics checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center.

± Display Failure Visit Workshop!

Some electronic systems cannot transmit information to the control system. The following systems may have failed:

� Coolant temperature display

Tachometer

� Cruise control screen

� Have the electronics checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center.

J Doors open You are trying to drive with one or more doors open.

� Close the door.

336

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

: US only: Add 1 Qt. engine oil the next time you fill up

Canada only: Add 1 liter of engine oil next time you fill up

The engine oil level is too low. � Add engine oil (� page 286) and check the engine oil level (� page 285).

Engine oil level High, engine off!

There is no oil in the engine. There is a risk of engine damage.

� Carefully stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

� Turn off the engine.

� Add engine oil (� page 286) and check the engine oil level (� page 285).

Engine oil level Reduce the oil level!

You have added too much engine oil. There is a risk of engine or catalytic converter damage.

� Have the oil extracted or drained. Comply with all legal requirements for its removal.

337

Practical tips

What to do if…

When Engine oil - Visit the workshop! The message appears when the engine is running and has reached operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped to approximately the minimum level.

In this case, the warning will first flash and then remain on if the oil level drops even further.

If no oil leaks are observed, continue driving to the nearest service station, where the engine oil must be refilled to the required level with an approved oil.

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

: Engine oilVisit the workshop!

The engine oil has dropped to a critical level.

� Check engine oil level (� page 285) and top up if necessary (� page 286).

� If you need to add engine oil frequently, have the engine checked for leaks.

There may be water in the engine oil.

� Have the engine oil checked.

Engine oil level Visit the workshop!

The measuring system is not working properly. � Have the measuring system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

!Engine oil level warnings must not be ignored. Prolonged driving with the symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

338

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

A Fuel Reserve The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.

� Fill up at the nearest petrol station (� page 280).

Hood open! You are driving with the hood open. � Close the bonnet (� page 283).

F KeyCheck battery!

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* batteries are dead.

� Replace the batteries (� page 361).

Critical Recognition!

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not recognized when the engine is running because

� The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not in the vehicle

� there is strong radio frequency interference

� Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

� Look for the SmartKey.

Otherwise, you will not be able to lock the central locking of the vehicle or restart the engine after turning it off.

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is temporarily not recognized.

� Reposition the SmartKey in the vehicle.

� If necessary, start the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition.

339

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

Key F detected in vehicle!

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* was recognized in the vehicle when locking the vehicle from the outside.

� Remove the SmartKey from the vehicle.

goCheck keyless system

The KEYLESS-GO* system is not working properly.

� Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

Key Don't forget the key

This screen appears (for a maximum of 60 seconds) if the driver's door is opened with the engine off and no SmartKey in the ignition. This message is just a reminder.

� Insert the SmartKey into the ignition.

� When leaving the vehicle, take the SmartKey with KEY-LESS-GO* with you.

Remove the key! You forgot to remove the SmartKey.

� Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

Replace Key No additional code for SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.

� Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

340

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

. Brake lightVisit the workshop!

The brake light is delayed or the light is permanently on.

� Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

Brake light, left Reverse light on!

The left brake light is not working properly. A spare bulb is being used.

� Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

Stop light, right Reverse light on!

The right brake light is not working properly. A spare bulb is being used.

� Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

Display failure Visit the workshop!

The lights are on or the system is not working properly.

� Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

Front fog lamp, left

The left front fog lamp is not working properly. � Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Right front fog lamp

The right front fog lamp is not working properly. � Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

headlt. Cornering lights Bi-xenon cornering lights are not working properly.

� Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

headlt. cornering Reverse light on

The bi-xenon corner light system is not working properly. Different light is used.

� Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

headlt. cornering malfunction Visit the workshop!

The bi-xenon corner light system is not working properly.

� Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

341

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

. left headlight

The left high beam is not working properly.

� Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

right high beam

The right high beam is not working properly.

� Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

License plate lamp, left

The left license plate light is not working properly.

� Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Right license plate light

The right license plate light is not working properly.

� Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Lamp sensorVisit the workshop!

The lamp sensor is not working properly. The headlights turn on automatically.

� In the control system, set the lamp operation to manual mode (� page 151).

� Turn on the headlights with the exterior light switch.

Left dipped beam The left dipped beam is not working properly. � Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

Right dipped beam The right dipped beam is not working properly.

� Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

342

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

. left front position lamp

The front left side marker lamp is not working properly.

� Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Right marker light

The front right side marker light is not working properly.

� Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Park. left front light Reversing light on!

Left parking lights not working properly. A spare bulb is being used.

� Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

Park. right front light Reversing light on!

The right parking lights are not working properly. A spare bulb is being used.

� Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

Rear fog light Reversing light on!

The rear fog lamp is not working properly. A spare bulb is being used.

� Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Reverse light, left The left reversing light is not working properly. � Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Reverse light, right The right reversing light is not working properly. � Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Turn off the lights! The lamps are on even though the SmartKey in the ignition switch is in the 0 position.

� Turn off your headlights.

Left rear light Reversing light on!

The left rear light is not working properly. A spare bulb is being used.

� Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

Rear right light Reversing light on!

The right rear light is not working properly. A spare bulb is being used.

� Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

343

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

. Rear left direction indicator Reversing light on!

The left rear turn signal lamp is not working properly. A spare bulb is being used.

� Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Rear right direction indicator Reversing light on!

The rear right turn signal lamp is not working properly. A spare bulb is being used.

� Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Turn on Next, turn on the left front reverse light!

The left front turn signal lamp is not working properly. A spare bulb is being used.

� Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Keep turning, turn on the front right reverse light!

The right front turn signal lamp is not working properly. A spare bulb is being used.

� Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Go ahead, left mirror

The left turn signal in the side mirror is not working properly. This message will only appear when all LEDs have stopped working.

� Replace the LEDs as soon as possible.

Next turn, right mirror

The right turn signal in the side mirror is not working properly. This message will only appear when all LEDs have stopped working.

� Replace the LEDs as soon as possible.

H Tire pressure sensor activated!

Tire pressure is checked.

tire pressure monitorReactivate

The tire pressure monitor* is turned off.

� Turn on the tire pressure sensor* (� page 294).

344

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

H Tire pressure monitoring deactivated!

The tire pressure sensor* cannot monitor the tire pressure due to

� presence of several wheel sensors in the vehicle.

Wheel sensors overtemperature.

nearby source of radio interference.

� Unrecognized wheel sensors installed.

� Check tire pressure at the nearest service station.

Tire pressure display after driving. few minutes Wake up with the R button

Tire pressure is checked.

Warning! GRAM

Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects your ability to steer or brake your vehicle.

You may lose control of the vehicle. Continuing to drive with a flat tire will cause overheating and possibly a fire.

345

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

H Tire pressure sensor Visit the workshop!

The tire pressure monitor is not working properly.

The wheel was fitted without the correct sensor.

� Have the tire pressure sensor checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

� Change the wheel (� page 372).

Tire pressure. Caution, tire defect!

The pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.

� Check and adjust tire pressure if necessary (� page 292).

Tire pressure. Caution, tire defect.

One or more tires are punctured. � Stop the vehicle carefully, avoiding sudden steering and braking manoeuvres.

� Change the wheel (� page 372).

Tire pressure. Check your tires!

The pressure in one or more tires is already below the minimum value.

One or more tires are under pressure.

� Stop the vehicle carefully, avoiding sudden steering and braking manoeuvres.

� Change the wheel (� page 372).

Warning! GRAM

Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects your ability to steer or brake your vehicle.

You may lose control of the vehicle. Continuing to drive with a flat tire will cause overheating and possibly a fire.

346

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

H Tire pressure R Caution Damaged tire

The left rear tire breaks down. � Stop the vehicle carefully, avoiding sudden steering and braking manoeuvres.

� Change the wheel (� page 372).

tire pressure RL Check your tires!

Low tire pressure in the left rear wheel. � Stop the vehicle carefully.

� Check tire pressure.

� Change the wheel (� page 372).

tire pressure RR Caution Damaged tire

The right rear tire breaks down. � Stop the vehicle carefully, avoiding sudden steering and braking manoeuvres.

� Change the wheel (� page 372).

tire pressure RRSCheck tires!

Low pressure in the right rear tire. � Stop the vehicle carefully.

� Check tire pressure.

� Change the wheel (� page 372).

Warning! GRAM

Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects your ability to steer or brake your vehicle.

You may lose control of the vehicle. Continuing to drive with a flat tire will cause overheating and possibly a fire.

347

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

H Tire pressure FLCaution Tire damage

The left front tire breaks down. � Stop the vehicle carefully, avoiding sudden steering and braking manoeuvres.

� Change the wheel (� page 372).

Tire pressure FLCheck your tires!

Low pressure in the right rear tire. � Stop the vehicle carefully.

� Check tire pressure.

� Change the wheel (� page 372).

Tire pressure FR Caution Damaged tire

The right front tire is punctured. � Stop the vehicle carefully, avoiding sudden steering and braking manoeuvres.

� Change the wheel (� page 372).

tire pressure FRSCheck tires!

Low pressure in the right front wheel. � Stop the vehicle carefully.

� Change the wheel (� page 372).

Warning! GRAM

Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects your ability to steer or brake your vehicle.

You may lose control of the vehicle. Continuing to drive with a flat tire will cause overheating and possibly a fire.

348

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

< Seat belt system Visit the workshop!

The seat belt system is not working properly. � Go to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop as soon as possible.

9 Service memory full See Operator's Manual

The FSS Plus service memory cannot store any more data.

� Have the service memory checked by a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

K Close the sunroof

The driver's door was unlocked with the SmartKey removed from the ignition and the tilt/slide roof open.

� Close the sliding/tilting roof (� page 206).

J Close the sunroof

The driver's door was unlocked with the SmartKey removed from the ignition and the tilt/slide roof open.

� Close the sliding/tilting roof (� page 206).

349

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

L Tele Aid damaged Visit the workshop!

One or more major Tele Aid features are not working properly.

� Have the Tele Aid system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop.

Tele Aid batteryVisit the workshops!

The Tele Aid backup battery is not working properly. If the vehicle's battery is also discharged, Tele Aid will not function.

� Have the Tele Aid system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop.

1 Safety system malfunction Visit the workshop!

The system is malfunctioning. � Drive with greater care to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Authorized Retailer.

Warning! GRAM

If an SRS fault is indicated as described above, the SRS may not function.

For safety reasons, we strongly recommend a visit to an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop.

Center immediately to check the system; Otherwise, the SRS may not activate as needed in the event of an accident, resulting in death or serious injury, or it may operate unexpectedly and unnecessarily, which may also result in injury.

350

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

Passenger front airbag activated, see Man.

The airbag deploys while driving, even if there is a child, a small person or an object weighing less than the system limit in the front passenger seat, or if the front passenger seat is empty. Objects on the seat or forces acting on the seat may cause the system to detect additional weight.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and check the following:

� Make sure there is nothing between the seat and the child seat and check the installation of the child seat.

� Make sure that no objects add weight to the seat.

(Continued on next page)

351

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

Passenger front airbag activated, see Man.

If any of the above troubleshooting steps are successful, the message Passenger Front Airbag Disabled will appear in the multifunction display confirming that the problem has been resolved. Note that after corrective action is taken, it may take up to 60 seconds for the Front Passenger Airbag Disabled message to appear.

If the message Active front passenger airbag remains on in the multifunction display and/or the PASS AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp remains off even after carrying out the above corrective measures, have the system checked by a Mercedes-Benz Dealership as soon as possible.

Warning! GRAM

If the Passenger Front Airbag Active and/or AIRBAG OFF message remains on the multifunction display

indicator light remains off even after the above corrective actions have been taken, do not allow children under 12 or other small persons to use the front passenger seat until the system is repaired.

352

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

Front passenger airbag deactivated see Man.

The airbag is deactivated while driving, even if an adult or a person larger than a short person is sitting in the front passenger seat. Forces acting on the seat may cause the system to detect weight loss.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and check the following:

� Do not lean on the armrests or lift yourself by the handle above the door.

� Adjust the seat to the correct height (� page 35).

� Make sure that no objects act on the seat (e.g. books, briefcases, etc. are not stuck under, behind or around the seat). Such forces may cause the system to detect that there is a lighter occupant in the front passenger seat than is actually present.

� Put it back on.

� Sit properly braced in an almost upright position with your back against the back of the seat.

If any of the above corrective actions are successful, the message Passenger Front Airbag Enabled will appear in the multifunction display, confirming that the situation has been rectified.

(Continued on next page)

353

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

Front passenger airbag deactivated see Man.

Note that after corrective action is taken, it may take up to 60 seconds for the passenger front air bag activation message to appear.

If the message Passenger front airbag deactivated remains on the multifunction display and/or the PASS AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp remains on even after the above measures have been taken, have the system checked by a Mercedes-Benz Dealership as soon as possible.

Do not allow any passenger to use the front passenger seat until the system is repaired.

Warning! GRAM

If the message DISABLE AIRBAG on the multifunction display remains on and/or the DISABLE AIRBAG indicator light remains on even after the above corrective actions have been taken, do not allow any passenger to use the front passenger seat until the system is repaired.

354

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

Feature Not available!

This screen appears if the t or s button is pressed on the multifunction steering wheel and the vehicle is not equipped with a telephone.

Ę Trunk open! This message will appear whenever the tailgate is open.

� Close the boot lid.

W Washer fluid Check the level!

The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 full tank capacity.

� Top up the windshield washer fluid (� page 289).

355

Practical tips

What to do if…

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

@ Vehicle height! Your vehicle adapts to the selected level.

Level selection canceled The "Enhanced" level setting is canceled at vehicle speeds above 120 km/h.

� Reactivate the “High” level setting.

Stop, car too low! Vehicle level control is not working properly.

Avoid over-entering the address. Otherwise, the fender or tires may be damaged. Listen for scraping sounds. Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).

� Pull over and choose a higher vehicle level. Depending on the type of fault, this can raise the level of the vehicle.

Otherwise there is a risk of an accident.

Visit the workshop! The system only works up to a point.

The system screen or the system is not working properly.

� Do not drive faster than 80 km/h.

� Have the vehicle checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop.

356

Practical tips

Where can I find...?

� Where can I find...? A first aid kit

The first aid kit is located in a storage compartment on the front edge of the front passenger seat.

1 tab

� Pull hook 1 up.

� Fold the cover forward.

� Take out the first aid kit.

Spare wheel

The spare wheel is located under the boot floor.

� Raise the trunk floor and hook the handle to the top edge of the trunk.

� Remove the luggage box (� page 357).

1 Vehicle tool kit Wheel bolt wrench and jack

2 Spare wheel3 Luggage compartment

remove the spare wheel

� Turn the trunk counterclockwise.

� Remove the spare wheel 2.

Spare tire storage

� Place the spare wheel 2 in the wheel well.

� Turn the luggage box clockwise as far as possible to secure the spare wheel.

iAt least annually, it checks expiration dates and completeness of content and replaces missing or expired items.

!Always lower the boot floor before closing the boot lid.

i Vehicles with a folding tire: The electric air pump is located under the boot 3.

357

Practical tips

Where can I find...?

In the event of a puncture, a spare wheel may be used temporarily, subject to the following restrictions:

� Do not exceed the vehicle speed of 80 km/h.

� Drive to the nearest tire repair center to properly repair or replace the flat tire.

� Do not drive the vehicle with more than one spare wheel fitted.

See "Spare wheel" (� page 402) for more information.

luggage box

remove the boot

1 Mounting clip 2 Luggage carrier

� Rotate the mounting clips 1 counterclockwise upwards from the mounting screws.

� Lift the boot in the area of the fastening screws and remove it from the boot.

Warning! GRAM

The dimensions of the spare wheel (mini spare wheel or folding tyre) are different from the dimensions of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle's handling characteristics change when it is driven with the spare wheel fitted. The spare wheel should only be used temporarily and replaced with a normal road wheel as soon as possible.

358

Practical tips

Where can I find...?

mount the luggage carrier

� Insert the luggage box into the trunk so that the mounting clips align with the mounting bolts.

� Push the front edge of the boot in the direction of the arrow under the boot sill cover.

� Push the mounting clips onto the mounting pins until they click into place.

Vehicle tool kit

The vehicle's tool kit is stored in a storage compartment under the boot floor (� page 356).

Vehicle tool kit includes:

� A pair of combination pliers

� Bolt with towing eye

� Wheel wrench

Alignment screw

� Fuse extractor

� Spare fuses

359

Practical tips

Unlock/Lock in case of emergency

� Unlock/Lock in Emergency Unlock the vehicle

If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey, open the driver's door and trunk with the mechanical key.

1 Mechanical key lock tab 2 Mechanical key

� Slide the locking latch 1 in the direction of the arrow and slide the mechanical key 2 out of the housing.

Unlocking the driver's door

3 Unlock 4 Lock

� Unlock the door with the mechanical key. To do this, insert the mechanical key into the lock as far as it will go and turn it counterclockwise.

iUnlocking the vehicle with the mechanical key activates the alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:

� Press the Œ or ‹ button on the SmartKey.

� Insert the SmartKey into the ignition.

� Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (� page 33).

360

Practical tips

Unlock/Lock in case of emergency

trunk release

A minimum headroom of 5.90 ft (1.80 m) is required to open the tailgate.

If you cannot unlock the trunk with SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, open the trunk with the mechanical key.

The holder is located above the rear license plate recess.

1 Emergency release 2 Handle

� Insert the mechanical key into the boot lid lock.

� Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to position 1 and hold it there.

� Pull the trunk lid handle 2 and lift the trunk lid.

vehicle lock

If you cannot lock the vehicle with the SmartKey, lock it with the mechanical key as follows:

� Close the passenger and tailgate doors.

� Press the central locking switch in the cab (� page 111).

� Check that the lock knobs on the passenger door are still visible. Push them in by hand if necessary.

� Remove the mechanical key 2 from the SmartKey.

� Lock the driver's door with the mechanical key (� page 360).

� Check that the trunk is closed.

!Always make sure you have enough headroom.

iUnlocking the vehicle with the mechanical key activates the alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:

� Press the Œ or ‹ button on the SmartKey.

� Insert the SmartKey into the ignition.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:

� Grasp the outside door handle.

� Press the start/stop button.

361

Practical tips

Unlock/Lock in case of emergency

Replacing the SmartKey/SmartKey battery with KEYLESS-GO*

If the SmartKey batteries are exhausted, it will no longer be possible to lock or unlock the vehicle. It is recommended that the batteries be replaced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop.

smart key

1 Mechanical key 2 Battery compartment

Spare batteries: Lithium type CR 2025 or equivalent.

� Remove mechanical key 1 (� page 359).

� Insert the mechanical key into the side hole and move the gray slider.

The battery compartment is unlocked.

� Pull the battery compartment out of the SmartKey housing in the direction of the arrow.

� Remove the batteries.

3 Battery4 Contact spring

Warning! GRAM

Keep batteries out of the reach of children.

If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.

When replacing the batteries, always replace both batteries.

The necessary replacement batteries are available from any Mercedes-Benz Centre.

362

Practical tips

Unlock/Lock in case of emergency

� Using a lint-free cloth, place the new batteries under the contact spring with the positive (+) pole facing up.

� Slide the battery compartment back into the housing until it clicks into place.

SmartKey z KEYLESS-GO*

1 Battery2 Tilt the battery up3 Mechanical wrench

Spare batteries: Lithium type CR 2025 or equivalent.

� Remove the mechanical key (� page 359).

� Insert the mechanical key into the side hole and move the gray slider.

The battery compartment is unlocked.

� Pull the battery compartment out of the SmartKey housing in the direction of the arrow.

� Use the mechanical key 3 to press into position 2.

Battery 1 tilts slightly upwards.

� Remove the batteries 1 in the direction of the arrow.

� Using a lint-free cloth, insert the new batteries with the positive (+) side facing up.

� Slide the battery compartment back into the housing until it clicks into place.

When replacing the batteries, always replace both batteries.

The necessary replacement batteries are available from any Mercedes-Benz Centre.

363

Practical tips

Unlock/Lock in case of emergency

Emergency release of the fuel filler flap

In the event that the central locking does not release the fuel filler flap, it can be opened manually.

1 release knob

� Open the boot lid.

� Remove the rear cover on the right side.

� Turn the release knob 1 clockwise (arrow).

The fuel tank flap can be opened.

Manual gear lever release

In the event of a power failure, the gear lever can be unlocked manually, e.g. to tow the vehicle.

1 pin

Open the storage compartment of the object shield in the center console (page 247).

� Pull out the cup holder*.

Inserting two fingers into the horizontal slot at the top rear of the cup holder, lift the cup holder up to remove it.

� Hold the lid at a 45° angle.

� Insert a suitable object 1 (e.g. a pin) through the hole and push the pin down.

� Remove pin 1.

i The shift lever is locked again when it is moved to the P position.

364

Practical tips

Opening/closing in emergency situations

� Emergency opening/closing Sliding/tilting roof* or panoramic sliding/tilting roof*

The sliding/tilting roof or panoramic sliding/tilting roof can be opened or closed manually in the event of a power failure.

The drive for the sliding/tilting roof or panoramic sliding/tilting roof is located behind the lens 1 of the interior roof light.

1 screen

� Fold screen 1 down.

Take crank 2.

� Insert crank 2 through hole 1.

� Turn crank 2 clockwise to:

� Closed sliding roof

� Raise the roof at the rear

� Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to:

� open the roof

� lower rear roof

The sliding/tilting roof or panoramic sliding/tilting roof must be synchronized again after manual operation (� page 208).

iDo not disconnect the electrical connectors.

365

Practical tips

change of a light bulb

� Replacing bulbs The safe operation of the vehicle depends on proper lighting and external signage. Therefore, it is important that all bulb and lamp assemblies are always in working order.

Correct headlight alignment is extremely important. Have your headlights checked and adjusted at regular intervals and after bulb replacement. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to adjust the headlights.

Headlight bulbs

iBackup bulbs will be triggered when the following lights are not working properly:

� Floor lamps

Rear lights

type of lamp

1 additional turn signals

RUNNING

2 Direction indicator 1156 NO

3 Side Marker Light W 5W

4 halogen headlights: low beam

Bi-xenon headlights*: low and high beam1

1 Vehicles with bi-xenon headlights* Do not replace the bi-xenon bulbs yourself.

H7 (55W)

D2S-35W

5 halogen headlights: high beam/high beam indicator

Bi-xenon headlights*: Intermittent high beam

H7 (55W)

Parking and standing lamps

W 5 W

6 faro antiniebla H1 (55W)

366

Practical tips

change of a light bulb

Notes on replacing tail light bulbs Use only 12 volt bulbs of the same type and rating.

� Turn off the lights before changing the bulb to avoid short circuits.

� Always use a clean, lint-free cloth to handle bulbs.

� Your hands should be dry and free of oil and grease.

� If the newly fitted bulb does not light, visit an Authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center.

� Have the LEDs and bulbs of the following bulbs replaced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Centre:

� Additional direction indicators in the exterior mirrors

� High mounted brake light

� Lampy biksenonowe*

� Front fog lights

Rear lights

type of lamp

7 High mounted brake light

RUNNING

8 Brake, tail, parking, foot, reversing and directional lights. Rear fog lamp (driver's side).

Hip

GUIDED*

9C 5W license plate light

Warning! GRAM

Keep bulbs out of the reach of children.

Light bulbs and sockets can be very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before replacing the bulb.

Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. The bulb may explode if:

touch or move it when it is hot

� drop the bulb

scratch the bulb

Wear eye and hand protection.

Due to the high voltage of bi-xenon lamps*, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that such work be performed by a qualified technician.

367

Practical tips

change of a light bulb

Replacing the headlight bulb

1 Indicator bulb holder 2 Halogen high beam bulb 3 Parking and brake bulb holder

bulb4 Bi-Xenon cover* (dipped and

high beam) or halogen (low beam)

Bi-xenon headlights* Halogen low beam bulb

� Turn off the lights.

� Open the hood (� page 283).

� Turn the locking mechanism counterclockwise and remove the reflector cover 4.

� Pull out the electrical connector.

� Release the retaining springs and remove the bulb.

� Insert the new bulb into the socket with the cap in the hole in the lower left corner.

� Fasten the retaining springs.

� Insert the connector into the bulb.

� Align the reflector cover and snap it into place.

Warning! GRAM

Do not remove the cover 4 of the Bi-Xe-non headlamp. Due to the high voltage of xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that such work be performed by a qualified technician.

368

Practical tips

change of a light bulb

Halogen high beam bulb

� Turn off the lights.

� Open the hood (� page 283).

� Press the clip and remove the reflector cover.

� Pull out the electrical connector.

� Rotate the locking mechanism counterclockwise and pull out the high beam bulb 2.

� Insert the new bulb into the socket with the cap in the hole in the lower left corner.

� Fasten the retaining springs.

� Insert the connector into the bulb.

� Align the reflector cover and snap it into place.

Front direction indicator bulb

� Turn off the lights.

� Open the hood (� page 283).

� Turn the bulb holder 1 counterclockwise and remove it.

� Push the bulb into the socket, turn it counterclockwise and remove it.

� Insert the new bulb into the socket, press it in and turn it clockwise.

� Reinsert the lamp holder into the lamp and turn it clockwise.

Parking and foot lamp

� Turn off the lights.

� Open the hood (� page 283).

� Press the clip and remove the reflector cover.

� Pull out the bulb holder 3 together with the bulb.

� Remove the bulb from the socket.

� Insert the new bulb into the socket.

� Refit the bulb holder.

� Align the reflector cover and snap it into place.

369

Practical tips

change of a light bulb

Side marker light bulb

� Turn off the lights.

� Carefully move the lamp forward.

� First remove the back part.

� Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise and pull it out.

� Remove the bulb from the socket.

� Insert the new bulb into the socket.

� Refit the bulb holder, push it in and turn it clockwise.

� To reinstall the lamp, place the rear part into the bumper and allow the front part to snap into place.

Rear light bulb replacement

rear light assemblies

The rear lights are equipped with HiP bulbs.

license plate lamp

1 screw

� Turn off the lights.

� Loosen both screws 1 and remove the lamp.

� Replace the lamp tube and reinstall the lamp.

� Retighten the screws.

!To avoid scratches, we recommend having the side marker light replaced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

Warning! GRAM

Taillight bulbs cannot be replaced individually. The rear light bulbs are pressurized and may burst if you attempt to replace them.

If the rear lights do not function properly, have them replaced by a Mercedes-Benz Dealership.

370

Practical tips

Replacing wiper blades

� Replacing the wiper blades Removing the wiper blades

� Turn the SmartKey in the ignition switch to position 1.

� Set the combination switch to wiper position II (� page 47).

� With the wiper arm in the upright position, turn the SmartKey in the ignition switch to the 0 position.

� Bend the wiper arm forward until it clicks into place.

� Rotate the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm.

� Pull the wiper blade sideways out of the holder.

!To avoid damage to the bonnet, fold the wiper arms forward only when they are in the vertical position.

Warning! GRAM

For safety reasons, remove the SmartKey from the ignition before replacing the wiper blade. Otherwise, the engine may start suddenly and cause injury.

371

Practical tips

Replacing wiper blades

Installing wiper blades

� Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place.

� Rotate the wiper blade to a position parallel to the wiper arm.

� Fold down the wiper arm so that it rests against the windshield. Be sure to hold the wiper while folding the wiper arm.

!Never open the bonnet with the wiper arm folded forward.

Hold the wiper while folding the wiper arm. If released, the impact force of the tensioner spring may cause the windshield to shatter.

Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the windshield without the wiper blade in place.

Make sure the wiper blades are installed correctly. Incorrectly installed wiper blades can damage the windshield.

For your convenience, we recommend having this work done by an authorized Mercedes-Benz service center.

372

Practical tips

flat tire

� Flat tire

In the event of a puncture, a spare wheel may be used temporarily, subject to the following restrictions:

� Do not exceed the vehicle speed of 80 km/h.

� Drive to the nearest tire repair center to properly repair or replace the flat tire.

� Do not drive the vehicle with more than one spare wheel fitted.

Vehicle preparation

� Park the vehicle as far away from traffic as possible on a firm surface.

� Turn on your hazard lights.

� Engage the steering lock in the straight-ahead position and apply the parking brake.

� Move the shift lever to the P position.

� Ask all passengers to leave the vehicle at a safe distance from the road.

Spare wheel mount

Vehicle preparation

Prepare the vehicle as described in the “Vehicle Preparation” section on this page.

� Remove the spare tire from the trunk (� page 356).

� Remove the wheel brace and jack from the boot (� page 358).

lift the vehicle

� Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking the wheels with wedges (not supplied) or other large objects.

When changing a wheel on a level surface:

� Place one block in front and one block behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you are changing.

Warning! GRAM

The dimensions of the Mini spare wheel and folding tire are different from those of road wheels. As a result, the vehicle's handling characteristics change when it is driven with the spare wheel fitted.

The spare wheel should only be used temporarily and replaced with a normal road wheel as soon as possible.

373

Practical tips

flat tire

When changing wheels on a slope:

� On the downhill side, place wedges blocking both wheels of the other axle.

� On the wheel to be replaced, loosen but do not remove the wheel bolts yet (approximately one full turn of the wrench).

The stands are located directly behind the front wheel arch and in front of the rear wheel arch.

1 Jack support 2 Jack 3 Crank

� Place jack 2 on a firm surface under the appropriate support for jack 1.

Warning! GRAM

The jack is specifically designed to lift the vehicle on the built-in jack stands on both sides of the vehicle. To avoid personal injury, the jack should only be used to raise the vehicle when changing a wheel. Never go under the vehicle when it is supported on a jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the raised vehicle. Always apply the parking brake firmly and chock the wheels before jacking up the vehicle.

Do not release the parking brake when the vehicle is jacked up. Make sure the cat is there

always upright (vertical) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack on a level surface. Make sure the lift arm is fully seated in the lift stand. Always lower the vehicle on jacks with sufficient capacity before working under the vehicle.

374

Practical tips

flat tire

Make sure the jack foot is directly under the pick-up support so that it is always vertical when viewed from the side, even if the vehicle is parked on a slope.

� Turn the crank 3 until the tire is no more than 1.2 inches (3 cm) off the ground. Never start the engine when the vehicle is jacked up.

take off the wheel

1 alignment screw

� Unscrew the top wheel bolt and remove it.

� Replace this wheel bolt with the alignment bolt 1 provided in the tool kit.

� Remove the remaining screws.

� Remove the wheel.

Warning! GRAM

Place the lift only on stands intended for this purpose. If the jack is not positioned correctly, the vehicle may fall off the jack.

Warning! GRAM

The jack is intended only for short-term lifting of the vehicle to change a wheel. Not suitable for carrying out maintenance work under the vehicle. Never lie under a raised vehicle. Do not start the engine when the vehicle is jacked up.

!Do not place the wheel bolts in sand or soil. This may damage the wheel hub bolt and thread.

375

Practical tips

flat tire

Spare wheel mount

� Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and wheel hub.

� Place the spare wheel on the retaining bolt and push it in.

� Insert the wheel bolts and tighten them slightly.

� Remove the alignment bolt, install the last wheel bolt and tighten lightly.

Warning! GRAM

Vehicles with a folding tyre: Only inflate a folding tire after the wheel has been properly installed.

Inflate the folding tire with the electric pump (� page 376) before leaving the vehicle.

!To avoid paint damage, place the wheel flat on the hub and hold it while installing the first wheel stud.

Warning! GRAM

Always replace damaged or rusted wheel studs.

Never lubricate the wheel bolts with oil or grease.

Damaged wheel hub threads must be repaired immediately. Do not continue driving under these circumstances! Go to an Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside Assistance.

Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened studs can cause the wheel to fall off. It may cause an accident. Make sure you use the correct wheel bolts.

Warning! GRAM

Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. They are identified with the Mercedes star. Other wheel bolts may come loose.

Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is jacked up. Otherwise, the vehicle could tip over.

376

Practical tips

flat tire

In the event of a puncture, a Minispare wheel may be used temporarily, subject to the following restrictions:

� Do not exceed the vehicle speed of 80 km/h.

� Drive to the nearest tire repair center to properly repair or replace the flat tire.

� Do not drive the vehicle with more than one spare wheel fitted.

Inflate the folding tire

� Remove the electric air pump from the trunk (� page 356).

1 Flap2 Air pump switch3 Electrical plug4 Air hose with pressure gauge and air vent

bolt5 union nut

� Open the cover 1 of the air pump.

� Pull out the electrical plug 3 and the air hose with pressure gauge 4.

� Make sure the air hose vent screw is closed.

� Remove the valve cap from the tire valve.

Warning! GRAM

The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are different from the dimensions of road wheels. As a result, the vehicle's driveability changes when driving with the Minispare spare wheel fitted.

The spare wheel should only be used temporarily and replaced with a normal road wheel as soon as possible.

!Do not leave the vehicle until the folding tire is inflated. Otherwise, the rim may be damaged.

Warning! GRAM

Follow the instructions on the air pump label.

377

Practical tips

flat tire

� Screw the air hose 4 onto the tire valve.

� Insert the electrical plug 3 into the cigarette lighter socket.

� Turn the SmartKey in the ignition switch to position 1.

� Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button on the shift lever once without pressing the brake pedal.

� Press I on the electric air pump switch 2.

The electric air pump should now turn on and inflate the tire.

� Inflate the tire to approximately 51 psi (3.5 bar).

For a foldable tyre, it takes about five minutes. The air hose 4 and union nut 5 may become hot during inflation. Be careful not to burn yourself while using the device.

� Press 0 on switch 2 on the electric air pump.

� Turn the SmartKey to the 0 position.

� Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button on the shift lever twice without pressing the brake pedal.

The electric air pump should now be turned off.

� If the tire pressure is higher than 3.5 bar (51 psi), release excess pressure from the tire using the bleed screw.

� Disconnect the electric air pump.

� Store the electrical plug 3 and the air hose 4 behind the cover 1 and put the air pump back into the boot.

!Do not run the air pump continuously for more than eight minutes. Otherwise, overheating may occur.

The air pump can be operated again after it has cooled down.

Warning! GRAM

Follow recommended inflation pressures.

Do not over-inflate the tires. Over-inflated tires can cause them to suddenly puncture (explode) as they are more likely to be punctured or damaged by road debris, holes, etc.

Do not over-inflate the tires. Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail due to overheating.

378

Practical tips

flat tire

leave the vehicle

� Lower the vehicle by turning the crank counterclockwise until the vehicle is fully supported by its own weight.

� Remove the socket.

1 - 5 Wheel bolts

� Tighten all five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal order shown (1-5) until all bolts are tight. Observe 96 lb-ft (130 Nm) of torque.

� Before putting the jack in the trunk, fold it fully.

Warning! GRAM

Check the torque after changing the wheel. Wheels can come loose if not tightened to 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

Wrap the damaged wheel in the protective film supplied with the spare wheel and place it in the boot.

A damaged wheel can also be placed in the spare wheel well. In this case, stow the spare wheel holder in the boot.

Do not activate the tire pressure sensor until the depressurized tire is in the vehicle.

379

Practical tips

battery

� Batteries Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries:

� Main battery (starter battery and electric consumers; located in the luggage compartment).

� Auxiliary battery (backup battery; stabilizes the electrical system when the main battery is discharged; located in the engine compartment)

The main battery is located in the boot under the boot. Remove the luggage box (� page 357).

Vehicles with a spare wheel

1 negative terminal 2 positive terminal

Warning! GRAM

Jump starting should only be done with the main battery in the trunk.

Warning! GRAM

Failure to follow these instructions could result in serious injury or death.

Follow all instructions and precautions when handling car batteries (� page 288).

Never lean over the batteries when connecting them, you may get injured.

The battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In this case, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention if necessary.

The battery also produces hydrogen, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from the battery, avoid misconnection of jumper cables, smoking, etc.

380

Practical tips

battery

disconnect the battery

� Apply the parking brake firmly or put the shift lever in the P position.

� Turn off all electrical consumers.

� Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:

� Press the start/stop button until the motor stops.

� Open the driver's door.

� Open the trunk.

!Never loosen or loosen the battery terminals while the engine is running or the SmartKey is in the ignition switch. Otherwise, the alternator and other electronic components may be seriously damaged.

Have the battery checked periodically by an authorized Mercedes-Benz workshop.

For more information, see the Service Manual for service intervals or contact your Mercedes-Benz Authorized Repairer.

Warning! GRAM

Do not place metal objects on the battery as this may cause a short circuit.

Use only a sealed battery to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident.

Warning! GRAM

The SBC braking system requires electrical power to function.

Failure of the vehicle's power supply or electrical system may affect the operation of the braking system and put it into emergency mode. The same applies when the battery is disconnected. To brake, the driver must apply much more pressure to the brake pedal and press it much harder to achieve the desired braking effect. Depress the brake pedal fully if necessary. The brakes only work on the front wheels. Braking distance increased! Adjust your driving style accordingly. Refer to "SBC Braking System" (� page 85) for more information.

Warning! GRAM

With the battery disconnected

� You will no longer be able to turn the SmartKey in the ignition and pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button on the shift lever will have no effect

� the shift lever will remain locked in position P

381

Practical tips

battery

� Remove the luggage box (� page 357).

� Disconnect the negative 1 battery cable.

� Remove the cover 2 from the positive terminal.

� Disconnect the positive battery cable.

removing the battery

� Remove the screws/nuts securing the battery.

� Remove the battery holder.

� Remove the battery.

Charging the battery and reinstalling

� Charge the battery according to the charger manufacturer's instructions.

� Reinstall a charged battery. Follow the steps above in reverse order.

reconnecting the battery

� Turn off all electrical consumers.

� Connect the positive cable and fix its cover.

� Connect the negative cable.

� Install the carrier (� page 357). Batteries contain materials that may harm the environment if not disposed of correctly. Large 12 volt batteries contain lead. The preferred method of disposal is battery recycling. Many states require battery retailers to accept used batteries for recycling.

Warning! GRAM

Never charge the battery while it is still installed in the vehicle. Gases can escape during charging and cause explosions that can lead to paint damage, corrosion, or personal injury.

Never reverse terminal connections!

!The battery, its filler caps and the breather pipe must always be properly installed when the vehicle is in operation.

iAfter any interruption in battery power (for example, due to reconnection):

� Set the clock (� page 148) (see COMAND manual).

� Resync ESP (� page 325).

� Synchronize the side windows again (� page 204).

� Re-synchronise the sliding/tilting roof* (� page 208) or panoramic sliding/tilting roof* (� page 213).

382

Practical tips

shoe jump

Jump starting If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started using jump leads and the battery of another vehicle. Attention:

� Only perform an emergency start when the engine and catalytic converter are cold.

� Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.

� Jump start only with batteries of the same rated voltage (12V). Jump-starting with a more powerful battery may damage the vehicle's electrical system, which will not be covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

� Only use jump leads with sufficient gauge and insulated terminals.

� Always ensure that jumper cables are not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts that move when the engine is running or running.

Warning! GRAM

Failure to follow these instructions will damage electronic components and may cause batteries to explode and cause serious injury or death.

Never lean over the batteries when connecting or starting, you may get injured.

The battery also produces hydrogen, which is flammable and highly explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from the battery, avoid misconnection of jumper cables, smoking, etc.

Attempting to jump-start a frozen battery may cause the battery to explode and cause personal injury.

Read all instructions before proceeding.

!Jump starting can only be performed when the main battery is installed in the trunk.

Avoid repeated and prolonged start attempts.

Do not attempt to start the engine with a quick battery charger.

If the engine does not start after several failed starts, have it checked by the nearest Mercedes-Benz Dealership.

Excess unburned fuel generated by repeated failed starting attempts can damage the catalytic converter.

Make sure that the connecting wires do not have loose or missing insulation.

Make sure the cable clamps are not touching any other metal parts while the other end is still connected to the battery.

383

Practical tips

shoe jump

The battery is located in the boot, under the glove compartment (� page 357). Start the vehicle only from the battery in the trunk.

� Make sure the two vehicles are not touching each other.

� Turn off all electrical consumers.

� Apply the parking brake.

� Move the shift lever to the P position.

� Connect the positive poles of 1 and 3 batteries with a jumper wire. First connect the cable to a charged battery 3.

1 Positive pole of the discharged battery 2 Negative pole of the discharged battery

tery3 Positive pole of a charged battery4 Negative pole of a charged battery

Warning! GRAM

Keep flames and sparks away from the battery. Do not smoke.

Follow all instructions and precautions when handling car batteries (� page 288).

Never reverse terminal connections!

384

Practical tips

shoe jump

� Start the engine of the vehicle with a charged battery and let it idle.

� Connect the negative terminals of 4 and 2 batteries with a jumper wire. First connect the cable to a charged battery 4.

� Start the engine of the immobilized vehicle.

The electrical consumers can now be switched on again. Never turn on the lights.

� Remove jumper wires from negative terminals 2 and 4 first, then positive terminals 1 and 3.

Now you can turn on the lights.

� Have the battery checked by the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.i

The message Fault: electrical consumers disconnected may appear on the instrument panel. It will disappear as soon as the battery is sufficiently charged.

!Do not start the vehicle with a trailer.

385

Practical tips

tow away the vehicle

� Towing the vehicle Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground, using a trolley or a suitable jack/wheel. This method is better than other types of towing.

When circumstances do not allow the recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground or with the front wheels off the ground (except vehicles with 4MATIC) only to the extent necessary to move the vehicle to a safe location. where the recommended towing methods can be used.

!Use flat equipment or a lift/platform with the SmartKey and the starter switch in the 0 position.

Do not tow with the sling. Towing with slings over rough roads will damage the radiator and brackets.

To avoid damage during transport, do not support the vehicle by the chassis or suspension components.

Turn off the trailer alarm and automatic central locking

Do not start the vehicle with a trailer.

!Vehicles with 4MATIC: Do not tow with the axle lifted. This may damage the transfer case, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

All wheels must be on the ground or not touching it. Follow the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground.

!If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised (not allowed on vehicles with 4MATIC), the engine must be switched off (SmartKey in ignition position 0 or 1). Otherwise, ESP will immediately activate and apply the rear brakes.

When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, the shift lever must be in the N position and the SmartKey must be in position 2 of the starter switch.

When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground or with the front axle raised, the vehicle may only be towed up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not exceeding 30 miles per hour (50 km/h).

386

Practical tips

tow away the vehicle

!However, to avoid the possibility of damage to the drive train, we recommend disconnecting the drive shaft on the rear axle drive flange (vehicles with 4MATIC: disengageable on the front and rear axle drive flanges) for any trailer other than a short trailer to a nearby garage.

Warning! GRAM

If circumstances require the vehicle to be towed with all wheels on the ground, always tow with the tow bar if:

the engine will not run

� there is a failure of the SBC braking system

� there is a failure of the power supply or the vehicle's electrical system

as this will be necessary for proper control of the towed vehicle.

Make sure the SmartKey is in ignition position 2 before towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground.

If the SmartKey is left in the 0 position of the starter switch for an extended period of time, the starter switch cannot be turned. In this case, the address is blocked. To unlock, remove the SmartKey from the ignition and reinsert it.

Warning! GRAM

The braking system requires electrical power to function.

Failure of the vehicle's power supply or electrical system may affect the operation of the braking system and put it into emergency mode. To brake, the driver must apply much more pressure to the brake pedal and press it much harder to achieve the desired braking effect. Depress the brake pedal fully if necessary. The brakes only work on the front wheels. Braking distance increased! Adjust your driving style accordingly. Refer to "SBC Braking System" (� page 85) for more information.

There is no electric power steering when the engine is off. In this case, it should be noted that driving a vehicle requires much more effort. Customize your ride accordingly.

387

Practical tips

tow away the vehicle

iTo activate the turn signal when towing with the hazard flashers on, turn the SmartKey in the ignition switch to position 2 and activate the left or right turn signal combination switch as normal: only the left or right turn signal works. selected direction indicator.

Canceling the turn signals will turn the hazard lights back on.

!When towing a vehicle with all wheels on the ground, be aware of the following:

With auto central locking on and the SmartKey in ignition position 2 or the KEYLESS-GO* Start/Stop button in position 2, the vehicle will lock if both the front left and rear wheels turn to the right. - when driving at a speed of approximately 15 km/h or more.

Deactivate the trailer alarm (� page 90).

To prevent the vehicle doors from locking, disable the automatic central locking (� page 111).

The vehicle should only be towed with a properly installed towing eyebolt. Never attach the tow rope, tow rope or tow bar to the vehicle chassis, frame or suspension components.

iThe shift lever will remain locked in P and the SmartKey will not turn in the ignition if the battery is disconnected or discharged. See battery (� page 379) or jump start (� page 382) notes.

Manual Transmission Unlock Selector Lever (� page 363).

388

Practical tips

tow away the vehicle

Installation of the towing eyebolt

front of the vehicle

1 cover on the right side of the front bumper

To remove the cover:

� Press the mark on the cover in the direction of the arrow.

� Lift the cover to reveal the threaded hole for the towing eyebolt.

The towing eyebolt is supplied with the tool kit (located in the storage compartment under the boot floor).

� Screw in the bolt with the towing eye as far as it will go and tighten it with a spanner.

To reattach the cover:

� Replace the cover and snap it into place.

rear of the vehicle

2 Cover on the right side of the rear bumper

To remove the cover:

� Pull the cover in the direction of the arrow.

� Lower the cover to reveal the threaded hole for the towing eyebolt.

The towing eyebolt is supplied with the tool kit (located in the storage compartment under the boot floor).

� Screw in the bolt with the towing eye as far as it will go and tighten it with a spanner.

To reattach the cover:

� Replace the cover and snap it into place.

389

Practical tips

fuses

Fuse box in the passenger compartment

1 cover

Openly

� Open cover 1 with a screwdriver or similar tool.

� Remove cover 1 to the rear.

� Place cover 1 on the front.

� Fold cover 1 until you hear a click.

2 caps 3 hooks

� Turn the latches 3 counterclockwise and remove the cover 2.

fuse table

The fuse table is located in the fuse box in the passenger compartment. The fuse current values are also given there.

spare fuses

Spare fuses are located in the vehicle's tool kit in the trunk.

fuse puller

The fuse puller is located in the vehicle's tool kit in the trunk.

iInstall only fuses that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz and have the specified amp rating.

Never attempt to repair or bypass a blown fuse. Have the cause identified and rectified by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

iInstall only fuses that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz and have the specified amp rating.

Never attempt to repair or bypass a blown fuse. Have the cause identified and rectified by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

390

391

Technical data

spare parts service

warranty coverage

identification tags

V-belt drive system

Engine

rims and tires

electrical system

main dimensions

weight

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Consumer information

392

Technical data

spare parts service

� The "Technical data" section contains the necessary technical data of your vehicle.

Spare parts service All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers have a stock of original Mercedes-Benz spare parts necessary for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers ensure fast and reliable parts service.

More than 300,000 different spare parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models.

Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts are subject to strict quality controls. Every part has been specially developed, manufactured or selected and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Therefore, use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts.

!The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes-Benz may cause damage to the vehicle that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or may compromise the durability or safety of the vehicle.

393

Technical data

warranty coverage

� Warranty coverage Your vehicle is covered by the warranty terms printed in the Warranty and Service Information Book. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace or repair any defective part originally fitted to the vehicle under the terms of the following warranties:

� New Vehicle Limited Warranty

� Guarantee of emission system

� Emission Performance Guarantee

� California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont emissions control system warranty

Spare parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts and Accessories Warranty, copies of which are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz service station.

Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet

If the Warranty and Service Information Booklet is lost, it must be replaced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre. It will be sent to you.

394

Technical data

identification tags

Identification labels

1 Certification Label 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 3 Information Label, California Version Vacuum Hose Routing for Emission Control System

4 Engine number (stamped on the engine) 5 Emission control label

When ordering spare parts, please state the vehicle identification number and engine number.

395

Technical data

V-belt drive system

� Transmission system with E 320/E 500 poly V-belt

1 Automatic belt tensioner 2 Power steering pump 3 A/C compressor 4 Crankshaft 5 Coolant pump 6 Generator (alternator) 7 Idler pulley

E 55 AMG

The E 55 AMG has two Poly-V stripes (first stripe shown in purple, second stripe shown in black).

1 Idler Pulley2 Automatic Belt Tensioner3 Power Steering Pump4 A/C Compressor5 Crankshaft6 Coolant Pump7 Generator (Alternator)8 Idler Pulley9 Automatic Belt Tensioner Supercharger

396

Technical data

Engine

Model E 320 (211.0651)

E 320 4MATIC (211.0821)

1 The figures apply to the standard vehicle only. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the relevant data on all special bodies and special equipment.

E500 (211.0701)

E 500 4MATIC (211.0831)

Engine 112 113

Principle of operation 4-stroke engine, petrol injection 4-stroke engine, petrol injection

Number of cylinders 6 8

Bore 89.90 mm (3.54 in) 97.00 mm (3.82 in)

Skok 3,31 cala. (84,00 mm) 3,31 cala (84,00 mm)

Total piston displacement 195.2 cu.in. (3,199 cc) 303.0 cu in (4,966 cc)

Compression ratio 10:1 10:1

Power SAE J 1349 221 hp/5,600 rpm (165 kW/5,600 rpm)

302 KM/5600 rpm (225 kW/5600 rpm)

Maximum torque SAE J 1349 232 lb-ft/3,000 rpm - 4,800 rpm (315 Nm/3,000 rpm - 4,800 rpm)

339 lb-ft/2700 rpm - 4250 rpm (460 Nm/2700 rpm - 4250 rpm)

Maximum engine speed 6000 rpm 6000 rpm

Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8

Correa Poly-V 2390 mm 2390 mm

397

Technical data

Engine

Model E 55 AMG (211.0761)

1 The figures apply to the standard vehicle only. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the relevant data for all special bodies and special equipment.

Engine 113

4-stroke engine operating mode, gasoline injection

Number of cylinders 8

Inside diameter 3.82 inches. (97.00mm)

Jump 3.60 inches. (92.00mm)

Total piston displacement 331.8 cu.in. (5439cc)

9:1 compression ratio

Power SAE J 1349 469 hp/6,100 rpm (350 kW/6,100 rpm)

Maximum Torque SAE J 1349 516 lb-ft/2,650 rpm (700 Nm/2,650 rpm - 4,500 rpm)

Maximum engine speed 6500 rpm

Shooting order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8

Poly ribbed belts Belt one: 1289 mm

Step two: 2449 mm

398

Technical data

rims and tires

� Wheels and tires Only use tires and wheels that have been specially developed for your vehicle and that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Other tires and rims can have harmful effects such as:

� Poor driveability

� Increased noise

� Increased fuel consumption

!Furthermore, tires and rims not approved by Mercedes-Benz may show dimensional changes and tire deformations under load, which may cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts. This may damage the tires or the vehicle.

iFor more information on tires and rims, contact any authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre. The tire pressure chart is located on the vehicle's fuel cap. Tire pressure should be checked regularly and only adjusted when the tires are cold. Follow the tire manufacturer's maintenance recommendations included with your vehicle.

399

Technical data

rims and tires

tires of the same size

16 inch wheels

17'' wheels

E 320/E 320 4MATIC

Rims (light alloy) 8J x 16

1.4 in (36 mm) wheel offset

Summer tires (radial tires) -

All season tires (radial tires) 225/55 R16 95H M+S

Winter tires (radial tires) -

E 320/E 500 (Appearance Pack*)

E 500/E 500 4MATIC E 320 4MATIC E 500 4MATIC (Appearance Pack*)

Rims (alloy) 8J x 17 8J x 17 8J x 17

Wheel offset 38 mm (1.5 in) 38 mm (1.5 in) 38 mm (1.5 in)

Summer tires (radial tires) 245/45 R17 95W - -

All season tires (radial tires) - 245/45 R17 95H M+S 245/45 R17 95H M+S

Winter tires (radial tires) 245/45 R17 95H M+S 245/45 R17 95H M+S 245/45 R17 95H M+S

400

Technical data

rims and tires

18 inch wheels

E 55 AMG E 320 4MATIC (Sport package*)E 500 4MATIC (Sport package*)

AMG light alloy wheels 8 J x 18 8 J x 18

Wheel offset 1.18 in (30 mm) 1.18 in (30 mm)

Summer Tires (Radial Tires) - 245/40 ZR18 or 245/40 R18 97Y XL or Extra Load or 245/40 ZR18 97Y XL or Extra Load

All season tires (radial tires) - -

Winter tires (radial tires) 245/40 R18 93H M+Sor 245/40 R18 97V XL or Extra Load M+S

401

Technical data

rims and tires

tires of different sizes

E 55 AMGE 320 (Sport package*) E 500 (Sport package*)

Front axle: AMG 8 J x 18 light alloy wheels

1.18 in (30 mm) wheel offset

Summer tires (radial tires) 245/40 ZR18

Rear axle: AMG 9 J x 18 light alloy wheels

1.54 in (39 mm) wheel offset

Summer tires (radial tires) 265/35 ZR18 XL or Extra Load M01

1 Not to be used with snow chains

402

Technical data

rims and tires

Spare wheel Mini spare wheel (except E 55 AMG) Folding tire (E 55 AMG only)

iNote that mini-reservoir and folding tires have different tire pressures than road tires.

Make sure the Minispare spare tire is inflated to approximately 61 psi (4.2 bar).

Inflate the folding tire (page 376) to approximately 3.5 bar (51 psi).

4Jx17 rim

Wheel Offset 1.34 (34mm)

Tire T 155/70 R17 110 M1

1 Not to be used with snow chains.

Wheel 6Bx18

Wheel Offset 0.98 (25mm)

Tire 175/55-18 95P1

1 Not to be used with snow chains.

403

Technical data

electrical system

Electrical system

Model E 320/E 320 4MATIC E 500/E 500 4MATIC E 55 AMG

Generator (alternator) 14 V/150 A 14 V/150 A 14 V/180 A

Starter 14 V/1.4 kW 14 V/1.7 kW 14 V/1.7 kW

Battery (auxiliary) 12V/12Ah 12V/12Ah 12V/12Ah

Battery (main) 12V/95Ah 12V/95Ah 12V/95Ah

Spark plugs Bosch F8 DPP 332UNGK PFR 5R-11

Bosch F8 DPP 332UNGK PFR 5R-11

NGK IL FR 6 A

Electrode gap 1.00 mm (0.039 in) 1.00 mm (0.039 in) 0.8 mm (0.031 in)

Nominal value 18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm) 18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm) 18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm)

404

Technical data

main dimensions

Main dimensions

Model E 320/E 320 4MATIC E 500/E 500 4MATIC E 55 AMG

Overall vehicle length 190.3 in (4,833 mm) 190.3 in (4,833 mm) 190.9 in (4,849 mm)

Overall vehicle width 71.7 in (1,822 mm) 71.7 in (1,822 mm) 71.7 in (1,822 mm)

Overall vehicle height 57.1 in (1,449 mm)

Overall Ride Height (Airmatic DC*) (Optional on E320; Standard on E500/E55 AMG)

56,2 cala (1429 mm) 56,3 cala (1431 mm) 55,6 cala (1412 mm)

Wheelbase 112.4 in (2854 mm) 112.4 in (2854 mm) 112.4 in (2854 mm)

Track, front 61.4 inches. (1559mm) 61.7" (1567mm) 62.3" (1583mm)

Rear chain 61.1 in (1552 mm) 61.4 in (1560 mm) 61.3 in (1558 mm)

405

Technical data

weight

Weight

Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)

Trunk load max 220 lb (100 kg)

406

Technical data

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

� Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Capacities Vehicle components and equivalents

lubricants must match. Therefore, use only brands that we have tested and approved.

See the brochure for manufacturer-approved service products or ask at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Engine with oil filter E 320 / E 320 4MATIC 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Approved engine oils

E 500 / E 500 4MATIC 8.0 quart (7.5 l)

E 55 AMG 8.5 L (9.0 US qt)

Automatic transmission 8.0 am qt. (7.5 l) MB Oil for automatic transmission

Front axle E 320 4MATIC / E 500 4MATIC

0.63 US qt (0.6 l) SAE 85W 90 Hypoid gear oil

Rear axle E 320 / E 320 4MATIC 1.06 US qt (1 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90

E 500 / E 500 4MATIC/ E 55 AMG

1.37 qt (1.3 L)

Caja transfer E 320 4MATIC / E 500 4MATIC

0.62 US qt (0.585 L) MB Transfer case fluid

407

Technical data

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Power steering approx. 1.1 US qt (1 l) MB Power steering fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S)

Front wheel hubs approx. 3.0 ounces (85 g) each of high temperature rolling bearing grease

Brake system 1.05 L (1.1 US qt) MB brake fluid (DOT 4+)

Cooling system E 320 / E 320 4MATIC 10 l (10.7 US qt) MB 325.0 Corrosion protection/freeze

E 500 / E 500 4MATIC 11.9 qt (11.3 l)

E 55 AMG 13.8 qt (13.2 L)

Fuel tank with reserve

21,12 w UE. (80,0 l) 2,38 gal UE. (9,0 l)

Premium unleaded gasoline: published octane number 91 (96 RON/86 MON average)

408

Technical data

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Air conditioning system R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil (never R-12)

Windshield washer 4.8 US qt. (4.5 l) MB Windshield washer concentrate1

1 Use MB Windshield "S" Washer Concentrate and water for temperatures above freezing, or MB Windshield Washer "S" Washer Concentrate and commercially available solvent/washer mixture for freezing temperatures. Follow the suggested mixing ratios (� page 413).

Windshield washer and headlight cleaning system

7.4 US qt (7.0 L) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1

409

Technical data

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

engine oils

Engine oils are specially tested for suitability for our engines. Therefore, only use engine oils recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Information on recommended brands is available in the service product booklet approved by the manufacturer or at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

Follow FSS recommendations for scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so may result in engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Engine oil additives

Do not mix oil additives with engine oil. They can damage the engine.

Damage or malfunction resulting from mixing oil additives is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

refrigerant for air conditioning

The air conditioning system uses the refrigerant R-134a (HFC) and a special PAG lubricating oil.

Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral based lubricating oil. Otherwise, the system will be damaged.

Brake fluid

During vehicle operation, the boiling point of the brake fluid is continuously lowered by absorbing moisture from the atmosphere. Under extremely harsh operating conditions, this moisture content can cause air bubbles to form in the system, reducing system performance.

Therefore, brake fluid should be changed every two years, preferably in the spring.

Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Additional information can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centre.

!Always check the oil filler cap (� page 287) for important information regarding engine oil that must meet a specific Mercedes-Benz specification (e.g. MB 229.5). If this information is printed on the oil filler cap, use only engine oil from the list of approved engine oils in the manufacturer's approved service product booklet that meets the specifications listed on the oil filler cap.

Using engine oils with other specifications may cause FSS to incorrectly determine the next service interval and cause engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

410

Technical data

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Premium Unleaded Gasoline Requirements

Use only premium unleaded gasoline that meets the ASTM D 439 standard:

� The octane number (marked on the pump) must be 91 min. This is the average of both research octane (R) and engine (M): (R+M)/2). This is also known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.

Unleaded gasoline containing oxidizers such as ethanol, IPA, IBA, and TBA may be used provided the ratio of any of these oxidizers to gasoline does not exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.

The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents.

It is forbidden to use mixtures of ethanol and methanol. You can use gasohol, which contains 10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline.

These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements such as spark knock resistance, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.

gasoline additives

One of the main problems of engine manufacturers is the build-up of carbon in the fuel lines. Mercedes-Benz recommends using only high-quality petrol with anti-carbon additives.

After a long period of use of fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can accumulate especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine problems such as:

� Insecure warm-up

� Uneven idling

� Hitting/dripping

dud

� Loss of power

Do not mix any special fuel additives with the fuel. This only causes unnecessary costs and can be detrimental to the operation of the engine.

!For engine durability and performance, use premium unleaded gasoline. If premium unleaded gasoline is not available and low octane fuel is used, observe the following precautions:

� Only partially fill the fuel tank with regular unleaded gasoline and fill it with premium unleaded gasoline as soon as possible

� Avoid driving at full speed and sudden accelerations

� Do not exceed the engine speed of 3000 rpm when the vehicle is loaded with a light load, for example two people and no luggage.

� Do not exceed 2/3 of the maximum accelerator pedal position when the vehicle is fully laden or driving on hilly terrain

411

Technical data

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

The Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty does not cover damage or failure due to poor quality fuel or a specific fuel mixture.

Alkohol free drinks

Engine coolant is a mixture of water and anti-corrosion/antifreeze that provides:

� Corrosion protection

� Freeze protection

� Boiling protection (boiling point increase)

The cooling system is factory filled with coolant that provides freeze protection down to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and corrosion protection.

If the antifreeze mixture is effective down to -22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is approximately 266°F (130°C).

The cooling solution should be used all year round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and to increase spill protection. Refer to the service booklet for replacement intervals

The design of the refrigeration system and the refrigerant used determine the frequency of replacement. The replacement interval published in the service booklet is only applicable when the coolant is re-thickened or brought back to the proper level.

To provide significant corrosion protection, the solution must contain at least 45% anti-corrosion/freeze agent [equivalent to freeze protection down to approximately -22°F (-30°C)]. If you use a solution that contains more than 55% antirust/antifreeze [freeze protection to approximately -49°F (-45°C)], the engine temperature will increase due to the reduced heat transfer capability of the solution. . Therefore, do not use more than the stated amount of rust preventive/antifreeze.

412

Technical data

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

If the coolant level is low, use water and MB corrosion protection/antifreeze to bring it to the correct level (check the cooling system for leaks). Make sure the mix complies with the instructions on the label.

The water in the cooling system must meet the minimum requirements that are normally met for normal drinking water. If you are unsure about the quality of the water, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Retailer.

Anti-corrosion/anti-freeze

Your vehicle contains some aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines requires that the anti-corrosion/antifreeze coolant used in such engines is specifically formulated to protect the aluminum components. (If such anti-corrosion/anti-freeze coolant is not used, service life will be significantly reduced.)

It is therefore strongly recommended to use the following product in the vehicle: Mercedes-Benz 325.0 Anti-corrosion/antifreeze.

Before the start of the winter season (or once a year in hot southern regions), check the concentration of rust inhibitor/antifreeze. The coolant is also regularly checked every time you take your vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz service center.

Amount of anti-corrosion/antifreeze

Model approx. freeze protection

– 35 °F (– 37 °C) – 49 °F (– 45 °C)

E 320/E 320 4MATIC 5.0 L (5.3 Gallon) 5.9 L (5.9 L)

E 500 /E 500 4MATIC 6,0 galonów (5,65 l) 6,6 galonów (6,2 l)

E 55 AMG 7.0 quarter (6.6 l) 7.7 quarter (7.3 l)

413

Technical data

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Window and headlight washing system

Both the windshield washer system and the headlight washers are powered by the windshield washer reservoir.

The windshield washer fluid reservoir has an approximate capacity of:

� 7.4 US qt (7 l) on vehicles with headlight cleaning system* or heated tank

� 4.8 US qt (4.5 l) on vehicles without headlight cleaning system

� Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water (or concentrate and commercial antifreeze/windscreen washer solvent, depending on ambient temperature).

Mixing ratio of windshield washer fluid and headlight washer fluid

For temperatures above the "freezing point", use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate "S" and water:

� 1 part "S" to 100 parts of water

[40 ml of "S" per 1 gallon (4 liters) of water].

For temperatures below the "freezing point", use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate "S" and a commercially available solvent/windshield washer fluid mixture:

� 1 part "S" to 100 parts solvent

[40 ml of "S" per 1 gallon (4 liters) of solvent].

G warning

Antifreeze/washing machine solvent is highly flammable. Do not spill solvent/washer fluid on hot engine parts as it may ignite and burn. You can get seriously burned.

414

Technical data

Consumer information

Consumer Information The following is published as required by all passenger car manufacturers pursuant to Title 49, Part 575 of the United States Code of Federal Regulations, pursuant to the "National Road Safety and Motor Vehicle Act of 1966".

Uniform tire quality classification

Quality grades can be found on the sidewall of the tire between the tread shoulder and maximum section width, where applicable. For example:

In addition to these classes, all passenger car tires must meet federal safety requirements.

Tread wear

Treadwear Grade is a comparative rating based on tire wear rate when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test track. For example, a 150 grade tire would wear one and a half (1½) times more while driving than a 100 grade tyre. However, the relative performance of the tires depends on the actual conditions of use. and can deviate significantly from the norm due to differences in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road and weather conditions.

Traction

The grip grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. These grades reflect the tyre's ability to stop in the wet as measured under controlled conditions on government-specified asphalt and concrete test surfaces. A tire marked C may have poor grip.

Tread Wear Traction Temperature

200 AA A

G warning

The grip grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-line braking traction tests and does not include acceleration, cornering, aquaplaning or maximum grip characteristics.

415

Technical data

Consumer information

Temperature

The temperature grades are A (highest), B and C, which determine the tire's resistance to heat generation and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specific test wheel in a laboratory. Sustained high temperatures can degenerate the tire material and shorten its life, and excessive temperatures can cause sudden tire failure. Class C corresponds to the level of performance that all tires for passenger cars must meet according to Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Classes B and A represent higher levels of performance on a test wheel in a laboratory than the minimum required by law.

G warning

The temperature class for this tire is set for a properly inflated and not overloaded tire. Over-speeding, under-inflating or over-loading, individually or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure.

416

417

Technical terms

ABS (Anti-Lock Braking System) Prevents the wheels from locking when braking, allowing you to continue steering the vehicle.

ADS (Adaptive Damping System) Automatically adjusts the optimal suspension damping to the prevailing driving conditions.

Airmatic DC (Airmatic Dual Control) Automatically selects the optimal suspension setting and ride height for your vehicle. Airmatic consists of two elements:

� Adaptive damping system

� Vehicle level check

Leveling pinThreaded metal pin. A centering pin is an aid used during a tire change to align the wheel with the wheel hub.

BAS (Brake Assist System) A system that potentially shortens the braking distance in emergency braking situations. The system activates when it detects an emergency based on how quickly the brake is applied.

Bi-xenon headlamps*Headlamps that use an electric arc as a light source and produce a more intense light than incandescent headlamps. Bi-xenon headlights produce low and high beam.

CAC (Customer Service Centre) A Mercedes-Benz customer service center that will answer all your questions about your vehicle and provide assistance in the event of a breakdown.

CAN (Controller Area Network) A data bus network used to control vehicle functions such as door locks or windshield wipers.

Cab All instruments, switches, buttons and indicator/warning lamps in the passenger compartment necessary to operate and monitor the vehicle.

COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System) Information and operation center for the vehicle's sound and communication systems, including the radio and navigation system, as well as other optional equipment (CD changer, telephone, etc.).

418

Technical terms

Control system The control system is used to retrieve information from the vehicle and change component settings. Information and messages appear on the multifunction display. The driver uses the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to navigate the system and adjust settings.

Cruise control Driving comfort system to automatically maintain the vehicle speed set by the driver.

Distronic* Comfort cruise control that helps the driver maintain the selected speed:

� If there is no vehicle directly ahead, the system operates in the same way as conventional cruise control.

� If there is a slower-moving vehicle ahead, Distronic will slow your vehicle as much as reduced acceleration and up to 20% braking force will allow to maintain a pre-set minimum distance.

DTR(->Dystronic*)

Engine number A number established by the manufacturer and placed on the cylinder block to uniquely identify each engine produced.

Engine oil viscosity Measures the internal friction (viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The higher the temperature the oil can tolerate undiluted, or the lower the temperature it can tolerate without slime formation, the better the viscosity.

ESP (Electronic Stability Program) Improves vehicle handling and directional stability.

ETD (Emergency Tensioning Device) A device that is activated in certain frontal and rear crashes that cross the threshold of the system to tension the seat belts.->SRS

FSS PLUS (Flexible Service System PLUS) A service indicator in the multifunction display that informs the driver when the vehicle is due to be serviced next.

419

Technical terms

Gear range The number of gears available for changing the automatic transmission. The automatic shifting process can be adapted to specific operating conditions using the shift lever.

GPS (Global Positioning System) A satellite system for transmitting geographic location information to and from vehicles equipped with special receivers. It uses digital maps on DVDs for navigation.

Instrument panel Displays and gauges/warning lights in the driver's field of vision, including tachometer, speedometer and fuel gauge.

Kickdown When you press the accelerator beyond the point of resistance, the transmission shifts to the lowest possible gear. This causes the vehicle to accelerate very quickly and should not be used for normal acceleration needs.

Lock button A button on the door that indicates whether the door is locked or unlocked. Pressing the lock button on each door from the inside will lock that door.

Memory function*Used to store three individual seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror positions for each SmartKey.

MON (Motor Octane Number) Engine octane number for gasoline determined by a standardized method. This is an indicator of gasoline resistance to unwanted detonation (knocking). The average MON (engine octane number) and ->RON (test octane number) is placed on the pump, also known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.

420

Technical terms

Multifunction display A display area in the instrument cluster that is used to present information provided by the control system.

Multifunction steering wheel Steering wheel with buttons to operate the steering system.

Overspeed Range Engine speed within the red mark on the tachometer dial. Avoid this engine speed range as it can cause severe engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Poly V-Belt Drive Drives the engine components (alternator, A/C compressor, etc.) from the engine.

Driveline Collective term for all components used to generate and transmit motive power to the driving axles, including:

Engine

� Clutch/torque converter

Transmission

� Transfer Case*

Drive shaft

� Axles/Shafts

Program mode selector switch Switches the automatic transmission between standard S mode and C mode.

E 55 AMG with gearshift lever on the steering wheel and manual shift program: In addition to S and C (for S or C sports comfort driving), M can be used for the manual shift program.

Remote vehicle diagnostics Transmission of vehicle data and current location to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for Tele Aid subscribers.

Restraint systems Seat belts, belt tensioners, airbags and child restraint systems. As independent systems, their protective functions complement each other.

RON (Research Octane Number) Research octane number for gasoline determined by a standardized method. This is an indicator of the resistance of the petrol hose to unwanted detonation (knocking). Average ->MON (engine octane number) and RON (test octane number) is placed on the pump, also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.

421

Technical terms

SBC (Sensotronic Brake Control) Electronically controlled hydraulic brake system for greater safety and braking comfort.

Shift Lock When the vehicle is parked, this lock prevents the shift lever from moving out of P without the ignition on or the engine running and the brake pedal depressed.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Seat belts, pretensioner and airbags. While these are independent systems, they are closely interconnected to ensure effective occupant protection.

Tele Aid (Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand) The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response: automatic and manual emergency assistance, roadside assistance and information assistance. Teleassistance is initially activated by concluding a subscription contract and making a known call. The Tele Aid system works as long as the vehicle's battery is charged, properly connected, undamaged and there is cellular and GPS coverage. .

Telematics*Combination of the terms "telecommunications" and "information technology".

Tightening torque The force multiplied by the lever arm (e.g. wrench) with which threaded fasteners, such as wheel bolts, are tightened.

Tire Speed IndexPart of the tire designation; indicates the speed range for which the tire is approved.

The traction force exerted by a vehicle on the road through the tires.

Vehicle Level Control The vehicle's ground clearance is controlled automatically according to the selected setting and speed. The driver can adjust the ground clearance manually, for example on very rough roads.

VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) A number assigned by the manufacturer and placed on the body to uniquely identify each vehicle produced.

Voice control system*Voice control system for car phones, portable mobile phones and audio systems (radio, CD, etc.).

422

423

Index

AAB 80, 417

ABS control 81 Malfunction indicator lamp 312 Display messages 322 Warning lamp 312

Throttle position, automatic transmission 168

Accident In case of 50

Air conditioning activation (cooling) 186, 198 Recirculated air mode 184, 195 Alarm 89 Automatic air conditioning 190 Central locking (control) 154 Carbon filter 196 Air conditioning 180 Defrosting 183 Distance warning* 227 Distronic* 223

Easy in/out function* 155ESP 85Exterior headlights 46Exterior lights 125Front fog lights 126Hazard lights 128Headlights 46High beam lights 127Ignition 31Ignition with KEYLESS-GO* 33Immobilizer 53, 89Rear fog light 126, 127Defrost Rear window switch 177 Re sid dual heating 186, 198 Heated seat* 119 Trailer alarm 90 Wipers 48

286 engine oil additive

Additional Gauge 365 Adjustable Fans, Rear Passenger

compartment 199

Adjustment 34 Air distribution 182, 193 Air volume 182, 183, 194 Backrest inclination 35 Exterior mirror 38 Headrest height 36 Headrest inclination 36 Instrument panel lighting 131 Interior mirror 37 Mirrors 37 Multi-contour seat* 116 Seat depth 117 Seat inclination cushion 35 Length seat adjustment 35Seat height 35Seat 34Steering column height 37 Steering wheel 36

Adjusting the steering column in or out 37 Adjusting the steering column up or down 37 Adjusting the dynamic seat 157

424

Index

Air conditioning (cooling) Off 186, 198 On. 186, 198

Air Distribution Regulations 182, 193

Air pressure see Tire pressure 292

Air pump, electric 377 Air recirculation mode 184, 194

Activation 184, 195 Deactivation 185, 195

Rear air vents Adjustable 199

Adjusting the amount of air 182, 183, 194

Airbags 57Children 58Front 61Passenger 61Safety regulations 60Side collision 62Window curtain 62

Airmatic DC (dual control)* 230 Alarma

Audible 79, 90 Cancel 90 Visual 89

Anti-burglar alarm system 89

Dowel Pin (Car Tool Kit) 358, 374, 417

Anti-Glare Automatic 172

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) 417 Anti-theft alarm system

Armed 89 Cancel alarm 90 Disarmed 90

Anti-theft systems 89 Anti-theft alarm 89 Immobilizer 89 Trailer alarm 90

Aquaplaning w Hidroplaneo 273Cenicero 249

At the gas station 280 Menu AUDIO 139

Selecting a radio station 139 Selecting a satellite radio station* 140

System audio Modo CD 140

Automatic dimming rearview mirror 172

Central automatic lockingOn/Off

(control system) 154 Automatic air conditioning

Temperature sensor 27 Automatic air conditioner* 188

Air distribution adjustment 193 Air volume adjustment 183, 194 Air recirculation mode 194 Defrosting 194 Rear window defrosting 177 Residual heat utilization 198 Residual ventilation 198 Temperature control 192

425

Index

Automatic headlight mode 125Automatic light control

Activation 129 Deactivation 129

Auto lock while driving 111 Automatic transmission 162

Throttle Position 168 Emergency Run

(Failure Mode) 171 Gear Ranges 164 Shift Lever Position 165 Shift Failure 171 Kickdown 168 Manual Shift Program Mode

(SL 55 AMG Kompressor) 169 Manual transmission 163 One-touch shifting 163 Programming mode switch 168 Gear lever position 162 Starting the engine 43 Winter program mode 168

Backup

Folding forward 240 Folding back 241

BAS 82, 417 Baterie, SmartKey

Change 361, 362 Indicator lamp 96, 100 Check 97, 102

Baterie, SmartKey z KEYLESS-GO*Change 361, 362Check 97, 102

Vehicle batteries Charging 381 Disconnecting 380 Display messages 323, 327, 328 Reconnecting 381 Removing 381 Servicing 379

Discharged battery Starting bridge 382

Bi-xenon headlights* 417 Block heater* 298 Block

Rear window service 78

Brake Assist System (BAS) 417 Brake fluid 281, 331 Brake pads

Display message 329 Brakes

Warning lamp 314 Break-in period 268 Bulbs, replace

Additional indicators 365 Fog lights 365 Headlights 365, 367 High beam 365 High beam bulb

(Only Bi-Xenon headlights*) 368 High beam bulb

(Halogen headlights only) 368 Top brake light 366 License plate lights 366, 369 Low beam 365 Parking lights 366, 368 Side marker lights 365, 369 Footwell lights 366, 368 Taillights 366 Taillight assemblies 369 Direction indicators 365

426

Index

CCAC (Customer Service Center) 417 I'm calling

Distronic settings* 141Range (distance to empty tank) 159Service indicator 300

CAN system 417 Lashing eyes 244 CD player

Center console support 140

Down 26 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator

lampa 319Top 25

Temperature unit setting Celsius 146

Central Locking Automatic 111 Inside 111 Switch 111 On/Off

(control) 154 Unlocking from inside 111

Central locking switch 111 Change

Baterie (SmartKey z KEYLESS-GO*) 361, 362

Batteries (SmartKey) 361, 362 SmartKey Setup 155Vehicle Level 232

Carbon filter 196 on 196 off 197

Vehicle battery charging 381

Malfunction Indicator CHECK 315 ENGINE

Checking the coolant level 287 Oil level 281, 284 Tir

Owner's Manual E-Class Saloon - Mercedes-Benz · PDF File Owner's Manual E-Class Saloon E 320 E 320 4MATIC E 500 E 500 4MATIC E55AMG. Our company and employees congratulate - [PDF document] (2023)